Mechanical Specs - SPECIFICATIONS

CONSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE
& GUARANTEE
OF
PROPOSED 3B + G + 9 STOREY
RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
ON PLOT NO. (R-22, R-23 & R-24) AT AL-

ERKYAH, LUSAIL CITY, DOHA, QATAR
MAIN WORKS PACKAGE
TENDER DOCUMENT
VOLUME II
SPECIFICATIONS
PART 3 OF 3
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE
& GUARANTEE
OF
PROPOSED 3 TYPICAL RESIDENTIAL

BUILDING (3B + G + 9 STOREYS)
ON PLOTS R-22, R-23, AND R-24

AL- ERKYAH, LUSAIL CITY, DOHA, QATAR
MAIN WORKS PACKAGE
TENDER DOCUMENTS
VOLUME I : TENDER & CONTRACT CONDITIONS
VOLUME II : SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME III : BILLS OF QUANTITIES
VOLUME IV : TENDER DRAWINGS
VOLUME V : SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT

Proposed 3B + G + 9 Storey Residential Building on Plot No. R-22, R-23, R-24
Al-Erkyah, Lusail City, Doha, Qatar for Sheikh Abdurahman Hamad Al Thani
PART A - MECHANICAL
INDEX
Revision History
00 July 2015 Final MEP Specification SM/DB YS/YA JH
Rev. Date Description of Revision Prepared By Checked By Approved By

PART A - MECHANICAL
INDEX
SECTION 1 : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 2 : INSULATION
SECTION 3 : AIR CONDITIONING PIPE WORK
SECTION 4 : DUCT WORK AND AIRSIDE EQUIPMENT
SECTION 5 : AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION EQUIPMENT
SECTION 6 : INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
SECTION 7 : TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 8 : PLUMBING WORKS
SECTION 9 : SOIL, WASTE VENT AND STORM WATER SYSTEMS
SECTION 10 : FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
SECTION 11 : SNG SYSTEM
Part A - Mechanical 2 of 2 July 2015

Index
PART A - SECTION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Revision History

PART A - SECTION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
INDEX
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 4

2.0 INTENT ............................................................................................................................................... 4
3.0 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS. ..................................................................................... 4
4.0 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS............................................................................................... 4
5.0 CONTRACT DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................... 5
6.0 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS. ......................................................................................................... 5
7.0 SHOP DRAWINGS & MATERIAL SUBMITTAL ................................................................................ 6
8.0 FORMAT OF INFORMATION SUBMITTED ...................................................................................... 7
9.0 RECORD DRAWINGS ........................................................................................................................ 7
10.0 PLANTROOM SCHEDULES .............................................................................................................. 8
11.0 TEMPORARY SERVICE. ................................................................................................................... 8
12.0 COOPERATION.................................................................................................................................. 8
13.0 PROTECTION AND STORAGE ......................................................................................................... 8
14.0 EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................ 9
15.0 SUPERVISION. ................................................................................................................................... 9
16.0 SCHEDULING..................................................................................................................................... 9
17.0 WORK TO CONTINUE. .................................................................................................................... 10
18.0 STANDARDS AND AUTHORITIES. ................................................................................................ 10
19.0 WORKMANSHIP .............................................................................................................................. 10
20.0 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. .....................................................................................................11
21.0 CLEANING........................................................................................................................................ 11
22.0 ACCESSIBILITY. .............................................................................................................................. 11
23.0 CUTTING AND PATCHING. ............................................................................................................. 11
24.0 INSERTS, SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND CURBS.................................................................... 12
25.0 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS..................................................................................................... 13
26.0 FLASHING. ....................................................................................................................................... 14
27.0 DESIGN AND STANDARDISATION ................................................................................................ 14
28.0 STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................... 15
29.0 GENERAL WELDING REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................... 15
30.0 TESTS FOR WELDER QUALIFICATION. ....................................................................................... 16
31.0 TESTING OF WELDED PIPEWORK INSTALLATION. ................................................................... 17
32.0 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................................................17
33.0 FLUSHING AND CLEANING. .......................................................................................................... 18
34.0 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING STERILIZATION AFTER COMMISSIONING ................................... 18
35.0 TESTING OF DRAINAGE PIPEWORK ............................................................................................ 18
Part A - Section 1 2 of 31 July 2015

General Requirements
36.0 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF WATER PIPING SYSTEMS ............................................................ 18

37.0 SYSTEM OPERATION TESTS ........................................................................................................19
38.0 TRAINING OF EMPLOYER / END USER PERSONNEL ................................................................ 20
39.0 TEMPORARY USAGE...................................................................................................................... 20
40.0 INSPECTION OF THE WORK.......................................................................................................... 20
41.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ............................................................................. 21
42.0 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE. ................................................................................................................ 22
43.0 CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION. ........................................................................................... 23
44.0 GUARANTEES ................................................................................................................................. 23
45.0 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................................ 23
46.0 SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS .............................................................................................. 24

1.0 GENERAL
1.1 The Instructions to Tenderers, Form of Tender, Main Conditions of contract, Note on Pricing, the
Preliminary Section and any Supplementary Conditions of Contract apply to and are part of this
Division and all subsections.
1.2 Sections of this Services Specification which relate to other Divisions are not intended to
supersede the specifications of these divisions, but to guide the Contractor in tendering and
performance. In no event shall a quality less than that indicated here be acceptable.
1.3 The precedence of various Documents and Drawings shall be as determined in the General
Contract Documents, subject to the limitation that any item shown or required in any of the
documents or drawings shall be considered by the Contractor to be included in all Documents.
2.0 INTENT
2.1 Check drawings and accept responsibility for proper performance of all mechanical systems in
accordance with relevant standards and codes and design parameters listed hereinafter.
2.2 Provide all items, articles, materials, operations, sundries, labour, supervision, guarantees,
allowances for overhead and profit, etc., to achieve a fully functionable and acceptable system.
2.3 Consider the specifications as an integral part of the work together with the drawings. Consider
any item or subject omitted from one, but mentioned or reasonably implied on the other as
properly and sufficiently indicated and provide the same under the work of this division.
2.4 The Contractor is responsible for developing his own take off of materials and is to make this
available as requested to the Engineer.
3.0 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS.
3.1 Visit the site of the proposed works and obtain all information as to existing conditions and
limitations and all proposed works on adjacent sites and in adjacent areas which might affect the
works on this site, whether by Private Individuals or by Government Authorities or others.
3.2 Examine the documents including the Specifications and Drawings of all other Divisions before
bidding and again before commencing any portion of the works.
3.3 Neither the Client nor the Engineer will be responsible for any claim for extra work or expense
resulting from the failure of the Contractor to be fully aware of Site Conditions, Drawing
implications, etc.
4.0 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS.
4.1 Arrange for inspection of all work by the Authorities having jurisdiction over the works. This is to
occur on an on-going basis throughout construction to avoid delays at the termination of the
project. On completion of the work present to the Engineer, for the Client, final unconditional
approval certificates of the Inspecting Authorities.
4.2 Pay fees / charges as levied by Statutory authorities for inspections, approvals, services
connections, rerouting of existing services, etc. at no additional cost to contract.
4.3 Before commencing any work on site, submit the required number of copies to the relevant
Authorities (after coordination with present building Contractor) for checking and approval. Follow
the progress of such drawings to permit the timely approval of them by the Authorities. Comply
with any changes requested by the Authorities, but notify the Engineer immediately of any such
change for proper processing of these requirements. The Contractor, working on a regular basis
with the Authorities is expected to know which changes are likely at the time he bids the job, and
no extra cost will be allowed for such changes.

5.0 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
5.1 The drawings for services works are performance drawings, diagrammatic, and intended to
convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate locations of
apparatus, fixtures, pipe and duct runs, etc. The drawings do not intend to indicate architectural
or structural details, nor do they show any fabrication or installation details.
5.2 Do not scale drawings. Obtain accurate dimensions to structure and architectural items from
drawings of those trades. Confirm by site measurement. Verify location and elevation of all
services (Water, Electrical, Telephone, Sanitary, Storm Drainage, Gas, etc.) before proceeding
with the work.
5.3 Make at no extra cost, any changes or additions to materials, and/ or equipment necessary to
accommodate structural conditions (pipes or ducts around beams, columns, etc.).
5.4 Alter, at no additional cost, the location of materials and/ or equipment as directed, provided that
the changes are made before installation and do not necessitate additional material.
5.5 Install all ceiling mounted components (Diffusers, grilles, detectors, light fixtures, emergency
lights, fire detectors, loudspeakers, camera points, etc.) in accordance with the reflected ceiling
drawings which are to be prepared by the Contractor and coordinated with all trades. These
must be submitted for approval and be approved before any work commences on site.
5.6 Leave space clear and install all work to accommodate future materials and/or equipment as
indicated and/or supplied by another division of work of the contract. Install all pipe runs, conduit
runs, cable trays, etc., to maintain maximum headroom and clearances, and to conserve space in
shafts and ceiling spaces and under floors, and to provide adequate space for service and
maintenance.
5.7 Confirm on the site the exact location of outlets and fixtures. Confirm also location of outlets and
fixtures provided by any other division of work under the contract.
6.0 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS.
6.1 Prepare drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and openings for all
passages through structure and all insert sizes and locations.
6.2 Prepare composite construction drawings in colour fully dimensioned, of piping and equipment in
tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms and areas, and all other critical locations to avoid a
conflict of trades. Composite drawing shall include all MEP services in coordination with the
structure and false ceiling heights given in the Architectural drawings.
Base equipment drawings upon shop drawings and include but do not necessarily limit to, all
details pertaining to access, cleanouts, tappings, sleeves, electrical connections, drains, location
and elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from consultation with, and agreement of,
all trades involved.
The location of final fix items such as supply / return air diffusers and sprinkler heads shown in
the contract drawings are indicative only. Contractor shall co-ordinate with the reflected ceiling
plans and Interior design drawings and agree the actual location in relation to other items such as
light fittings, smoke detectors, speakers etc. Final location should be based on the approved
reflected ceiling plans prepared by Contractor and obtain approval from the Architect / Engineer.
6.3 Prepare drawings of equipment bases, pump pits, anchors, inertia slabs, floor and roof curbs,
wall openings, trenches, pertaining to mechanical work.
6.4 Prepare all drawings to scale as agreed with the Engineer. Forward these drawings, approved
by all trades concerned to the Engineer for his records. Provide transparencies and provide
printed copies in a number as specified elsewhere in the Contract but not less than four sets.

6.5 Bind one complete set (hard + soft) of construction drawings showing "as built" conditions in each
operating and maintenance instruction manual. The extent of these drawings will be indicated to
the Contractor in advance by the Engineer.
7.0 SHOP DRAWINGS & MATERIAL SUBMITTAL
7.1 Submit shop drawings and samples for materials and equipment as listed in this and in each
subsequent section.
Provide transparencies wherever possible and provide printed copies in a number as specified
elsewhere in the contract documents. The Engineer may retain the sample of each item at his
discretion until the completion of the contract.
7.2 Present a schedule of shop drawings and material submittal within one month after award of the
contract, indicating the anticipated date when the drawings will be submitted for review. Assume
full responsibility for timely submission of all drawings. Allow a minimum of three weeks for the
Engineer’s review. At time of submission indicate order deadlines and cost implications, etc.,
otherwise the Engineer will advise the Client that cost and completion date will be unaffected.
7.3 Drawings production and presentation is a Contractual matter and any delay on the Contractor's
behalf in making these submissions will be considered a Contractual delay and may be subject to
Contractual penalties and other remedies as determined by the Engineer.
7.4 The Engineer will only consider shop drawings bearing the stamp of the Contractor and all
Subcontractors involved. Check for all pertinent information such as physical dimensions, make,
performance, electrical characteristics and indicate the intended use and location before
submitting these drawings. Use reference symbols or enumeration to correspond to the design
drawings.
7.5 Assume responsibility for accuracy of equipment dimensions related to space available,
accessibility for maintenance and service, compliance with inspection authorities codes. Ensure
that shop drawings indicate the shipping and working weights of all equipment.
7.6 The submission of samples will be subject to the same procedure as that of shop drawings. One
set of such samples shall be required to be brought to site and kept there after approval till
substantial completion.
7.7 The Engineer will mark the drawings "resubmit specified item, "rejected", "no exception taken", or
"make correction noted". In the last case all revisions will be clearly marked on the returned print
and corrected prints may be issued for manufacture and construction.
Make the revisions shown on the "make corrections as noted" prints onto the tracings as soon as
practicable and forward copies to the Engineer for his records.
7.8 The Engineer is not responsible for any delays caused by the inadequacy of the Contractor's
drawings or his failure to obtain initial or subsequent approval. Any time taken by the Contractor
to obtain approval after the originally scheduled date will be considered as a delay to the contract
caused by the Contractor.
7.9 When drawings are marked "resubmit specified item", the Engineer is to resubmit the item as
originally specified or as may be determined to be equivalent by the Engineer. The Engineer is
the sole arbiter of whether any item is satisfactory or equivalent.
7.10 When drawings are marked "rejected" a complete resubmission of the particular drawing is
necessary, subject to the same conditions as outlined above.

7.11 The Engineer’s review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the
Contract documents, unless he has, in writing, called the Engineer’s attention to such deviations
at the time of submission of drawings. The Engineer’s review shall be construed to apply to, and
only to, general arrangements and shall not relieve the Contractor from the entire responsibility.
Any approval by the Engineer shall be on the understanding that any item submitted shall be
ordered with options and modifications to fully meet the specification. Any fabrication, erection,
setting out or other work done in advance of receipt of stamped drawings shall be done entirely at
the Contractor's risk and cost.
7.12 Furnish prints of the reviewed details to all other parties who may require them for proper
coordination of their work, and furnish all information necessary for the work as a whole.
7.13 Obtain Manufacturers' installation directions to aid in the proper execution of the work. Submit
two copies of such directions to the Engineer prior to installation, for use in inspecting the work.
7.14 Bind one complete set (hard + soft) of checked shop drawings into each operating and
maintenance manual.
8.0 FORMAT OF INFORMATION SUBMITTED
8.1 Submit information on paper copies and in electronic format on CD-ROM as identified below:
Submission Electronic Format

Information in Narrative form. Microsoft Word.
Information in Schedule form. Microsoft Excel.
Programmes. Microsoft Project.
Information in Database form. Microsoft Access.
Drawings. AutoCAD
Scanned information Microsoft Compatible e.g. Adobe Acrobat
Manufactures Literature NT Windows Compatible
8.2 Use the latest version of these application programs unless otherwise agreed.
8.3 Provide information in an electronic format compatible with the project electronic data
management system.
9.0 RECORD DRAWINGS
9.1 As the job progresses, mark on one set of prints to accurately indicate the status of installed
work. Have the white prints available for inspection at the site at all times, and present them for
scrutiny at all job meetings. Transfer all information onto the set of transparencies. Obtain the
Contractor's approval before forwarding these to the Engineer. Submit two sets of white prints to
the Engineer for checking and approval. Upon approval, submit one set of transparencies along
with a soft copy and five sets of white prints to the Engineer for onward transmission to the Client.
9.2 Show on the record transparencies the installed inverts of all services entering and leaving the
building and the property. Dimension underground services at key points of every run in relation
to structure and building. Record all elevations for underground services in relation to floor level
of the building and give reference datums to Municipal benchmarks.
9.3 Indicate exact location of all services left for future work. Show and dimension all work embedded
in the structure.

9.4 Provide complete sets of record drawings in the following format:
a. CD ROM
b. Paper of original size.
c. Plastic encapsulated in A3 size.
9.5 Include the following in A3 size:
a. A legend for symbols used.
b. A legend for colour – coded services.
c. A drawing index.
10.0 PLANTROOM SCHEDULES
10.1 Provide plantroom schedules and diagrams which can be easily fixed in each plantroom.
10.2 Frame schedules under glass or encapsulate in plastic as agreed.
10.3 As a minimum, show the following on plantroom schedules:
a. First aid instructions for treatment of persons after eclectic shock.
b. Other items required under Health & Safety, Statutory or other regulations.
c. Emergency operating procedures and telephone numbers for emergency call-out service
applicable to any system or time of plant.
d. Circuit diagrams, consisting of schematic drawings of circuit layouts showing identification

and duties of equipment, numbers and locations, control and circuits.
e. Valve Schedules in the form of typewritten sheets showing the number, type, location,
application service and symbol and normal operating position of each valve installed.
11.0 TEMPORARY SERVICE.
11.1 Do not use any of the permanent service facilities during construction, unless specific written
approval is obtained from the Engineer and the Client or where specifically allowed elsewhere in
the Contract Documents.
11.2 The use of permanent facilities for temporary services will not affect, in any way, the
commencement day of the period in which the correction after completion is the Contractor's
responsibility. Such period will commence only when the overall project is completed and
certificates of acceptance are issued.
12.0 COOPERATION
12.1 Confer with all trades installing equipment which may affect the work of this division, and arrange
equipment in proper relation with that equipment installed under all Divisions of the Contract.
12.2 Furnish all items to be built in by others, in time, complete with all pertinent information,
commensurate with the progress of the work.
12.3 Store materials neatly and out of the way and clean up all refuse caused by the work daily.
13.0 PROTECTION AND STORAGE

13.1 Protect the buildings and structures from damage due to carrying out of this work.
13.2 Protect all mechanical and electrical works from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean at all
times.
13.3 Cover all openings in equipment and materials. Cover all temporary openings in ducts and pipes
with polyethylene sheets or caps until final connection is made.
The quality of such cover must be determined in coordination with the Engineer and with due
regard to how long it may be until final connection.
13.4 Be responsible for and make good any damages caused directly or indirectly to any walls, floors,
ceilings, woodwork, brickwork, finishes, services, roads, gardens, etc.
14.0 EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT
14.1 Before this Contractor undertakes work in any area he must prepare a list of deficiencies in that
area which affect his works, or which could possibly be construed as being caused by himself if
not noted. In the event that such deficiency list is not prepared, then he shall be deemed
responsible for such deficiencies. Any list shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer
forthwith.
15.0 SUPERVISION.
15.1 The Subcontractor will maintain at site, as necessary for the performance of the Contract,
qualified personnel and supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting, testing, and
adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.
15.2 Before commencing work the Contractor will submit details of the proposed Engineers and
Supervisors, including copies of their Certificates. If in the Engineer’s opinion the proposed
Engineers or Supervisors are not adequately qualified or are otherwise unacceptable, the onus is
on the Contractor to submit alternates until such approval is given.
15.3 Where the Contractor's or Subcontractor's staff is, or becomes during the Contract deficient in
the choice of adequate or acceptable personnel, the Contractor is to remedy the situation by
appropriate measures.
15.4 Approval of the Contractor's or Subcontractor's Engineers or Staff shall in no way prevent the
withdrawal of that approval at any time during the Contract should the Engineer so desire. In the
event of such disapproval then the Contractor will be required to rectify the position as stated
above within 14 days.
15.5 In the event of any negligent or severely detrimental behavior the Engineer has the right to order
the removal from site of any Engineer, Supervisor, or worker on a " forthwith" basis.
The Contractor will remedy the situation on a similar forthwith basis and in any event will not be
allowed to proceed with any area of work which as a result is left without proper supervision or
technical backup until such time as the Engineer is again satisfied by the measures taken.
16.0 SCHEDULING.
16.1 In the event that a completion date has been set before tendering it will be the obligation of the
Contractor to provide a schedule adequate for all trades to meet the completion date.
16.2 If no completion date is specified it will be the obligation of the Contractor to provide to the
Engineer a proposed schedule of work including mechanical trades, within 21 days of award of
Contract. This schedule will be either approved by, or negotiated with, the Engineer.

17.0 WORK TO CONTINUE.
17.1 Unless specifically instructed otherwise by the Engineer the works are to continue to completion
in the most expeditious manner.
18.0 STANDARDS AND AUTHORITIES.
18.1 All equipment and installations shall be in accordance with local Codes and Regulations. In
general, all equipment and installation shall also be in accordance with :
a. Uniform plumbing code of USA.
b. National Plumbing Code
c. Institute of Plumbing (UK)
d. ASTM
e. ASHRAE
f. NFPA
g. ASME
h. British Standards and Codes
i. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
j. Authorities having Jurisdiction
18.2 Obtain approval of shop drawings from Authorities having jurisdiction including but not limited to
Drainage Department, Municipality, Ministry of Water and Electricity, Fire Brigade, Department of
Health, and Local telephone authority. All costs towards such approvals to be borne by the
contractor.
19.0 WORKMANSHIP
19.1 Install equipment, ductwork, conduit and piping in a workmanlike manner to present a neat
appearance and to function properly to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Install ducts and pipes
parallel and perpendicular to the building planes. Install all piping and ductwork concealed in
chases, behind furring, or above ceiling, except in unfinished areas. Install all exposed systems
neatly and group to present a neat appearance.
19.2 Install all gauges, thermometers, etc., to permit easy observance.
19.3 Install all equipment and apparatus which requires maintenance, adjustment, or eventual
replacement with due allowance for this.
19.4 Install control valves to guarantee proper sensing. Shield elements from direct radiation and
avoid placing them behind obstructions.
19.5 Install all panels and boards, etc., to permit easy operation.
19.6 Include in the work all requirements of Manufacturers as shown on their drawings.
19.7 Replace all work unsatisfactory to the Engineer without extra cost and to the standard required by
the Engineer. This applies to any item which is found to be defective in service during the
maintenance period, or extended maintenance period as appropriate.

19.8 Where height dimensions are given, the installation shall be reasonably expected to be within
(1/8") 3mm of the design dimensions. Where room centre or proportion dimensions are not
shown these shall be reasonably expected to be located on site to within (1/2") 13mm of actual
position.
19.9 Items displaying a horizontal dimension or edge must be plumbed with a level, and must be to
the Engineer’s satisfaction. Any apparent discrepancy between "level" electrical items and
adjacent items must be reported immediately to the Engineer.
20.0 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT.
20.1 All materials used on the project shall be brand new and of high quality. Obtain approval of all
manufacturers from the Engineer and the Client.
20.2 "New" is defined as newly manufactured, "state of the art," tested and proven item of equipment.
Items which have been held in stock for any extended period of time by either the Manufacturer
or the Supplier will be rejected.
20.3 All materials used on this project shall bear the third party quality assurance stamp like British
Standard kitemark, UL, FM, NFPA and/or other quality assurance authority as stated herein
elsewhere.
21.0 CLEANING.
21.1 Each day as the work proceeds and on completion, clean up and remove from the premises all
rubbish, surplus material, equipment, machinery, tools, scaffolds, and other items used in the
performance of the work. Clean out dirt and debris and leave the buildings broom clean with no
stains and in a condition acceptable to the Engineer.
21.2 Where any items form part of the visible finish in the rooms, protect from over-painting, etc. and
give all items a final cleaning before handing over of the project.
22.0 ACCESSIBILITY.
22.1 Each item of equipment shall be located so as to be accessible for maintenance or repair without
removing adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts, or other materials. For the large Air
Handling units the Contractor shall ensure that these can be built up on site from components
which can be taken into the area. Any openings, framing or special lifting equipment which may
be required shall be included by the Contractor.
22.2 Any item of equipment needing maintenance shall be located so as to be accessible for
maintenance or repair without removing adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts, or other
materials.
22.3 Cleanouts shall be located to permit rodding of all drain lines. These shall be located wherever
possible external to occupied areas, and to minimize spillage problems during rodding.
23.0 CUTTING AND PATCHING.
23.1 Inform all other Divisions in time concerning required openings.
23.2 Obtain the approval of the Engineer before doing any cutting. Supporting members of any floor,
wall or the building structure shall only be cut and in such a manner as approved by the
Engineer. All reinstatement work must be done to the same standard as the original work.

24.0 INSERTS, SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND CURBS.
24.1 Under this section supply necessary sleeves and other inserts to other trades.
24.2 Use only factory made, threaded or toggle type inserts as required for supports and anchors,
properly sized for the load to be carried. Place inserts only in portions of the main structure and
not in any finishing material.
24.3 Use factory made expansion shields where inserts cannot be placed, but only where approved by
the Engineer and for light weights.
24.4 Do not use powder activated tools except with the written permission of the Engineer.
24.5 Supply and locate all inserts, holes, anchor bolts, and sleeves in good time when walls, floors,
and roof are erected.
24.6 Pass insulation unbroken where pipe or duct is insulated. Size sleeves to provide adequate
clearance all around.
24.7 Use the following materials for pipe sleeves:
a. Through all interior walls (except fire rated walls) above grade use uPVC Class E pipes,
machine cut, flush with finished structure. For non metallic pipe crossing in fire wall use
galvanized steel pipe (SCH 40).
b. Through all exterior walls above grade use uPVC Class E pipes, machine cut, flush with
finished structure inside and to suit flashing on outside.
c. Through all exterior walls below grade and all other waterproof walls use uPVC Class E
sleeves with puddle flanges and machine cut. Check flashing specification for further
details.
d. Through all waterproof floors, janitor's closets, mechanical rooms, kitchens, roofs, use
uPVC Class 150 sleeves, machine cut. Extend sleeves 100 mm above finished floor
upwards and cut flush with underside of floor. Refer to flashing detail through waterproof
floors.
e. Provide 100 mm high, 100 mm wide watertight concrete curbs with 20 mm chamfered
edges around all pipes passing through waterproof floors except where furred in. Read
Concrete specification before proceeding with curbs. All gaps to be filled up with
waterproof type sealant.
f. Where uPVC pipes pass through fire rated walls/partitions, provide fire rated sleeves.
24.8 Pack all sleeves between the insulated pipe and the sleeve or where un-insulated between the
pipe and the sleeve with loose fibreglass insulation. Seal the annular space as follows:
a. For all horizontal sleeves in exposed areas, use a seal equal or better fire rated than the
wall to be sealed.
b. For all vertical sleeves through roofs, janitor's closets, equipment rooms, use permanently
resilient silicone based sealing compound, non- inflammable and waterproof.
Ensure that the seal is compatible with floor and ceiling finishes. Check the room finishing
schedules for further details and clarify if necessary with the Engineer.

c. Cover exposed floor and wall pipe sleeves in finished areas with satin finish chrome or
nickel plated solid brass or with satin finished stainless steel escutcheons with
non-ferrous set screws. Split cast plates of the screw locking type may not be used. Do
not use stamped steel friction type split plates
Through roofs, provide curbs and sleeves as shown on drawings and to suit flashing
requirements.
24.9 Use the following Sleeving for ducts
For rectangular duct openings through walls and floors a removable hardwood box-out shall be
provided of the required size. Soft wood or plywood will not be acceptable. Hardwood shall be
further protected with anti termite paint / solvent.
Through fire walls, build fire dampers into wall, or make detailed fixing in accordance with DW
144 / SMACNA Standards.
Through floors where ducts are not furred in or enclosed in a ductshaft, provide 100 mm high and
100 mm wide watertight concrete curbs, with 25 mm chamfered edges all around. Extend sleeves
where used flush to top of curb. Read Concrete Specification before proceeding. Through floors
where duct is enclosed in a duct shaft or furred in, provide the watertight curbs at the extreme top
and bottom only.
24.10 After ducts are installed, pack the opening and seal the packing as follows:
a. Use fibreglass insulation for packing
b. Through all vertical walls seal the fibreglass packing using permanently resilient silicone
based sealant.
24.11 Brace duct sleeves and box-outs to retain their position and shape during the pouring of concrete
and other work.
24.12 Provide bracing for each duct at every passage through structure to prevent sagging.
24.13 Cover exposed duct sleeves and openings in exposed areas. Use 100 mm galvanized steel
escutcheons in the form of a duct collar. Over curbs extend the collar 30 mm down the side of the
curb, similar to counter flashing Fix collar in place with Cadmium plated screws.
25.0 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS.
25.1 Install all concealed mechanical equipment requiring adjustment or maintenance in locations
easily accessible through access panels or doors. Install systems and components to result in a
minimum number of access panels. Indicate access panels on as-built drawings.
25.2 Provide the respective Division of work with panels, doors or frames, complete with all pertinent
information for installation.
Ensure that access doors are installed in a manner to match the building grids where applicable
25.3 Prepare detail drawings showing location and type of all access doors in coordination with other
trades before proceeding with installation and hand these to the Contractor to obtain approval.
25.4 Size all access doors to provide adequate access and commensurate with the type of structure
and Architectural finish. Should it be necessary for persons to enter, provide a minimum opening
of 600 x 450 mm.
25.5 Ensure proper fire rating of access doors in fire separations

25.6 Lay-in type ceiling tiles, if properly marked may serve as access panels.
25.7 Provide panels in glazed tile walls of 2.6mm thick 304 alloy stainless steel, no. 4 finish, with
recessed frame secured with stainless steel, countersunk, flush-headed screws.
25.8 Provide panels in plaster surfaces with dish shaped door and welded metal lath, ready to take
plaster. Provide a plastic grommet for door key access.
25.9 Provide other access doors of welded 2.6 mm thick steel, flush type with concealed hinges, lock
and anchor straps, complete with factory prime coat. Submit details to Engineer for approval.
26.0 FLASHING.
26.1 Flash all mechanical and electrical parts passing through or built into a roof, an outside wall, or a
waterproof floor.
26.2 Provide uPVC sleeves with puddle flanges for services crossing water proofed walls in basement.
26.3 Provide stainless steel puddle flanged connections where pipework penetrates walls of the water
storage tank.
26.4 All flashing shall suit roof angle and shall extend a minimum of 400 mm on all sides. Leave the
flashing as directed by the Contractor for him to build into the roofing system to render a
completely watertight connection.
26.5 Provide counter flashing on all stacks, ducts, and pipes passing through roofs to fit over flashing
or curb.
26.6 Flash pipes through waterproof floors as per approved detail.
26.7 Provide pipes and sleeves passing through outside walls with lead or copper flashings and as
directed by the Engineer. All visual aspects of such sleeves to be approved by the Engineer.
26.8 Pay special attention to the waterproofing conditions of basements and walls and floors that may
exist. Cooperate at all times with the waterproofing trade and do not cut or destroy any
waterproofing seal without the consent of the waterproofing trade.
Provide piping sleeves passing through waterproof walls with asphalt roofing felt wrapped around
so as to leave a 25 x 50 mm recess on both sides of the wall. These recesses and the space
between pipe and sleeve will be caulked by the General Contract, Moisture protection, or
Waterproofing, Division.
27.0 DESIGN AND STANDARDISATION
27.1 The Works shall be executed to facilitate inspection, cleaning and repairs for use where
continuity of operation is the first consideration. All equipment supplied shall ensure satisfactory
operation under working conditions. All plant containing rotating parts shall be capable of
operating at speeds up to the maximum duty specified without vibration or excessive noise.
27.2 Corresponding parts throughout the Contract Works shall be made to gauge and shall be
interchangeable wherever possible. The Contractor may be required by the Engineer to prove
interchangeability by actual interchanging of the various parts.
27.3 Suitable provision by means of eyebolts or other means are to be provided to facilitate handling
of all items that are too heavy or bulky for lifting and carrying by two men (70 kg).

28.0 STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
28.1 All plant and equipment shall be stored off the ground under weather-proof cover until ready for
incorporation in the works. All mechanical equipment and materials requiring controlled storage
temperature shall be stored in environmentally controlled rooms to avoid condensation. All
electrical apparatus shall be examined and cleaned before installation. All open conduit ends
shall be fitted with plastic caps or suitable protective covering to prevent the ingress of foreign
matter. All drums with cables shall be protected from direct sunlight.
28.2 Protect the building and structures from damage due to carrying out the work.
28.3 Protect all mechanical works from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean at all times.
28.4 The contractor shall be responsible for and make good any damages caused directly or indirectly
to any walls, floors, wood work, brickwork, finishes, services etc.
29.0 GENERAL WELDING REQUIREMENTS.
29.1 All welding shall be generally in accordance with American Welding Society Standards. This will
be modified where appropriate for other materials and may be relaxed or varied by order of the
Engineer, provided that the Contractor has made a reasonably comprehensive request for an
alternate.
29.2 Tack welds shall be performed by fully qualified welders and all tack welds shall be of a length
equal to twice the pipe thickness and shall fully penetrate the pipe walls.
29.3 Where welding is carried out in the proximity of inflammable materials special precautions shall
be taken to prevent risk of fire or other damage to the building fabric.
29.4 Where oxyacetylene cutting equipment or any welding plant is being used by an operative for any
of the works defined in the contract documents, then fire extinguishers shall be supplied and
carried as part of the equipment. The operators of cutting and welding equipment shall be trained
in the use of the fire extinguishers which they carry and all extinguishers shall be fully charged
and ready for use. In all cases, extinguishers shall be positioned immediately adjacent to the
position where cutting and welding is being carried out and shall be readily accessible for use in
the event of an emergency.
29.5 All accommodation, benches, tools, welding plant, acetylene, oxygen or electricity, filler rods and
electrodes, which are necessary for installations where welding is required shall be provided as
part of this contract.
29.6 Welding shall not be done at a temperature of 5 degrees Centigrade or below unless the parent
metal is preheated by torches or other approved means until it is warm to the hand (about 27
degrees C) for about 150mm either side of the joint. No welding shall be done below minus 18
degrees C. After preheating, the heated portion including the welded joints shall be covered with
muffs or suitable insulation materials to allow cooling free from draughts. Any open ends of the
pipe or assembly shall be effectively sealed to prevent heat flow by convection.
29.7 All welded pipe assemblies shall be constructed so that individual welded joints do not affect
each other. The distance between the centres of adjacent welds shall be not less than twice the
bore diameter of the pipe.
29.8 No welded joints shall be left partially completed. Any joints tacked in position must be promptly
finished within the working day. The Engineer will reject all work not done in accordance with this
instruction.

29.9 Where work is rejected, pipes must be machine cut at least 150 mm either side of rejected welds
and proper weld preparation must be used on the shortened sector. Where shorter fill-in sections
are required because of such rejection and reworking, then new full sized lengths must be
supplied by the Contractor.
29.10 Where pipes with longitudinal seams are specified, pipe seams shall be arranged such that
adjacent seams are opposed 45 deg. from each side of top dead centre and branches shall be
made only with weldable fittings
29.11 All filler metals which are coated shall be protected from excessive moisture changes. Filler
materials or fluxes which show any sign of deterioration shall not be used. If requested by the
Engineer samples of filler rods to be used shall be submitted to him for approval before any work
is done on site.
These may be submitted, at the Contractor's cost, to an independent testing laboratory for
verification.
30.0 TESTS FOR WELDER QUALIFICATION.
30.1 The purpose of the welder's qualification tests is to determine the ability of the welders to make
sound and acceptable welds. Before any site welding on the contract is allowed, each proposed
welder shall carry out the tests required in the presence of the Engineer, or the Client’s Insurance
Inspector.
30.2 Any weld test specimens which have been suitably marked and approved shall be kept on site by
a responsible person, so that they can be produced at any time, at the request of the Engineer.
30.3 All accommodation, benches, tools, welding plant, acetylene, oxygen, electricity, test pieces, filler
rods, electrodes, facilities for cutting and grinding, polishing, bending and examining, which are
necessary for welders qualification tests shall be provided by the Contractor. In the absence of
any items for inspecting the welds, the Engineer may submit the finished samples to an
independent laboratory for testing at the Contractor's expense.
30.4 Under no circumstances shall a welder be employed on the contract, either on or off the site for
welding operations other than those for which that welder is qualified.
30.5 Copies and records of all test reports shall be promptly given to and kept by the Engineer.
30.6 Even welders holding a certificate for welding are to be tested at this job site in full accordance
with the specifications.
30.7 Tests for Qualification on Steel Pipes
30.7.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of welding and brazing and shall provide the
testing of the welders employed. Certificates of such proficiency test, together with stamped
samples provided for Engineer’s review before welding work is commenced. The welder’s
proficiency standard to be equal to Lloyd’s Standard Class 1, certified by an authorized testing
laboratory paid for the contractor.
30.7.2 Qualification tests will be made for butt and branch welds in pipes. One test piece per welder will
be required for the qualification of welding of pipes exceeding 100mm nominal diameter.
30.7.3 In addition, test pieces will be required for each position of a pipe. These positions will be
horizontal and rotated while welding, horizontal and fixed while welding, vertical and fixed while
welding for each range of nominal diameters specified.

31.0 TESTING OF WELDED PIPEWORK INSTALLATION.
31.1 Testing of welded pipework installation shall be by either destructive of non-destructive test
method.
31.2 Each butt-welded test piece to be subjected to two root bend tests and two nick break tests of the
welding.
Each branch welded test piece will be subjected to two root bend tests and two fillet break tests
of the welding.
Each test piece weld to be radiographically examined.
31.3 The Contractor shall assign an identification symbol to identify each welder and this will be used
to stamp the work done by that welder.
31.4 The Contractor will compile a set of safety instructions concerning welding procedures for the
welders and after review by the Engineer, these will be issued to the welding operatives and
foremen.
31.5 The Contractor shall allow for two percent of all the welds to be radiographically examined.
Determination of piping sections to be tested will be designated by the Engineer.
The timing of the radiographic examination of a weld or welds designated to be so examined will
be confirmed in writing by the Engineer during the installation.
Radiographic examination of welds will be carried out by a specialist employed by the Contractor
subject to review by the Engineer. The specialist so employed will be responsible for the proper
indexing, interpretation and reporting of the results of the radiographic tests.
31.6 Any weld, whether radiographically tested or not which are considered by the Engineer to be
faulty, either in whole or in part, or which have failed under hydraulic or other tests so designated
by the Engineer, will be removed and replaced by the Contractor.
31.7 The faulty part of a weld may be removed by flame gouging, chipping or grinding. Otherwise, the
Engineer may instruct that the portion of the works containing the fault weld be cut out and
replaced by the welding in of a new section of pipe or member.
31.8 Should any of the welder’s work (as defined by the Engineer) be found to be faulty during
radiographic tests, then that welder shall be removed from site and all other welds undertaken by
that welder shall be checked by radiographic means and replaced as necessary at the expense
of the contractor.
31.9 The extra radiography involved shall not be part of the 2% inspection previously stipulated.
32.0 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION
32.1 This section refers only to painting and identification of services and equipment and not to
decorative painting for aesthetic reasons.
32.2 Identification shall confirm to following standards:
a. Piped services : ASHRAE A13.1 or BS 1710
b. Ductwork : DW 144 or BS 1710
32.3 Equipment labels shall be anodized aluminium 0.8mm thick fastened to equipment by stainless
steel rivets. Label and letter size shall be agreed with Engineer.

32.4 Valve tags shall be anodized aluminium, 0.8mm thick fastened by brass beaded chain. Label
and letter size shall be agreed with Engineer.
33.0 FLUSHING AND CLEANING.
33.1 Flush all fluid-carrying systems after completion with a stream of water or appropriate fluid at the
highest obtainable pressure and velocity. Discharge the flushing fluid through all strainers and
out through line sized valves with hose ends. Clean all strainers. Repeat flushing operation to
the approval of the Engineer until the water is running clear, colourless and odourless and the
conductivity is no more than 30 µs/cm above the mains water.
33.2 If the water pressure normally available on site is, in the Engineer’s opinion, inadequate to
perform proper flushing, then the Contractor shall provide at his own expense, pumps, tanks,
etc., to give pressure and volume flows to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
33.3 For layer systems, the flushing and cleaning shall be carried out in sections of every three floors.
33.4 During flushing and cleaning all cooling coils, heat exchangers shall be bypassed in order to
avoid debris / dirt going to coils.
34.0 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING STERILIZATION AFTER COMMISSIONING
34.1 On completion of the potable cold water supply services system, including any parts of the
existing service they shall be sterilized by the application of chlorine. The minimum requirements
for chlorination shall be to flush the pipework thoroughly to remove dirt. Chlorine shall then be
added to the storage tanks and water drawn from all draw-off points until chlorine is detected at
each outlet point. The mains are then to be allowed to stand for a period of 24 hours, after which
the outlets are to be tested for chlorine. If chlorine is not found to be present, all the above shall
be repeated until residual chlorine is detected. After this, the system is to be completely flushed
with clean water and precautions taken to avoid subsequent contamination of the installation.
35.0 TESTING OF DRAINAGE PIPEWORK
35.1 All drainage piping shall be hydraulically tested in accordance with BS EN 12056 to ensure that
all piping and joints are free from any leakage. Tests shall also be to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and Local Drainage Department.
36.0 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
36.1 All water piping systems shall be hydrostatically tested for ensuring complete tightness under the
test pressure and for the duration of time as specified under the respective system concerned.
36.2 Systems may be tested as a whole or in sections to facilitate the progress of the work.
36.3 No part of any piping system shall be tested to pressure less than the specified test pressure
measured at the highest point of the system. Test pressure shall be at least 1.5 times the
working pressure.
36.4 Care shall be taken not to subject any equipment, apparatus or device to a pressure exceeding
its prescribed test pressure as obtained from its name plate data or from manufacturer's
published data. Pressure tests shall be applied before connecting piping to equipment. Relief
valves instruments, automatic air vents and all devices that might be damaged by the test
pressure shall be removed, disconnected or blanked off.
36.5 No pressure shall be applied against the closed gate of gate valves. All valves shall be in the
open position but not completely back seated during testing. End valves shall be capped.
36.6 In testing flanged piping, temporary blank flanges shall be installed and firmly anchored to
accommodate all developed end thrust.

36.7 All piping that can be damaged by end thrust developing from hydrostatic testing shall be
properly anchored during testing especially at changes of direction.
36.8 The piping system to be tested shall be closed by plugging and blanking all openings in the
system in an approved manner and filled slowly with water making sure to vent all entrapped air.
Plugs shall be released temporarily to ensure that water has reached all parts of the system.
Pressure shall be applied to the system by means of a hand pump drawing from a water
container. The pump discharge shall be connected to the system through a globe valve, check
valve and recently calibrated pressure gauge of suitable range to have the test pressure read in
the middle of the range.
36.9 After the test pressure is reached, the pump shall be blocked off by closing the globe valve and
the variations of pressure in the system monitored on the pressure gauge.
36.10 The test pressure shall be maintained on the system for 24 hours during which time the system
shall have no noticeable drop in pressure.
36.11 While the system is under pressure, a careful inspection shall be made of all pipes and joints and
if any leaks in joints or evidence of defective pipe or fitting is disclosed the defective work shall be
corrected immediately by replacing defective parts with new joints and materials. No make shift
repairs or application of any repair compound will be permitted.
36.12 After the correction is made the pressure test shall be repeated until a completely tight system is
ensured.
36.13 The test pressure shall be released slowly so as not to produce shocks and sudden contractions
that might damage the piping.
36.14 All underground piping shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's test pressures,
before back filling can commence. Piping shall be temporarily anchored at regular intervals, as
required, before testing can begin.
36.15 A log shall be kept of all tests performed which shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
37.0 SYSTEM OPERATION TESTS
37.1 All equipment, installations and their associated services shall be subjected to the following tests:
a. Initial Trial Test
After completion of works the Contractor shall test, adjust, balance until the required
condition is obtained.
The test shall include insulation test for all electrical works, interlocks, safety cut-outs and
other protection devices to ensure correct functioning. All such tests shall be carried out
in the presence of the Engineer and full records of the values obtained shall be prepared
along with final settings.
b. Performance Test
After the completion of initial trial test, the performance test will be carried out to ensure
correct functioning of the plant as a whole where all components of the plant will work all
together for a period of (3) days of (8) hours each during which necessary adjustments
are made.

c. Reliability Tests
After finishing the performance test, the summer reliability tests shall be made under the
full responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall provide full time skilled operators for
running the plant during the whole test period. The summer reliability tests, shall last for
a period of 31 consecutive days during which the whole of the plant under test shall
operate continuously without adjustment or repair. In the event of any repair or
adjustment having to be made other than normal running adjustment, the test shall be
voided and the installation shall be tested again. The summer reliability test shall be
completed within the period from 30 June to 30 September.
38.0 TRAINING OF EMPLOYER / END USER PERSONNEL
38.1 Contractor’s specialist Engineers shall demonstrate the building services systems and train the
Client maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain different mechanical equipment
and systems as follows:
38.2 Train the Client’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting upto and
shutting down, trouble shooting, servicing, and maintaining different mechanical equipment.
38.3 Include thirty full working days for training purposes.
38.4 Review data in maintenance manuals.
38.5 Explain and demonstrate the O&M manuals and Record drawings to the Client’s satisfaction.
38.6 Schedule training with the Engineer with at least seven days advance notice.
39.0 TEMPORARY USAGE.
The Engineer reserves the right to use any piece of electrical and mechanical equipment, device,
or material installed under this section for such reasonable lengths of time as may be required to
make a complete and thorough test of same before the final completion and acceptance of the
work.
The Engineer also reserved the right to use any equipment or installation to facilitate execution of
other trades such as interior fit-out, etc.
Such use of equipment or installation shall not be construed as acceptance of any part of the
work, and it is agreed and understood that no claim for damage will be made for any injury or
breakage to any part or parts of the above during this period, where caused by weakness,
inaccuracy of parts, or by defective materials or workmanship.
40.0 INSPECTION OF THE WORK.
40.1 The representatives of the Client and the Engineer will make periodic visits to the site during
construction to ascertain that the work is being executed in reasonable conformity with all plans
and specifications, but will not execute quality control at all times. Each Subcontractor must
maintain the quality control as intended in the contract documents.
40.2 Correct all deficiencies immediately as noted during field inspections.
40.3 Request in writing for a final inspection of all services.
Do not issue this written request until:
All deficiencies noted during job inspections have been corrected.
All systems have been balanced and tested and are ready for operation.

All balancing reports have been submitted and reviewed.
All instruction manuals have been submitted and reviewed.
The cleaning up is finished in all respects.
All spare parts and replacement parts specified have been provided and receipt of the same
acknowledged.
41.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
41.1 General requirements
41.1.1 Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals and information necessary to enable the
healthy, safe and efficient operation of the building.
41.1.2 Employ a specialist technical author to prepare O&M Manuals based on technical information
provided by others.
41.1.3 Prepare O&M Manuals in accordance with the guidance and recommendations of the following
BSRIA Publications:
a. Application Guide AG BG1 : Handover, O&M manuals and project feedback.
41.1.4 Provide O&M Manuals in clear, concise English. Ensure diagrams and other information
provided by others is clear and in English.
41.1.5 Ensure legends and symbols are consistent in O&M Manuals and on Record Drawings and are
as used for installations.
41.2 Include a copy of:
a. Works and site test data and certificates for all plant, equipment, valves, etc.
b. Commissioning records and method statements.
c. Manufacturer’s guarantees and warranties.
41.2.1 Provide Manufacturer’s technical literature for items of plant and equipment supplied with detailed
information including:
a. Specifications.
b. Health & Safety instructions.
c. Operations and maintenance instructions.
d. Trouble shootings instructions
e. Drawings including electrical circuit details.
41.2.2 Include schedules of all plant, equipment, valves, etc. for each system. Provide details of:
a. Location.
b. Specification.
c. Performance.

d. Anticipated life expectancy.
e. Model reference and serial number.
41.2.3 Uniquely code each item of plant, equipment, valves etc., installed with cross-reference to the
record drawings, O&M Manuals and plantroom schematics and schedules. Agree the reference
code system with the Engineer.
41.2.4 Provide the following information about manufacturers for every item of plant and equipment:
a. Name
b. Address.
c. Telephone and facsimile numbers.
d. E-mail and website addresses.
41.2.5 Include as part of the maintenance information:
a. Preventive maintenance procedures, including related health and safety procedures,

which should be adopted by the Client to ensure the safe and most efficient operation of
the systems.
b. Maintenance procedures for each plant item on a weekly / monthly / quarterly / six
monthly / annual basis.
c. A schedule of cleaning and maintenance methods and operations items, including

cleaning agents to be used and methods to be adopted.
d. A list of normal consumable items.
e. A list of recommended “running spares” required, being those items subject to wear or
deterioration and which may involve the Client in extended deliveries when replacements
are required at some future date.
41.3 Submit copies of draft O&M Manuals, record drawings and performance data, at least 20 working
days before the start of testing and commissioning. Draft copies should be of the same format as
the final manuals with temporary insertions only for items which cannot be finalized until
commissioning and performance testing is complete.
41.4 Manufacturer’s Literature
41.4.1 Ensure that supplier’s / manufacturers are obliged to provide literature as part of their plant and
equipment orders and that such orders will be considered unfulfilled until the literature has been
provided.
42.0 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE.
42.1 The ultimate condition for system acceptance is that the Client and Engineer have inspected the
system and found it to be acceptable, and indicated this in writing.
Issuance of the final payment certificate does not necessarily indicate system acceptance,
neither does release of final payment holdback in whole or in part. The Engineer’s acceptance
may be contingent on any or all of the following, if applicable:
42.1.1 Submit original copies of letters from manufacturers of all systems indicating that their technical
representatives have inspected and tested the respective systems and are satisfied with the
methods of installation, connections and operation.

42.1.2 Submit "as built" drawings and operation and maintenance manuals.
42.1.3 Train Client’s maintenance staff.
42.1.4 Satisfactory completion of 12 months guarantee period.
43.0 CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION.
43.1 Remedy all work in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract during defects liability
period from the date of acceptance of the completed work, or if so noted, for longer periods for
parts of the work.
43.2 Attend immediately to any and all the defects occurring during the period defined above and
repair in a manner to prevent recurrence. This contractor is responsible for all work required by
other trades necessary to repair the works of this section, or necessary to repair damage caused
by the failure of any part of this section.
43.3 Instruct all Suppliers and Manufacturers that guarantees on equipment will commence when the
completed work is accepted and not from the date the equipment is put into operation. In the
event that this condition is omitted by the supplier, or if subsequent cost to the Client is involved,
this Contractor shall be liable to the full extent of the guarantee as indicated in the specification.
44.0 GUARANTEES
44.1 The Contractor will guarantee all material and workmanship for at least one year after preliminary
take over by the Owner. Compressors of HVAC equipment shall be provided with a five year
guarantee.
44.2 All warrantees from equipment suppliers will be vested in the client, regardless of whether the
Contractor who supplied the equipment is still associated with the project or not.
44.3 Guarantees will be full guarantees and will include all overhead, profit, incidental charges and
sundries.
44.4 Where damage is caused to any other item by any failure of the item guaranteed, then the
guarantee shall also include the costs incurred in rectifying that damage.
45.0 MAINTENANCE
45.1 Maintenance is defined as the Contractual Liability to maintain the equipment in working
condition, PLUS the regular checks and servicing of equipment during the maintenance period to
keep the equipment in best working order.
45.2 Regular maintenance shall be as necessary, but in any event not less frequently than monthly.
Breakdown calls shall be attended immediately.
45.3 In the event that the Client has his own staff, the Contractor is still to check monthly and advise
on any problems and is still to assume responsibility.

46.0 SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS
All the materials supplied under this contract shall be from one of the manufacturers listed below. No
alternate makes shall be accepted unless all the listed makes are unavailable. Materials proposed from
listed makes also must fully comply with Detailed Specifications. Country of Origin, where listed, must be
complied.
A. AIRCONDITIONING WORKS
1. Air Handling Units Carrier

Trane
York West Europe
Euroclima
McQuay
2. Fan Coil Units Trane

Carrier
York
McQuay
Mekar
Clivet
Sinko
3. Split AC Units Carrier

Trane
York
Rheem / Ruud
Mitsubishi Electric
Daikin
O’ General
4. Heat Recovery Wheels Semco

Bry Air / Eco Fresh
Flakt Woods
5. Air Purification Units / Electrostatic Filters Trion

Gaylord
Environ Air
Purified Air
6. Plate Heat Exchanger Alpha Laval

APV
Tranter
Sondex
7. Automatic Controls / BMS Siemens Building Technology

TAC
Johnson Controls
Honeywell
8. BMS Cables Belden
9. Chilled Water Pumps Armstrong

ITT Bell and Gossett
Ebara
Grundfos
KSB

10. Chilled Water Pressurization Unit Armstrong

Holpak
11. Fans (Centrifugal / Axial) Ventaxia Inc. Roof Units Group

System Air
Twin City / ELTA
Dynair / Elicent
Jenco – Fans
Greenheck
RUCK
12. Car Park Ventilation Fans Novenco

Dynair
Flakt Wood
Colt
System Air
13. BTU Meters / Flow Meters Onicon

Zenner
Aquametro
Kamstrap
Siemens
Sontex
14. Air Outlets / Louvres Trox

Tecnalco
Beta
Air Master
Aldes
KBE
Flowtech
Tuttle & Bailey
15. GI Sheets Japan, S. Africa (or)

European make
16. Volume Control Dampers Prime

Safid
Ruskin
ATAI
Aldes
KBE
17. Chemical Treatment Houseman Hegro

Grace Dearbon
Culligan
Waterbird
Veolia Water Systems
18. Silencers Gulf Acoustics

Trox
Accoustic Air Technology
Safid
ATAI

19. Fire and Smoke Dampers / Fire Dampers Ruskin

(UL / FM) Greenheck
NCA
Aldes
20. Duct & Pipe supports Flammco

Isofix
Weicco
Mupro
21. PICV (Pressure Independent Control Valves) Frese

Flowcon
Broen
Danfoss
Anyone of Automatic Controls / BMS Suppliers

listed above.
22. Valves Watts

Nibco
Oventrop
Tour & Anderson
Crane
23. Strainers Watts

Nibco
Oventrop
Tour & Anderson
Crane
24. Gauges / Thermometers / Measuring Instruments H. O. Trerice

Weiss
Dwyer
Weksler
25. Air Vent Nibco

Watts
Oventrop
Crane
Tour & Anderson
26. Grooved Fittings Victaulic

Grinnell
National
Shield
27. Black Steel Pipes and Fittings Pipes Fittings

(Hydronic Piping)
Jesco (Saudi)
Zenith Nefit
Tata Steel Benken
Surya Pipes
Universal Tube (UAE)
Any other Japanese, S. African or

European makes

28. Vibration Isolators Mason

Unison
Weicco
Kinetics
29. Acoustic Floating Floors Mason

Kinetics
Christie & Grey
30. Fibreglass Insulation Knauf

Kimmco
Pfleiderer
Arabian Fibre glass
Izocam
31. Elastomeric Foam Insulation Armaflex

Thermobreak
Kaiflex
Eurobatex
Mobius
32. Sound Liner Armflex

Thermobreak
33. Flexible and Circular Ducts Safid

Thermoflex
ATCO
Supaflex
Satflex
Prime
34. Flexible Duct Connector Durodyne

Climatech
Cain
35. Flexible Pipe Joint Mason

Senior Flexonic
Tozen
Kinetics
36. Access Doors Zest

Safid
Ruskin
37. Adhesive and Coating Foster

Miracle
Duro Dyne

B. PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE WORKS
1. Copper Pipe and Fittings Crane Enfield

Wednesbury
Yorkshire
Nibco
MM Kembla
Outokumpu
Mueller
2. uPVC / ABS / HDPE / Pipe and Fittings Hepworth

Terrain
Durapipe
Eurapipe
George Fischer
Uponor
Gulf Eternit
Geberit
3. Polypropylene Pipes & Fittings Greentherm

Borplus
Novotherm
Aquatherm
Banninger
Giaccomini
4. Water Pumpsets Armstrong

Ebara
SPP
Grundfos
KSB
5. Water Hammer Arrestors Sioux Chief

Zurn
PPP
Watts
6. Pressure Reducing Valve Honeywell

Baily
Watts
Zurn Wilkins
7. Individual Water Heaters Ariston

A. O. Smith
Sitam
Zanussi
8. GRP Water Tanks Sekisui

Mitsubishi
Bridgestone
9. PEX Pipes & Fittings Acome

Fripex
Giacomini
JRG Sanipex
Unatherm

B. PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE WORKS
10. Sump Pumps / Sewage Pumps ABS

KSB
Flygt
Grundfos
11. Roof / Floor / Balcony Drains Hepworth

Terrain
Hamada
Aqua
Delta
Zurn
12. Sound Proof Drainage Pipe System Wavin

Skolan
Valsir
Polo Plast
13. Acoustic Lagging for Drainage Piping Kinetics

Sound Seal
Hodgson & Hodgson
14. Manhole/Gulley Trap covers / RSI

Catch Basin RBA
Ducast
Crescent

C. FIRE FIGHTING WORKS
1. Fire Pumps (UL/FM Approved) Naffco

ITT Bell & Gossette
Peerless
Armstrong
Patterson
Aurora
2. Fire Fighting Equipments Total Walther

(Fire hose reel, landing valves, fire cabinets, Norsen
fire extinguishers, hose and nozzles) Angus
NAFFCO
Chubb
Notes:
1. Local make fire cabinets of high quality shall be acceptable subject to sample approval.
2. Nozzle and hose must meet specified BS/EN standards.
3. Landing valves shall be UL/FM approved.
3. Sprinkler System (UL/FM approved) Shield

Gem
Central
Viking
Reliable
Tyco
Globe
4. Clean Agent Fire Suppression System Naffco

Siemens – Cerebrus
Minimax Preussag
Kidde Fire Protection
Wormold
LPG
Fike
5. Fire Stop Materials 3M

Hilti
Nullifier
Elasta – Seal
Astroflame
6. Ductile Iron Pipes Vonroll

Duker
Glynwed
Electro Steel
7. Fire Fighting Pipes and Fittings Jesco

Zenith
Tata Steel
Gujarat Steel
Surya Pipes
Shield
Any other Japanese or European makes.
Note: All Fire related Materials e.g. Fire Alarm, Fire Fighting, Fire Stop Materials, Cables, Central / Group
Emergency Lighting, Fire Dampers etc., must have Local Civil Defence Department approval.

D. LPG SPECIALIST SUBCONTRACTORS
1. International Gas Services Est (Sergas)
2. Lootah BC Gas LCC
3. Al Fanar Gas Services
Note: Contractors shall have valid licence / Approval certificate issued by the Authority having
Jurisdiction.
Only those materials approved by the Authority having jurisdiction shall be used.
End of Section

PART A - SECTION 2
INSULATION
Revision History

PART A - SECTION 2
INSULATION
INDEX
1.0 INSULATION GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 3
2.0 CONCEALED COLD AIR DUCTS. .....................................................................................................5
3.0 EXPOSED COLD AIR DUCTS. .......................................................................................................... 5
4.0 ACOUSTIC INSULATION. .................................................................................................................. 5
5.0 APPARATUS CASINGS. .................................................................................................................... 6
6.0 PIPE INSULATION.............................................................................................................................. 6
7.0 LAGGING ADHESIVE ......................................................................................................................... 7
8.0 ADHESIVES ........................................................................................................................................ 8
9.0 SEALANTS.......................................................................................................................................... 8
10.0 FUNGICIDAL PROTECTIVE COATINGS........................................................................................... 8
11.0 ALUMINIUM CLADDING..................................................................................................................... 8
12.0 ACOUSTIC LAGGING FOR DRAINAGE PIPES ................................................................................ 9
13.0 SAMPLES ........................................................................................................................................... 9

Insulation
1.0 INSULATION GENERAL
1.1 The whole of the insulation work shall be carried out by an approved specialist insulation
Contractor. All allowances shall be included for arranging a specialist subcontract accordingly
and for informing the specialist Sub-contractor of all conditions relating to the Contract and for
coordinating his works with the remainder of the works.
1.2 All allowances shall be included for informing the specialist Sub-contractor of all details of the
building structure, programme arrangements, and other relevant details at the time of tender and
for all necessary visits to site by the Sub-contractor or his workers.
1.3 All insulation materials shall be tested and listed by the underwriters laboratory according to
UL 723, ASTM E 84 practice in all respects. Insulation meeting British standards specifications
and codes of practice will be considered if properly submitted.
1.4 In addition to complying with the relevant standards, all insulating material shall be free from
Asbestos.
1.5 Insulating materials shall be acceptable only if they are equal to or better than the grades or
classes of fire resistance as follows:
a Combustibility : Fibres shall be non-combustible when tested in accordance

with ASTM E 136, BS 476, Part-4.
b Surface Burning Characteristics when tested as per ASTM E 84 / NFPA 255/UL 723:
Flame speed index : Not over 25
Smoke developed index : Not over 50
c Moisture Absorption : Less than one percent by volume when tested in accordance
with ASTM C 1104.
d Vapour Permeability : Not to exceed 0.02 perms.
1.6 Adhesives, mastics, sealants and coatings shall be UL listed and shall meet the minimum surface
burning characteristics as per ASTM E 84.
They shall not in any way attack the insulation or the surface to which the insulation is being
applied and shall be suitable for the working temperatures.
1.7 Insulating materials shall have thermal conductivity values not more than those listed as follows:
Material Type THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY. (W/M/DEG.C)

Mineral wool Sectional 0.04
Mineral wool Slabs 0.04
Fibre Glass All 0.034
Closed Cell All 0.038
Polyurethane Sectional 0.025
Styrofoam Rigid 0.026
All conductivity figures are rated at an average temperature of 20 deg C.

Insulation
1.8 The closed cell elastomeric foam insulation shall have following characteristics in addition to
clause 1.5:
a Water vapour permeability - 0.09 µgm/Nh, when tested according to BS 4370/2 PART 2
(= 7000 to DIN 52615)
b Density - 45 to 65 kg/m³ or 3Lb / ft³ to 4Lb / ft³
c Closed cell content -  90%.
d Corrosion risk assessment - DIN 1988 / 7 Certified.
e Noise reduction - DIN 4109 upto 32 dB (A).
f Thermal conductivity of 0.037 w/mk at 10°C and 0.038 w/mk at 20°C to BS 874 PART 2
(DIN 52613, 52612).
1.9 All material delivered to site shall be new and fully dried out and so maintained throughout the
progress of the works.
All insulating materials shall be stored in storage sheds, and in accordance with the
Manufacturer's recommendations.
1.10 In order to ensure that the insulation applied is in all respects in accordance with the
specification, sections shall, as required by the Engineer, be cut from the finished insulation.
The Contractor is to allow in his price for the removal and replacement of two sections of each
type of insulation.
If, however, defects are revealed, further sections shall be cut out for inspection, and all cutout
sections shall be replaced at no cost to the Contract.
If further defects are revealed then the Engineer shall have the right, when in his opinion it is
necessary, to issue instructions for any part or the whole of the insulation to be removed and
replaced. The replacement with new insulation shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
cutting out and replacing shall be at no cost to the Contract.
1.11 Particular attention shall be paid to the finished appearance of all thermal insulation which must
present a neat and symmetrical appearance running true in line with pipe and duct layouts, etc.
1.12 Any rough, irregular and badly finished surfaces shall be stripped down and re-insulated to the
Engineer's satisfaction.
1.13 In certain cases the type of insulation specified will require a painted finish, in addition to
identifying bands and any signs which are to be applied.
1.14 All systems are to have been tested and approved by the Engineer prior to installation of
insulation.
1.15 Manufacturer shall have production process control in accordance with ISO 9002 / UNI EN 29002
or any other equivalent standard.
1.16 In case of heavy ducts and pipes wherein the supports are fixed directly on ducts / pipes the
supports shall be also insulated with a thermal break / barrier.

Insulation
2.0 CONCEALED COLD AIR DUCTS.
2.1 Insulate all rectangular supply, return and extract ductwork with 25 mm thick, 24 Kg/m³ density
aluminium foil faced fibreglass duct insulation, finished with a 20x20 woven glass fibre cloth
covering adhered between two coats of fungicidal protective, fire resistant lagging adhesive.
Fasten the insulation with adhesive on 200 to 250 mm centres. Butt all joints tightly and seal all
breaks and joints by adhering a 75 mm Aluminium foil vapour barrier tape or sheet with a fire
retardant adhesive.
2.2 Insulate flexible connections and connections to diffusers with 25 mm thick, 24 Kg/m³ density
reinforced aluminium foil faced, flame resistant flexible fiberglass insulation. Overlap onto
adjacent insulation and seal with adhesive duct tape to give good closure.
3.0 EXPOSED COLD AIR DUCTS.
3.1 For ducts exposed inside conditioned spaces, insulate as described above for concealed air
ducts but using aluminium foil faced fiberglass boards with density 48 kg/m3.
Then apply a 20x20 woven glass fibre cloth cover adhered between two coats of fungicidal
protective, fire resistant lagging adhesive.
3.2 Where exposed cold air ductwork runs through occupied or public areas, it shall be clad with
sheet Aluminium, 0.9mm or thicker.
3.3 For ducts exposed in non air conditioned areas, insulate using the method described for
concealed ducts, but using insulation with a minimum thickness of 50 mm, 48 Kg/m³ density
fiberglass insulation. If necessary due to market availability, this may be installed in two layers,
but with each layer properly finished.
Then apply a 20x20 woven glass fibre cloth cover adhered between two coats of fungicidal
protective, fire resistant lagging adhesive.
Then cover with sheet Aluminium, 0.9 mm or thicker.
All ductwork exposed externally to the building is to be clad with aluminium.
Where ducts penetrate the building shell, the duct shall be flashed and waterproofed before any
insulation is applied.
4.0 ACOUSTIC INSULATION.
4.1 All low pressure ductwork shall be lined with acoustic insulation up to the first take off point, or 3
meters from the fan/ unit outlet.
4.2 Duct acoustic lining shall be 15 mm thick, fibre free, super silent, microbe resistant made of
elastomeric foam insulation, density 240 kg/m³.
4.3 Liner shall be tested to ASTM C 1071-05 or approved equal for air erosion resistance rating at
50m/s.
4.4 Liner will be installed in accordance to manufacturer recommendations.
4.5 All abutting edges, seams and joints must be caulked using mastic supplied by the acoustic
insulation manufacturer.

Insulation
5.0 APPARATUS CASINGS.
5.1 Insulate apparatus casings which are not provided with insulation as follows:
Apply generally 50 mm of rigid polyurethane insulation, 24 Kg/m³ density. On the underside of

coil sections, apply 100 mm thick polyurethane. All joints are to be sealed in cold adhesive
compound.
5.2 Ensure that any access panels are insulated to the same standard and are openable.
5.3 For small units, cover the entire outside assembly with waterproof self adhesive glass fibre tape.
This must be at least 75 mm minimum width and must overlap at least 50% on each application,
to achieve watertight conditions.
5.4 For larger units, provide a weather resistant enclosure outside the insulation, subject to
Engineer's approval.
5.5 Ensure that all equipment meets these requirements, regardless of manufacturer's standard
practice, and add insulation as required to the above standard.
5.6 Where insulation, reinsulation or additional insulation is required to the casing of externally
mounted air conditioning units, the insulation shall be covered with sheet Aluminium, of 0.9 mm
or thicker.
5.7 Insulation to drain pans is specified as part of the A.H.U. specification. Regardless of the
Manufacturer's standard supply, the contractor shall reinsulate on site if necessary so that the
specification is complied with in full. This standard of insulation is also required for fan coils.
6.0 PIPE INSULATION.
6.1 Pipe covering and insulation shall be manufactured by a recognized manufacturer, and shall be
neatly installed to the following specifications. The general intent is to provide a sealed insulation
which will not permit sweating of the pipes and which will not retain moisture to the detriment of
it's insulating capability.
6.2 Pipes shall be thermally insulated with rigid sections of glass fibre insulation with density of
65 Kg/m³, having a thermal conductivity factor of 0.034 W/m.K at 10 deg. C faced with glass
reinforced aluminium foil laminate.
6.3 The insulation, in sizes indicated shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces. Adjoining sections of
insulation should be butted firmly together with the longitudinal seam of the jacket located on the
bottom half of the pipe.
6.4 Pipes should be banded with at least three Aluminium bands per section. One at the centre and
one covering the edge of each circumferential strip.
6.5 Insulate and finish valves and fittings in the same manner and same thickness as piping in which
such items are installed. Moulded, factory shaped sectional pipe covering, factory or
job-fabricated may be used subject to satisfactory visual checking by the Engineer.
6.6 Direct contact between pipe and hanger shall be avoided. Hangers shall pass outside of the
sheet metal protection saddle, which shall cover a section of high density insulation, of sufficient
length to support the pipe without crushing the insulation. The vapour barrier shall be lapped over
the saddle and securely cemented to it. Minimum thickness of metal saddle is 1.5 mm.
6.7 Internal chilled water pipe shall be covered by rigid insulation plus a water proof 20 x 20 woven
glass cloth cover painted with two coats of approved lagging adhesive. Insulation thickness shall
be 40mm for pipes upto 40mm dia and 50mm for pipe sizes 50mm dia and above.

Insulation
6.8 External chilled water pipe shall be covered by 50mm of rigid insulation for pipe sizes upto 40mm
dia and 75mm for pipes sizes 50mm dia and above. Insulation shall be finished with a water
proof 20 x 20 woven glass cloth and painted with two coats of approved lagging adhesive.
6.9 Where any insulated piped service is run external to the building, including any insulated
pipework run on roof the piped services shall be clad using an outer covering of sheet Aluminium,
of 0.5 mm. or thicker.
6.10 Similar protection is to be applied to pipes running in car park area, and in plant rooms.
6.11 Refrigerant piping shall be insulated with 20 mm thick flexible cellular foam insulation. Exposed
refrigeration pipework shall be clad with Aluminium sheet as specified for external piped services,
or as specified for piped services exposed to damage.
6.12 Where exposed, insulated pipework runs through occupied or public areas, the exposed
pipework shall be clad with sheet Aluminium, of 0.5 mm. or thicker.
6.13 All condensate drain pipework shall be insulated with 25mm thick fibreglass insulation plus a
water proof 20 x 20 woven glass fibre cloth painted with two coats of fungicidal protective fire
retardant lagging adhesive.
6.14 Water Pipes Insulation
a Domestic hot/cold water pipe insulation
Hot/cold water pipes embedded in block walls shall not be insulated.
In all other areas, hot water pipes shall be insulated with preformed sections of aluminium
foil faced rigid fibre glass insulation, minimum density 65 Kg/m³, and covered with 20x20
(thread/inch) woven glass fibre cloth. Cloth shall be thoroughly soaked in fire resistant,
fungicidal protective sealer prior to application and applied whilst still wet.
Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Pipe Size (mm) Insulation thickness (mm)
Upto 50 25
Above 50 40
All insulated pipework installed on roof, within plantroom and wherever exposed to view
shall be cladded with plain aluminium sheets at least 0.7mm thick.
7.0 LAGGING ADHESIVE
7.1 Adhesive shall be a flexible, fire resistive, fungicidal resistant compound suitable for vapour
sealing insulated ducts and pipes.
7.2 Adhesive shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use and in high humidity environments.
7.3 Water vapour permeance shall not exceed 0.90 metric perms at 0.80mm dry film thickness when
tested in compliance with ASTMF 1249.
7.4 When tested for surface burning characteristics in compliance with ASTM E84, flame spread
shall be 5 and smoke developed 10.
7.5 Adhesive shall be UL classified and shall meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90
B 25/50.
7.6 Fungal resistance value of 0 when tested according to ASTM D 5590.

Insulation
7.7 Adhesive shall meet the requirements for LEED IEQ 4.2 low emitting materials, paints and
coatings.
8.0 ADHESIVES
8.1 UL listed quick setting, non-flammable, fire resistive adhesive to adhere insulation to sheet metal
ductwork.
8.2 Shall meet NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B 25/50 requirements.
8.3 When tested for surface burning characteristics in compliance with ASTM E 84, flame spread
9.0 SEALANTS
9.1 UL listed, fire resistive, flexible, vapour barrier sealant.
9.2 Meets NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B 25/50 requirements.
shall not exceed 15 and smoke developed 0.
9.4 Shall meet requirements of LEED IEQ 4.1, low emitting materials.
9.5 Shall meet all SMACNA pressure classes upto 250mm WG and SMACNA seal classes A, B and C
on ducts constructed to SMACNA standards.
10.0 FUNGICIDAL PROTECTIVE COATINGS
10.1 Fungicidal protective coatings shall be applied over interior surfaces of ductwork.
10.2 Coating shall be low odour, quick setting, water based, specially formulated for long term
fungicidal activity with no loss of activity on ageing. It shall prevent the spread of molds and
odour causing bacteria on the applied surface.
10.3 Coating shall meet the 25/50 requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
11.0 ALUMINIUM CLADDING
11.1 Aluminium cladding shall be provided to ducts with neat 90 degree joints and finish. Unless
otherwise indicated, material shall be with stone finish.
11.2 In pipework the longitudinal joints shall be cleated or held in position with stainless steel bands
and clips. Elbows and other fittings shall be made with mitred section and riveted. All valves
strainers, flexible connection etc. shall have easy removable boxes with stainless steel aluminium
toggle clips.
11.3 In ductwork the joints shall be banded with stainless steel band and clips to avoid sagging.
Boxes to be made around duct traverse joints.
11.4 All gaps shall be to a minimum and shall be sealed with silicon mastic suitable for outdoor use.

Insulation
12.0 ACOUSTIC LAGGING FOR DRAINAGE PIPES
Acoustic lagging shall be provided for Drainage (pipework) as detailed and described in Drainage
design drawing showing standard details.
13.0 SAMPLES
13.1 Submit samples of all types of insulation for approval. Submit pipe insulation samples 300 mm
long x 25 mm inside diameter, and flat samples 300 mm x 300 mm x 25 mm, minimum size.
13.2 Submit with samples, the full technical brochures.
13.3 Where the specification calls for additional treatments, such as wrapping and waterproofing,
submit also a completed sample of similar size.
13.4 All samples after approval are to be retained on site to be a reference for future work.
End of Section

Insulation
PART A - SECTION 3
AIR CONDITIONING PIPE WORK
Revision History

PART A - SECTION 3
AIR CONDITIONING PIPE WORK
INDEX
1.0 PIPEWORK MATERIAL GENERAL...............................................................................................3
2.0 PIPE INSTALLATION GENERAL ..................................................................................................3
3.0 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION FLANGES .......................................................................................5
4.0 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION - STEEL...........................................................................................6
5.0 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION - COPPER .......................................................................................7
6.0 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION - uPVC.............................................................................................8
7.0 PIPEWORK SUPPORTS ...............................................................................................................8
8.0 VALVES. ......................................................................................................................................10
9.0 STRAINERS .................................................................................................................................11
10.0 GAUGES AND ACCESSORIES. .................................................................................................11
11.0 AIR CONTROL DEVICES ............................................................................................................11
12.0 FLOW SWITCHES .......................................................................................................................12
13.0 FLOW MEASUREMENTS. ..........................................................................................................12
14.0 EXPANSION PROVISIONS AND ANCHOR POINTS .................................................................12
15.0 WATER SYSTEM TREATMENT (CLEANING) ...........................................................................14
16.0 START UP CHEMICALS .............................................................................................................18
17.0 VIBRATION ISOLATION ..............................................................................................................18
18.0 PRESSURE TESTS. ....................................................................................................................18
19.0 WELDING TESTS. .......................................................................................................................18
20.0 SUBMITTALS. ..............................................................................................................................18

Air Conditioning Pipe Work
1.0 PIPEWORK MATERIAL GENERAL
1.1 All pipework shall be free from surface or general corrosion and without any signs of scaling,
pitting or excess weathering. Any pipework so affected shall be replaced at no cost to the
contract.
Each length of pipework shall have at least one coloured identification band or identifying mark,
when delivered. All pipework shall be supplied in the manufacturer's straight random lengths, but
not less than 6M long except where shorter specific or flanged lengths between fittings are
actually required.
All plain mild steel pipework shall be supplied self-coloured and externally varnished.
1.2 Chilled Water and condenser water Pipework.
1.2.1 All pipework shall be black steel ERW beveled ends standard weight to ASTM A53, Grade A or
API 5L Grade A.
1.2.2 All fittings shall be standard weight, bevel ends to AN SI – B16.9, ASTM A234, Grade A.
1.2.3 Flanges shall be ANSI Class 150, Carbon steel weld neck.
1.3 Chilled Water Service Pipework.
In congested areas where small bore chilled water piping is required, type K copper piping with
cast bronze non de-zincifiable fittings may be used subject to the Engineer's approval, and to a
test of the welding operatives who will be doing the brazing. Brazed joints are required
throughout; no compression fittings will be permitted.
1.4 Condensate Drain Pipework.
All exposed condensate piping shall be galvanized SCH 40, welded steel to ASTM A53, with
screwed joints. Fittings will be screw type, forged.
All concealed condensate drain piping shall be uPVC Class E with solvent welded joints.
1.5 All pipework, pipework fittings, jointing materials and gaskets shall be stacked in storage sheds in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as required elsewhere in this
specification. The ends of all pipework shall be protected during transit and storage.
1.6 Metal pipework may be stacked in the open, provided that such stacks are, in the Engineer’s
opinion, adequately protected from weathering. The pipework shall be located in steel pipe racks
and clear of the floor; the floor being formed from either creosoted timber sleepers or paving
slabs. A watertight lightweight roof shall be provided to extend 450 mm beyond the edges of the
stack and tarpaulin or heavy gauge Polythene sheeting shall be provided to cover all sides.
1.7 The pipes beyond stock rust shall not be used.
2.0 PIPE INSTALLATION GENERAL
2.1 All pipework shall be arranged to set round piers and other obstructions and minor modifications
shall be made as required by the Engineer to circumvent site difficulties.
2.2 Pipe shall be arranged to follow the contour of walls or beams or other building structure lines
and all vertical pipework shall be plumb, without offsets and set as close as possible to any local
projections consistent with maintaining adequate clearances for installation of wall plates or
insulation.

2.3 Pipework shall be installed so as to give the following minimum clearances between the pipe (or
pipe insulation where specified) and adjacent surfaces as follows:
a Walls .............................................................................................25 mm
b Ceilings .........................................................................................50 mm
c Finished floors; above top of skirting ............................................50 mm
d Adjacent pipes, both insulated ......................................................25 mm
e Adjacent pipes in trench, both insulated .......................................100 mm
f Adjacent pipes, both uninsulated ..................................................150 mm
g Adjacent pipes, one insulated .......................................................75 mm
h Insulated pipes to adjacent conduit or trunking ............................100 mm
i Adjacent electrical cables not in conduit or trunking.....................150 mm
Not withstanding the above minimum clearances, sufficient space shall be allowed to facilitate
easy application of insulating materials. Pipes shall not be enclosed in a common insulating
covering.
2.4 Pipework shall be graded to ensure adequate draining and venting. Draining and venting facilities
as detailed in the particular specification for individual services shall be fitted at all low and high
points respectively and wherever else necessary to ensure that all sections and subsidiary
sections can be drained and that no air locks can form.
2.5 The Engineer may at his discretion ask for the removal of installed pipework for examination. No
extra payment will be made when such removal is called for.
If the pipework is found to have been installed in an unsatisfactory manner, then the complete
installation shall be thoroughly inspected and all unsatisfactory sections shall be removed and
re-fixed in a proper manner.
2.6 During constructional work on all pipework services, care shall be taken to prevent any foreign
matter entering the pipework. All open ends shall be capped with the appropriate pipework
fittings. Wooden plugs and the like shall not be used. Valves fitted on the ends of pipework shall
not be accepted as a means of preventing the ingress of foreign materials.
2.7 Failure to comply with these requirements shall mean that the Engineer shall have the right to
instruct that pipework so left uncovered to be dismantled for such lengths as the Engineer
requests, and the pipework blown through and/or cleaned at no cost to the contract.
2.8 All pipework fittings shall be installed in such a manner to ensure that air cannot be trapped and
that pipework can be drained.
2.9 Unequal tees shall be used in preference to equal tees with separate reducing fittings. Bushes
shall not be used. Unequal tees shall be eccentric pattern on horizontal pipework, and concentric
on vertical pipework.
2.10 Segmented, or "cut-and-shut", or any other site manufactured bends or fittings shall not be
installed in any section of the works.
2.11 The use of fire or cold pulled bends will not be permitted.

2.12 Where fittings are connected to SCH 40 or thinner pipework they shall be SCH 40 quality, and
where connected to SCH 80 pipework they shall be SCH 80 quality.
2.13 All fittings, valves, cocks, etc., shall be manufactured from materials guaranteed proof against
de-zincification unless specifically stated otherwise elsewhere.
2.14 Only one manufacturer of pipework fitting shall be used for each differing range of fitting
specified.
2.15 Reducers on all vertical pipework shall be concentric. In all other positions eccentric reducers
shall be fitted in a manner to maintain a level bottom and ensure that fluids are not collected at
that point in the system. Where it is not possible to fit eccentric reducers the Engineer’s approval
shall be obtained before fitting concentric reducers. Reductions in all cases shall be made by the
use of factory made fittings.
2.16 Sufficient unions or flanges shall be provided to install and dismantle screwed or solvent jointed
sections of pipework.
Unions on all steel pipework other than on steam installations, shall be of malleable iron
construction with spherically ground bronze-to -bronze seats and shall have screwed ends.
Unions on uPVC systems shall be factory manufactured unions appropriate for the pipe.
2.17 All branches shall be made by easy sweep tees, twin elbows or sweep crosses. Bends shall be
used wherever possible. All sweep fittings and all sweep bends shall be of the long radius pattern
except where the use of these fittings would stand pipework too far from wall surfaces and make
for unsightly appearance, in which case short sweep tees and elbows may be used provided that
the Engineer’s written approval is obtained beforehand.
3.0 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION FLANGES
3.1 Flanges shall be provided on the pipework systems wherever necessary to connect to
components, plant or equipment having flanged connections. In addition, flanges shall be
provided where services are specified elsewhere as having flanged joints.
3.2 Flanges (including the associated nuts, bolts and washers) shall be to the minimum requirements
of ASME B16.1 to suit the conditions within the pipework or to suit equipment, valves and other
pipework components having flanged connection.
3.3 Flanges shall be bolted up using hexagonal nuts and bolts manufactured from high tensile carbon
steel using two flat steel washers, one each side of the jointed flanges.
3.4 Bolt threads shall not project more than 3.2 mm or less than 1.6 mm beyond the nuts when
jointed up.
3.5 Blank flanges where required shall be manufactured from the same material and same thickness
as the flanges to which they are mating.
3.6 Flanges shall be smooth machined across the full width of the flange and on the edge but may be
rough turned on the back.
3.7 Flanges shall be mounted square with the axis of the pipe after all surface scale, oxides, grease,
oil and dirt have been removed.
3.8 Care shall be taken to avoid distortion of the flange during welding.
3.9 Steel flanges shall be provided on mild steel pipework.
3.10 Cast iron flanges shall be provided on cast iron pipework.

3.11 Steel and gunmetal flanges shall be of the welding neck pattern, welded to the pipework in
accordance with the general requirements for welding detailed elsewhere in the specification.
3.12 Flanges shall be finished or coated exactly as specified for the pipework on which they are to be
fitted.
3.13 Gaskets for flange jointing shall be nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free confirming to ASME B16.21.
3.14 Bronze flanges shall be provided on copper pipework.
3.15 Flanges for uPVC pipe shall be of same pressure rating as the connecting pipework. Backing
rings will be provided for sizes of 150 mm and larger,nominal pipe size.
3.16 Stub flange assemblies will only be permitted if specifically requested for a specific reason and if
thought appropriate by the Engineer.
3.17 All items of plant including air heater batteries and fan coil units etc., shall be capable of being
disconnected from connecting pipework services by means of unions, union valves, flanges or
flanged valves. Pipework shall be so arranged to allow the item to be removed.
4.0 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION - STEEL
Black steel sizes up to 50 mm will be threaded and size 65 mm and above will be welded.
Alternatively grooved pipe mechanical joints may be used for all pipe sizes.
4.1 Threaded Joints.
Screw threads shall be clean and true.
In addition, all internal threads must be checked for quality and threads with any indication of
damage must be rejected and removed from site. All pipe shall be reamed or scraped to remove
internal burrs after threading.
4.2 Welded Joints.
Welding shall generally be in accordance with the relevant Section of the General Specification.
All steel elbows shall be of long radius pattern except where space conditions do not permit. The
substitutions of short radius elbows must be approved by the Engineer.
4.3 Welding Piping:
4.3.1 Where so shown on drawings, specified or directed, welded joints, outlets and flanges shall be
used. Welded joints may also be provided elsewhere, where approved by the Engineer, except
on piping smaller than 80 mm, or at points where it may be explicitly specified or directed to leave
flanged joints in order to facilitate future changes.
4.3.2 All welded joints (except pipe welded end-to-end) shall be made by use of welding flanges, caps,
nozzles, elbows, branch outlets and tees as appropriate.
Cut samples shall be submitted for approval if directed. All such fittings etc., shall be of type
which maintains full wall thickness at all points, ample radius and fillets, and proper bevels or
shoulders at ends. "Weld-o-lets" may be used where standard fittings of required sizes are not
available and elsewhere as approved. All job welding shall be done by the electric arc welding
process in accordance with the following:
a All joints 45 degree bevel type. Pipe shall be mill-beveled or machine-beveled under this
section of the specifications.

b All scale and oxide removed with hammer, chisel or file and bevel left smooth and clean.
c Pipe lengths lined up straight with abutting pipe ends concentric.
4.3.3 Both conductors from the welding machine shall be extended to locations at which welding work
is being done. The leads from welding machine to locations of welding works shall be held
together with tape or other approved means so as to prevent induced current in structural steel,
in piping or other metals within the building.
The ground lead shall be connected to length of pipe with suitable clamp in such manner that
welding current will not flow through joints in pipe, structural steel of building or steel pipe
supports.
4.3.4 Weld metal is to be thoroughly fused with base metal at all sections. Welds shall be of sound
metal, free from laps, slag inclusion or other defects.
4.3.5 All welders shall be certified by the Engineer for the service for which they are employed and on
which they work.
4.3.6 Wherever welded piping connections to equipment, valves, or other units need maintenance,
servicing, or require possible removal, the connection joint shall be flanged. Pressure rating of
the pipe flanges shall match the pressure rating of the flanges on the equipment to which the
piping connects.
4.3.7 All soldered joints shall be made with 95% tin and 5% antimony solder, having a melting point of
not less than 238 degrees C. All soldered joints for tubing larger than 50 mm in size shall be
made with the simultaneous application of two or three blow torches.
4.4 Grooved Pipe Mechanical Joints
4.4.1 Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components may be used
as an option to welding, threading or flanged methods. All grooved components shall be of one
manufacturer and conform to local code approval and/or as listed by ANSI-B-31.9, ASME,
UL/FM, IAPMO or BOCA. Grooved end product manufacturer to be ISO-9001 certified.
4.4.2 Mechanical couplings shall be rigid coupling for high pressure service. Couplings shall be cast of
ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 or malleable iron conforming to ASTM
A-47, Grade 32510.
Mechanical coupling bolts shall be heat treated carbon steel track head conforming to physical
properties of ASTM A-183, and shall be cadmium plated to ASTM A165.
Gaskets shall be Grade 'E' EPDM compound conforming to ASTM D-2000. Temperature
operating range - 30 degrees F to +230 degrees F (-34 degrees C to + 110 degrees C)
4.4.3 Fittings shall be full flow ductile or cast iron fittings, with grooves or shoulders designed to accept
grooved end couplings.
Standard fittings and coupling shall be provided with an alkayd enamel finish.
4.4.4 Grooved mechanical fittings on copper pipework shall be wrought copper as per ASTM B-75
C12200 or ASTM B-152 C11000.
5.0 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION - COPPER
Hard drawn copper shall not be bent by any means. Care is to be taken during brazing that
excess heat is not used. All copper pipe may only be cut by pipe cutting wheels. No flame cutting
or hacksaw work will be permitted. No water quenching will be permitted.

6.0 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION - uPVC
6.1 uPVC piping system is to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation,
using appropriate pressure pipe and fittings.
6.2 Extreme care must be taken in the preparation of joints. All joints must be cut square. The burrs
must be removed and a 2 mm chamfer filed onto the outside at 45 degrees.
6.3 The pipe is to be abraded using emery cloth to approximately the depth of the socket. In addition,
the inside of the socket is to be roughened in a similar manner.
6.4 The roughened surfaces are to be cleaned using the proprietary cleaner from the system
manufacturer.
6.5 The proprietary cement from the manufacturer of the system must be thoroughly stirred before
each use. The cement is to be applied longitudinally to both the pipe and the fitting. Generally two
coats will be necessary, but care is to be taken to ensure that no excess solvent is left on the
inside of smaller fittings.
6.6 Immediately after application of the cement the pipe must be pushed fully home against the stop
in the fitting. The pressure must be maintained for about 30 seconds.
6.7 Wipe off any excess cement. Clean brushes in cleaner solvent and close lids on all solutions.
6.8 The system is to harden at least 24 hours before pressurizing.
7.0 PIPEWORK SUPPORTS
7.1 All pipework shall be adequately supported. All support and hangers shall be manufactured to
comply with the latest edition of MSS-SP-58 or in accordance with relevant British Standard
Specifications and Codes of Practice, except where modified or extended by the contract
documents. Seismic-restraint hangers and supports, designed by a specialist, shall be provided
to overcome earthquake motions.
7.2 Supports shall allow free movement for expansion or contraction of pipework and shall be located
to ensure that pipework branches or fittings are not fouled by the support during expansion or
contraction of the pipework service.
7.3 Double banking of pipework from a single support position will be permitted, provided the normal
operating temperature of the fluids in the two pipes do not differ by more than 30 degrees C., but
only where space restrictions prohibit individual support. Triple banking will not be permitted.
7.4 Where double banking is necessary, the larger of the two pipes shall be uppermost, and where
pipes are the same size but manufactured from different materials, then the pipe having the
material with the lowest coefficient of expansion shall be uppermost. Support intervals for
double-banked pipework of different sizes shall relate to the smaller size.
7.5 Vertical rising pipes shall be supported at the base and the support shall withstand the total
weight of the pipe and fluid contained.
7.6 Supports shall not be permitted which clamp the pipe so that it is in contact with building fabric or
structure.
7.7 All supports shall be specifically designed for the outside diameter of the pipe concerned
(including specified packings). Oversized brackets will be rejected.

7.8 Where non-ferrous pipework is to be supported using ferrous pipe clamps or rings, an approved
plastic coating applied to the clamp or ring shall be used to prevent contact between the ferrous
and non-ferrous surfaces. Where cast iron rollers are to be used in contact with copper pipework,
these shall be copper-plated.
7.9 All pipework shall be supported in accordance with the following table:-
Horizontal Piping (Meters) Vertical Piping (Meters)

Pipe Size
(mm) ABS / ABS/
Steel Copper Steel Copper
uPVC uPVC
15 2.1 1.5 0.7 2.4 2.0 1.3
20 2.1 1.5 0.7 3.0 2.4 1.5
25-32 2.1 1.8 0.9 3.0 2.4 1.8
40 2.7 2.4 1.0 3.6 3.0 1.8
50 3.0 2.4 1.0 3.6 3.0 2.0
65 3.4 2.7 1.0 4.5 3.6 2.0
80 3.7 3.0 1.3 4.5 3.6 2.5
100-125 4.3 3.7 1.5 5.0 4.0 3.0
150 5.2 4.3 2.0 6.0 5.0 3.5
200 5.8 4.9
250 6.1 5.5
300 7.0 5.8
350 7.6
400 8.2
450 8.5
500 and above 9.0
a Spacing does not apply where span calculations are made or where concentrated loads
are placed between supports, such as flanges, valves, specialties, etc.
b All spacing length is in meter.
7.10 Plastic pipework shall be supported using the pipework Manufacturer's standard support clip as
detailed in the Schedule of Manufacturers.
7.11 Horizontal mild steel pipework shall be supported individually by clevis type hangers or roller
hangers where indicated.
7.12 Vertical steel pipework shall be provided with pipe alignment as recommended by supplier and
with pipe anchors at locations as agreed with the Engineer.
7.13 All chilled water pipe supports on steel pipework shall be galvanized.
7.14 Copper pipework where fixed against brick or dense concrete block walls shall be supported
using polished cast brass build-in brackets.
Build-in brackets shall be long shank type, when pipework is to insulated or where the finish to
the wall surface is greater than 15 mm, elsewhere build-in brackets shall be the short shank type.

7.15 Copper pipework in exposed positions where fixed against lightweight hollow block or other
patent walls or partitions, shall be supported using polished cast brass screw-on brackets.
7.16 All chilled water pipework services shall be supported around the insulation and not directly
around the pipework. Care shall be taken to ensure the integrity of vapour sealing is not
damaged in any way.
7.17 It shall be noted that in certain cases it will be necessary to adopt a combination of the support
methods indicated, and when supports are required to be detailed to suit special site conditions
or requirements, then these details shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Anti-vibration
supports shall be fitted at all locations where pipework vibration is likely to be a problem.
8.0 VALVES.
8.1 Valves shall be provided and installed where required for the purpose of circulation control and
isolation. Valves shall be of full bore size to suit the mains into which they are installed.
8.2 All castings shall be clean close-grained metal, free from rough projections. Screwed valves shall
have heavy hexagon reinforcement threads, ample length threads and heavy shoulder to prevent
over entry of pipes. Flanged valves shall have the flanges flat faced and of thickness conforming
to the appropriate specifications for the respective services and drilled off-centre.
8.3 Valves shall have pressure rating as necessary for the service indicated on the drawing.
Samples must be provided for inspection of the manufacturing methods.
8.4 Gate valves for sizes up to 50 mm, shall be bronze, non rising stem, screwed bonnet, one piece
wedge. The stem shall have a lock shield to restrict unauthorized adjustment.
The casting shall have large hexagon section at all threads to permit gripping to prevent line
distortion during installation.
8.5 Gate valves sizes 65mm dia and above shall be cast iron, non rising stem, bolted bonnet, one
piece wedge, lock shield type.
8.6 Check valves up to size 50 mm shall be bronze, screwed ends oblique swing pattern with
screwed access cap, metal to metal seat suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical
pipework.
8.7 Check valves size 65 mm and above shall be swing pattern, cast iron body with copper alloy trim,
bolted access, flanged ends, suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical pipework.
8.8 Silent check valves above 50mm shall be cast iron body, silent check, globe style, spring
actuated, renewable seats, stainless steel disc.
8.9 Balancing Valves (double regulating) upto size 50mm dia shall be of bronze body / brass ball
construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves to have differential pressure
readout ports across valve seat area. Read out ports to be fitted with internal EPT insert and
check valve. Valve bodies to have 6MM NPT tapped drain / purge port. Valves to have memory
stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and then reopened to set point without
disturbing balance position.
All valves to have calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve setting. Valves to be leak tight at
full rated working pressure. All valves to be provided with moulded insulation to permit access for
balance and read out.
8.10 Balancing valves (double regulating) size 65mm dia and above shall be of heavy duty cast iron
flanged construction with flanged connections.

Valves size 65 and 80mm dia shall have a brass ball with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings.
Valves size 100mm dia and above shall be fitted with a bronze seat, replaceable bronze disc with
EPDM seal insert, and stainless steel stem. Valves to have memory stop feature to allow valve to
be closed for service and then reopened to set point without disturbing balance position. All
valves to have calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve setting. Valves to be leaktight at full
rated working pressure. All valves to be provided with moulded insulation to permit access for
balance and read out.
8.11 All valves shall be rated for a working pressure of 16 Bar, unless otherwise indicated.
8.12 In lieu of gate valves, butterfly valves may be used. Valves construction shall be ductile iron
body, ductile iron disc, rubber encapsulated suited for the intended service. Valves shall be
bubble tight with memory stop.
8.13 Certificate of Origin shall be provided for all valves.
9.0 STRAINERS
9.1 Strainers shall be full line size located ahead of all pumps and in locations as indicated on
drawings rated for 16 bar. Bodies shall be bronze, screwed body," Y" type, up to 50 mm size
with 37% open mesh Monel metal or stainless steel screen, and 1.4 mm diameter holes.
9.2 For sizes 65mm and above, Iron body, flanged, "Y" type bolted cover, flanged ends tapped
blow-off outlet, 37% open mesh Monel metal or stainless steel screen, with 1.4 mm diameter
holes.
10.0 GAUGES AND ACCESSORIES.
10.1 Wet service thermometers shall be straight shank mercury fill insertion type. They shall have a
stem length of 80 mm and a scale length of 225 mm, and the capability of adjusting the angle of
the scale to the stem. Provide copper or brass separable wells for each thermometer.
10.2 Air service thermometers shall be straight shank mercury fill insertion type. They shall have a
stem length of 150 mm and a scale length of 225 mm, and the capability of adjusting the angle of
the scale to the stem.
10.3 Pressure gauges shall have 100 mm diameter cast Aluminium case, black figures, forged brass
sockets with phosphor bronze bushed rotary type movement and Bourdon tube. Gauges shall be
complete with impulse dampening insert and T-handle gauge cock.
10.4 Where the line size is 100 mm or less the gauge is to be installed into a "Tee" branch, with
reducers. For sizes above 125 mm a "threadolet" weld-on connection may be used, subject to
proper procedures and requirements of the welding specifications.
10.5 Range of gauges shall be selected such that the operating point is almost midway of the selected
range.
11.0 AIR CONTROL DEVICES
11.1 Provide air vents at all high points in supply and return piping.
11.2 Automatic air vents shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non ferrous or stainless steel floats and
guides and non corrodible valves and seats. Each automatic air vent shall be controlled by a lock
shield valve. Air release pipes shall be run to discharge at the nearest visible point - to be agreed
with the Engineer.
11.3 Provide inline air separators where indicated on drawings. Air separators shall be single piece, of
cast iron, with an integral weir designed to reduce system flow to maximize air separation.
Separation shall have a threaded connection to accept high capacity air vent.

11.4 Tangential Air Separators
Furnish and install as shown on plans, a centrifugal type air separator. The unit shall have inlet
and outlet connections tangential to the vessel shell. The unit shall have an internal stainless
steel air collector tube with 4mm diameter perforations and 63% open area designed to direct
accumulated air to the compression tank on an air control system or an air vent on an air
elimination system via an NPT vent connection at top of unit.
The unit shall have a removable galvanized system strainer with 4.8mm diameter perforations
and a free area of not less than five times the cross-sectional area of the connecting pipe. The
strainer shall be located at the bottom of the vessel to reduce floor space required for strainer
removal.
A blow down connection shall be provided to facilitate routine cleaning of the strainer and the
separator.
Vessel shell diameter shall be atleast three times the nominal inlet/outlet pipe diameter, with a
minimum vessel volume for sufficient velocity reduction. The air separator shall be designed
constructed and stamped for 862 kPa @ 177°C in accordance with Section VIII, Division I of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, and registered with the National Board of Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Inspectors. The air separator(s) shall be painted with one shop coat of light
gray air dry enamel.
A manufacturer’s Data Report for Pressure Vessels, Form U-1 as required by the provision of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, shall be furnished for each air separator.
12.0 FLOW SWITCHES
12.1 Flow switches shall be provided at the outlet connection to each chiller.
12.2 Flow switches shall be paddle type with bronze construction for all parts in contact with water.
12.3 Electrical termination box shall be weather protected to IP 65 and suitable for installation in
ambient case temperatures upto 85 deg. C.
13.0 FLOW MEASUREMENTS.
13.1 Provide in the main incoming supply line a feature to enable flow measurements to be made.
Provide all equipment and, if indirect measurements are used, provide all calibration equipment,
charts etc.
13.2 Provide Binder Sockets suitable for the application of flow sensors at all locations shown or
necessary for all balancing purposes.
13.3 Provide water meter to monitor the quantity of water being added to the system by the make-up
unit.
14.0 EXPANSION PROVISIONS AND ANCHOR POINTS
14.1 All sections of pipework installations shall be installed in such a manner as to allow expansion
and contraction for the pipework, without causing undue stress in any part of the installation.
14.2 The stress in the pipework shall be kept below the yield point. Care shall be taken to prevent
branch connections becoming anchor points.
14.3 Wherever possible expansion and contraction shall be absorbed by natural offsets and changes
in direction of pipe runs. Provide anchors, pipe guides and expansion loops where shown or
required, to the Engineer’s approval. Do not use screwed fittings on expansion loops.

14.4 Wherever it is not possible to accommodate expansion and contraction of the installations as
described above, expansion devices shall be supplied, erected and connected into the pipework
installations, and the position of these devices shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
14.5 The exact location and working details including anchor loads of all expansion devices, guides,
anchors, and all associated equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
commencement of the installation, carrying the manufacturer's confirmation that these are in
accordance with his requirements.
14.6 Connections to items of plant and equipment shall be made so that no stress is placed on the
equipment or its' connections. All expansion devices shall be carefully erected in full accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendation and instructions, and be approved by the manufacturer
for the particular application concerned.
14.7 No system of expansion control shall be accepted where the closure of movement exceeds the
amount recommended by the manufacturer when operating from the cold to the upper limit
working temperature. The minimum temperature difference for calculation purpose shall be 40
degrees C for interior pipes, and 50 degrees C for exposed or external runs.
14.8 All expansion devices shall be cold drawn by a distance equal to half the total expansion and all
contraction devices shall be cold compressed by a distance equal to half the total contraction.
Cold draw shall not be applied until the anchor installations have been completed and approved
by the Engineer.
14.9 All anchor points shall be treated as main anchor points, the practice of utilizing a less substantial
anchor for "intermediate positions" shall not be permitted.
14.10 Where the installation is required to be tested in sections, extra anchor points shall be installed
where necessary, for the protection of the expansion devices.
14.11 Pipework between anchors shall wherever possible be straight, but where this is not possible, the
bracing of all guides shall be adequate to overcome the resultant turning moment produced by
the offset forces, but the Engineer shall be informed before the work commences.
14.12 Each axial expansion device shall be guided as close as possible on both sides of the joint, but in
no case more than 1 1/2 diameters away. A further set of guides shall be installed at a distance
of not more than 15 diameters away from the axial expansion device unless the manufacturer
imposes more stringent requirements.
14.13 The positioning of anchors and guides immediately adjacent to angular expansion devices shall
be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation for the application concerned and
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before installation commences. The remainder of
the pipework shall be set in guides at a maximum of twice the maximum interval for support
spacings specified elsewhere for the pipe size to which the expansion device is fitted.
14.14 Expansion Joints
14.14.1 Copper Piping - 50-mm (2-inch) nom. dia. and under: Two (2) ply phosphor bronze tandem
bellows, brass shrouds and threaded / sweat ends. Provide anti-torque device and limit stops.
14.14.2 Copper Piping - 65-mm (2 ½-inch) nom. dia. and over: Two (2) ply phosphor bronze bellows
brass shrouds and flanged ends. Provide internal flow liners, anti-torque device and limit stops.
14.14.3 Steel Piping - 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and under: Two (2) ply stainless steel tandem bellows,
carbon steel shrouds and threaded / welding ends. Provide anti-torque device and limit stops.
14.14.4 Steel Piping - 65-mm (2 ½-inch) nom. dia. and over: Two (2) ply stainless steel bellows, carbon
steel shrouds and flanged ends. Provide internal flow liners anti-torque device and limit stops.

15.0 WATER SYSTEM TREATMENT (CLEANING)
15.1 The piping system shall be prepared as detailed elsewhere herein. The system will then be
further treated.
15.2 Prior to testing and commissioning, the Engineer shall be provided with water conditioning
programme, to control water quality. Cleaning shall be supervised, and programme of
conditioning administered by the conditioning company.
15.3 For Precommission cleaning, the system shall be dosed with the prescribed amount of the non
acid cleaning agent and a surfactant as advised by the chemical company.
15.4 Cleaner shall be run into the system and retained for a period of 72 hrs. or more as advised by
the chemical company. At the end of this period the system shall be drained and flushed with
clean water.
15.5 All strainers and trapping points shall be inspected, and any debris removed.
15.6 System shall be refilled with clean water, re-circulated or run through for a further four hours, and
again drained and flushed. The flushing shall continue till the effluent is clear, colourless,
odourless, free from suspended solids and such that the iron level is not more than 10 ppm and
the conductivity is no more than 30 µs/cm greater than the make up water.
15.7 Upon completion of flushing all strainers shall be inspected and any debris removed.
15.8 The system shall be refilled with clean water and a specified amount of inhibitor added.
15.9 Chilled Water and Hot Water Treatment (Closed System)
15.9.1 Provide a complete automatic and microprocessor based water treatment control system.
a Provide a Nitrate, borate and buffer based material to maintain the conditions for pH and
Nitrate as note hereunder:
1 pH : Maintain a value with 7.0 to 9.0
2 Nitrate as NO2 : 700 ppm
3 “P” Alkalinity : Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.
4 Boron : Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.
5 Chemical Oxygen Demand : Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm
6 Soluble Copper : Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.
7 TDS : Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm.
8 Ammonia : Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
9 Free Caustic Alkalinity : Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
10 Microbiological Limits:
i Total aerobic plate count : Maintain a maximum value of 1000

organisms/ml.
ii Total anaerobic plate count : Maintain a maximum value of 100

organisms/ml.

iii Nitrate reducers : Maintain a maximum value of 100

organisms/ml.
iv Sulfate reducers : Maintain a maximum value of 0

organisms/ml.
v Iron bacteria : Maintain a maximum value of 0

organisms/ml.
15.9.2 Passivation for galvanized steel: For the first 60 days of operation
a pH : Maintain a value within [7 to 8]
b Calcium carbonate hardness : Maintain a value within [100 to 300] ppm.
c Calcium carbonate alkalinity : Maintain a value within [100 to 300] ppm.
15.9.3 Impulse Water Meter
a Provide an impulse type water meter in the makeup water connection line with a timer
and a positive displacement pump to feed the necessary inhibiters from drum.
15.9.4 Chemicals
a Chemical shall be a liquid form proprietary formulation of an internationally reputed

company. This product shall be specifically designed for the treatment of the chilled water
and hot water systems and shall be compatible with installed piping system components
and connected equipment.
b This inhibitor will have no adverse effects on gaskets, rubber and other non-metallic
material present in the system.
c Selected inhibitor shall be non hazardous type and/or shall require no special precautions
for handling. Also, this inhibitor shall offer advantages such as keeping heat transfer
surface clean, maintain system free of fouling and reduce formation deposits and scale
etc. and generally maintaining high heat transfer rates.
15.9.5 Chemical Feed Equipment
a Provide a (5 U.S. Gallon) 19 liters shot feeder including funnel, (2 inch) 50mm wide
mouth relief valve and air vent for intermittent feed of corrosion inhibitor across a suitable
pressure drop in each of the closed circuit chilled water and hot water piping system.
15.9.6 Water Treatment Testing Equipment:
a Provide test set complete with apparatus and chemical reagents to determine PH,
conductivity, TDS values.
15.10 Cooling Tower Condenser Water Treatment (Open System)
15.10.1 General:
Provide a complete automatic and microprocessor based water treatment control system of
modular plug-in construction with back lift LCD display. Include in this system, but not limited to,
conductivity, pH and relative corrosivity control and monitoring as well as biocide addition with
capability to add 2 biocides, pumps, 4-20 mA output to control system to have printed record
parameter of water on regular basis and software based graphing facility, where applicable,

a PH Controller
1 Range : 0-14 PH.
2 Control for both acid and caustic
3 Temperature compensation : Automatic
4 Accuracy : 0.01 PH
5 Sensitivity : 0.001 PH
6 Stability : +or - 0.001 PH units
7 Circuitry : Surface mount technology
8 Indication : 4-20mA output to BAS
b Conductivity Controller
1 Range : 0-5000 ohms.
2 Temperature compensation : Automatic (0 Degrees - 60 degrees C).
3 Accuracy : 1% full scale.
4 Sensitivity : 0.1% full scale
5 Stability : 1% per month.
6 Circuitry : surface mount technology.
7 Indication : 4-20mA output to BAS.
c Impulse Water Meter
Install in the make-up water line to control the inhibitor feed up. Size the water meter to
give required contact. Connect the meter to the inhibitor feed pump with a limit timer.
d Pumps
1 Corrosion Inhibition: Provide two positive displacement pumps with liquid handling
components suitable for inhibitor service wired into the impulse water meter. One
pump shall be stand-by. Inhibitor shall be added proportional to the amount of
make-up water entering the system
2 Biocide feed: Provide three positive displacement diaphragm pump controlled by

biocide programmer. Use one for each type of biocides with the third pump as
standby.
3 Pumps should have on line stroke rate and stroke percentage control.
e Biocide Timer
A 28 day dual biocide timer shall be provided to alternatively dose 2 biocides. A third
pump shall be provided as standby.

f Corrosion Monitoring:
Provide corrosion measuring electrode with heater and control to monitor corrosion. It
should be capable of monitoring both corrosion and fouling conditions. It should have
capability to enable user to check corrosion and fouling characteristics for different
metallurgy.
g Flow Controller:
A combination magnetically operated flow switch, flow sight and check valve, which shall:
1 Disconnect all output during a "no-flow" condition.
2 1.5gpm minimum flow rate.
3 Deactivate all alarm circuits under "no-flow" condition.
h Sensors:
Mount all sensors in a flow cell assembly constructed of rugged thermoplastic enclosed in
a polyester resin and mounted in a NEMA 3 fibre glass enclosure.
15.10.2 Chemicals
a Chemical shall be a proprietary formulation of an internationally reputed company. This

product shall be specifically designed for the treatment of the condenser water systems
and shall be compatible with installed piping system components and connected
equipment.
b Condenser water corrosion and scale inhibitor shall be a blend of environmentally safe
organic and scale inhibitors suitable for use in the system. It should also contain specific
dispersants and sequestrates to prevent fouling.
c The biocide is used shall be of non oxidizing type. It should be effective against algae,
bacteria and fungi. The biocides shall be added on an alternate basis.
15.10.3 Bleed Off:
A bleeding solenoid valve shall be activated in case of high conductivity and an alarm should be
provided to inform operator of this condition. The water shall be bled till the conductivity falls
below the operator set limit.
15.10.4 Water Treatment Control Testing Equipment
Provide a portable test set complete with apparatus and chemical reagents for the determination
of molybdate, phosphonate, chloride, PH, nitrate and any calcium, magnesium and total alkalinity
and biocide concentration.
15.10.5 Enclosure:
The complete controller shall be a single unit with all components prewired and preplumbed with
no field component assembly. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12x or better.
15.10.6 Printer
Provide a 4-20mA output to give pre-programmable printout for pH, conductivity, timers to the
control system to enable history logging.

16.0 START UP CHEMICALS
The supply of all chemicals for system startup shall be the scope of this contract. Chemicals
sufficient for contractual maintenance period shall be arranged by the Contractor.
17.0 VIBRATION ISOLATION
See Ductwork Specification.
18.0 PRESSURE TESTS.
See relevant sections of the General requirements.
19.0 WELDING TESTS.
See relevant sections of the General requirements.
20.0 SUBMITTALS.
21.0 Technical submissions are to include the schematic for components actually to be installed
showing flow rates, and accompanied by pressure drop calculation for the system.
22.0 Technical brochures and information on all components:
a Pipework,
b Pipe fittings.
c Pipe supports.
d Valves.
e Strainers.
f Gauges and accessories.
g Air vents.
h Flow measuring instruments.
i Expansion joints.
j Anchor points.
k Test forms.
l Insulation.
m Air separators
n Water treatment
23.0 In the event that the Engineer requires further information on any item, samples must be provided
as necessary.
End of Section

PART A - SECTION 4
DUCTWORK AND AIRSIDE EQUIPMENT
Revision History

PART A - SECTION 4
DUCTWORK AND AIRSIDE EQUIPMENT
INDEX
1.0 DUCTWORK MATERIAL ...............................................................................................................3
2.0 DUCTWORK SPECIFICATION .....................................................................................................3
3.0 DUCTWORK GENERAL ................................................................................................................4
4.0 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK ....................................................................................................5
5.0 MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK..............................................................................................6
6.0 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK ...................................................................................................6
7.0 FLEXIBLE DUCT WORK - LOW PRESSURE ...............................................................................6
8.0 FLEXIBLE CONNECTION .............................................................................................................6
9.0 ACCESS PANELS .........................................................................................................................7
10.0 BALANCING DAMPERS. ...............................................................................................................7
11.0 FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS .......................................................................................................8
12.0 MOTORISED DAMPERS ...............................................................................................................8
13.0 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS ...............................................................................................................8
14.0 SPLITTER DAMPERS ...................................................................................................................9
15.0 FIRE DAMPERS ............................................................................................................................9
16.0 SMOKE DAMPERS........................................................................................................................9
17.0 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS .........................................................................10
18.0 SILENCERS .................................................................................................................................10
19.0 VIBRATION ISOLATION (APPLICABLE FOR ALL SECTIONS) ................................................11
20.0 DUCT DRAINS AND DRIP PANS................................................................................................13
21.0 DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS ..................................................................................................13
22.0 EXTRACT AIR LOUVRES ...........................................................................................................15
23.0 SAND TRAP LOUVRE FOR AIR INTAKE ...................................................................................15
24.0 SUBMISSIONS ............................................................................................................................16

Ductwork and Airside Equipment
1.0 DUCTWORK MATERIAL
1.1 Make all ductwork, unless specifically noted otherwise, of galvanized sheet steel conforming to
BS 2989 or ASTM A653A, 653M, G90 (Z275) and having a minimum coating of 275 g/m² (0.90
oz./sq. ft). The galvanizing shall be carefully done and the sheets shall be of such quality that
they may be bent flat on themselves with no fracture to the coating or the base metal.
1.2 All supports, stiffeners, flanges etc. used in ductwork construction and installation shall be hot dip
galvanized.
1.3 Extract ductwork from commercial kitchens shall be air and water tight welded construction,
painted on the outside with two coats of heat resistant galvanic paint. Ductwork exposed to view
within occupied areas shall be constructed of 1.2mm thick polished stainless steel 316. Ductwork
concealed from view, in plantrooms or on roof shall be constructed of 1.6mm thick black steel
sheets to BS 1449, Part-1 Grade CR4 GP or ASTM A625/A624M.
1.4 Extract ductwork from commercial laundries shall be air and water tight construction
manufactured from aluminium sheets in accordance with BS 1470 or ASTM B 209m.
1.5 Extract ductwork handling corrosive gases (battery rooms) shall be stainless steel 316
construction.
1.6 Smoke Extract and stairwell pressurization ductwork shall be fire rated designed, constructed and
tested to meet the requirements of BS 5588 Part 9 and BS 476 Part 24. Ductwork complete with
supports, accessories and fittings shall to be tested and approved to meet the following
requirements with fire inside and outside.
a Stability - 120 minutes
b Integrity - 120 minutes
c Insulation - 120 minutes
Supports and fixings shall be of sufficient strength and arranged to ensure that the ductwork is
maintained in position throughout the required period. Prior to use or installation, necessary test
certificate and accreditation documentation shall be provided to Engineer.
2.0 DUCTWORK SPECIFICATION
2.1 Ductwork fabrication and hanging methods shall be as described in the "Equipment" Volume of
the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers Guide and Data
Book, latest edition, and/or current edition of applicable manuals published by the Sheet Metal
and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. (SMACNA), where methods described
in these volumes are not at variance with the requirements of any Authority Having Jurisdiction,
or do not conflict with methods described hereafter. Ductwork shall not be shop fabricated until
work has been job measured and interference situations coordinated.
2.2 Any Contractor who is more familiar with British Standards may refer to DW. 144. Any
discrepancy will be clarified by the Engineer on request.
In any event, the standard of work required is the best available, and the specifications are to be
so interpreted.
2.3 Extract ductwork from commercial kitchen shall be fabricated and installed in accordance to
NFPA 96.

3.0 DUCTWORK GENERAL
3.1 All dimensions shall be checked on site before ductwork manufacture is commenced.
3.2 The whole of the ductwork installation shall be carried out by an approved specialist in ductwork
manufacture and installation. No ductwork shall touch the building structure or building finishes
direct, but shall be isolated with insulating spacer.
3.3 The fabrication shall be carried out in a neat and workmanlike manner with all ductwork true in
size and cross-section, braced and stiffened as specified and with all internal and external
surfaces free from projections and sharp edges.
3.4 At each main branch in ductwork and at each fan discharge and suction, provide sufficient
number of Pitot tube test holes for balancing systems. Also provide test holes for traverse fan
discharge and at all equipments. Test holes shall be located within easy reach of catwalks or
ladder. Each test hole shall have 20 mm clear opening, provided with a metal ring plate with a
threaded hole in the boss, and matching screwed head plug. Where these plugs are installed in
insulated ductwork, provide an extension collar against which the insulation can be finished.
3.5 Reinforced holes shall be provided where thermometers, manometers, thermostats, gauges,
damper rods etc., occur in ductwork. Extended collars shall be provided for the reinforced holes
where these occur on insulated ductwork. Where copper tubing passes through ductwork, or
casing, provide a rubber grommet to prevent damage to copper tubing.
3.6 Ductwork shall be rigidly suspended or supported from building structure. Expansion type
concrete inserts shall be placed so that the fastener is in shear rather than tension. Powder
actuated fasteners placed by an explosive charge will not be accepted. Angle type trapeze
hangers with rod supports spaced at 2 meters maximum shall be used."C" type beam clamps will
not be accepted. Provide necessary steel angle iron required for bracing of ductwork or
equipment, and for supporting ductwork from building structure. Seismic restraint hangers and
supports, designed by a specialist company, shall be provided to withstand the effects of
earthquake motions.
A layer of felt strip 12.5 mm compressed thickness shall be provided between any support
member which is designed to clamp or grip the duct (e.g. circular duct band clip) or on which the
duct is to rest. All supports shall be hot dip galvanized.
3.7 Increase in duct size shall be gradual. Where width or largest dimension of a duct is over 450
mm, duct shall be stiffened by bending in a break across corners in both directions. Ducts shall
be self-supporting and complete in themselves. Single thickness partition between ducts will not
be accepted. Visible internal portions of duct outlets to grilles and registers shall be painted in dull
black.
3.8 All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made in the installation of the ducts for the
structural framing of the building and when changes or offsets are necessary, the required
cross-sectional areas shall be maintained. All of these changes however, shall be approved, and
installed as directed at the time.
3.9 During installation the open ends of ducts shall be protected with blank, flanged sheet metal
baffles, securely attached to prevent debris and dirt from entering.
3.10 Where ducts are shown connecting to masonry openings and/ or along the edges of all plenums
at floors, walls, etc., provide a continuous 30 x 30 x 4 mm galvanized angle iron which shall be
bolted to the structure and made airtight to same by applying caulking compound on the angles
before they are drawn down tight. The sheet metal at these locations shall be bolted to the angle
iron framing.

3.11 All air ducts, casings, plenums etc., shall be constructed of lock forming quality prime galvanized
steel sheets, which are free from blisters, slivers, pits, imperfectly coated spots etc. No second
quality sheet metal is allowed.
Where damage (or rusting) has occurred on galvanized duct work the affected section shall be
made good by painting with two coats of zinc-rich paint and approved finishing paint, or where
the damage in the Engineer’s opinion cannot be made good, then a new section of ductwork shall
be provided at no cost to the contract.
3.12 Duct shall be constructed using double or Pittsburgh lock corner seams. All seams shall be
hammered down and made airtight by applying sealant before hammering down. For transverse
joints, refer to current ASHRAE guide for low pressure ductwork.
3.13 Support the vertical ducts installed in the various shafts at each floor level with galvanized
supporting irons of approved size. Install these angles across the width of the shaft, with their
ends attached to angle irons securely anchored into the masonry walls of the shaft, or attached to
the framing of the floor openings. The ducts shall be bolted to these supporting angle irons.
3.14 Ensure that all openings required through floors, walls, partitions etc., for the duct system are
provided in the exact location required.
3.15 Each piece of ductwork shall be wiped inside and out before installation and all open ends shall
be capped and sealed to prevent entrance of dirt during construction. Ensure that ductwork
systems are clean and free from dirt, dust, grime, debris etc., before initial operation of fans. Fans
shall not be operated until the filters are installed and approval from the Engineer has been
obtained.
3.16 The bottom joint and 150 mm of vertical joint on outside air intake ducts and mixing chamber
ducts shall be soldered and made watertight. Provide drain connection and run copper drain pipe
to nearest floor drain.
3.17 All fixing devices including nuts, bolts, washers etc., used in the construction or support of
galvanized ductwork shall be Sheradised, or cadmium-plated.
3.18 Final connections to diffusers shall be carried out using flexible ductwork.
3.19 Sealants, gaskets and tapes shall comply with relevant causes in DW 144.
4.0 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
4.1 This applies to ductwork with mean velocities less than (2,000 fpm) 10 m/Sec and static
pressures of (2 inches water gauge), 500 pascals or less.
4.2 Rectangular low pressure ductwork shall be fabricated from prime quality, re-squared, tight coat
galvanized steel sheets of the following gauges.
Size of Duct (Milli metres) Gauge of Sheet Metal
a 300 mm less in width/depth ............................. No. 26 US Std. Gauge (0.6 mm)
b 300 to 750 mm width/depth ............................. No. 24 US Std. Gauge (0.7 mm)
c 750 to 1350 mm width/depth ........................... No. 22 US Std. Gauge (0.85 mm)
d 1350 to 2100 mm width/depth ......................... No. 20 US Std. Gauge (1.00 mm)
e 2100 mm and over ........................................... No. 18 US Std. Gauge (1.3 mm)

4.3 Reinforcing and joints shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Guide and Data Book, Equipment
Volume, or DW 144 or SMACNA.
4.4 Low pressure suction and discharge plenum chambers shall be fabricated from 1.3mm thick
(18 gauge) galvanized steel with galvanized angle iron framework and bracing.
4.5 In square elbows and in elbows where radius is less than 1.5 times the width of duct, sheet metal
deflector vanes shall be installed the full height of the duct, being securely riveted in place. All
vanes shall be double thickness vanes of two gauges heavier than the duct in which they are
installed, and shall be factory made, not site fabricated. Vanes shall be tack welded to vane rail.
For vane lengths over 1000 mm, tack weld vanes to 10 mm tie-rod at mid-span.
4.6 Circular low pressure ductwork shall be fabricated from prime quality galvanize sheet steel, as
specified herein above, as per DW 144 or SMACNA Standards.
4.7 Exposed circular low pressure ductwork shall be double wall spiral duct with 30 percent
perforated inner shell, thermally insulated as specified elsewhere
5.0 MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK
5.1 Ductwork subject to positive pressures upto 1000Pa shall be considered as medium pressure
ductwork. Construction shall be in accordance to DW 144.
6.0 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
6.1 Ductwork subject to positive pressures upto 2000Pa shall be considered as high pressure
ductwork. Construction shall be in accordance to DW 144.
7.0 FLEXIBLE DUCT WORK - LOW PRESSURE
7.1 Flexible ductwork shall be manufactured with a two layer aluminized polyester innercore,
surrounded by 25 mm thickness of 24 Kg/m³ density fibreglass, all wrapped in a reinforced
multilayed aluminium polyester outer jacket.
Ductwork shall meet the standards of NFPA 90A, and be U.L. listed or to meet BS 476 and BS
413. Maximum flame spread rating - 12 (Class 1). Maximum smoke developed rating - 50.
7.2 Duct clamps shall be made of an 8mm wide stainless steel band with 'Lifted' edges to avoid
damage to the duct. The clamp shall be provided with a 'flip up' and 'quick lock' tightening head
for ease and speed of application.
7.3 Flexible duct installation shall be in accordance with manufacture's instruction. Joints between
factory insulated flexible ducts and field insulated ductwork shall be sealed and taped under this
section.
8.0 FLEXIBLE CONNECTION
8.1 Flexible connectors at inlet and discharge to air handling equipment shall be pre-assembled
(24 gauge) 0.7 mm galvanized steel to ASTM – A – 653A – 653M with minimum of 100 mm wide
(exposed) fabric. For higher pressure applications 25 mm of width of fabric shall be used for each
25 mm of static pressure.
8.2 Flexible connectors attached to acoustically treated ductwork shall be insulated with 25 mm
fibreglass insulation packed between flexible connector and (16 gauge) 1.5 mm galvanized steel
housing. Housing shall be fastened to duct with sheet metal screws. At equipment collar caulk
between collar and flange on housing with 10 mm thick permanently flexible sealant.
Care shall be taken to ensure that ducts on both sides of the connection are independently
supported and that no "bridging" occurs.

8.3 All flexible connection will be by an approved manufacturer, with ratings of fire spread, strength
etc., listed by a recognized Testing Authority. All flexible connectors shall be UL certified.
8.4 The fabric shall be rated for use up to (200 degrees F) 93 degrees C working temperature with a
tensile strength of not less than (500 lbs) 2224N. On high temperature applications, fabric shall
be silicon coated, rated for use upto 300 degree C.
8.5 The material shall also be impervious to moisture, dimensionally stable, and shall not rot.
9.0 ACCESS PANELS
9.1 Duct access panels shall be minimum 450 x 300 mm. unless restricted by duct dimensions. All
access panels shall be double skin constructed from galvanized steel sheets, thickness to suit
the duct insulation, with necessary reinforcing inside for rigidity, with space filled with glass fibre
insulation. Panels shall be made airtight with a continuous neoprene rubber gasket.
9.2 Openings in ductwork shall be provided with continuous galvanized reinforcing bars, which on
insulated ductwork, shall be extended to the face of the insulation. 'Small' panels shall be
provided with at least two self tightening camlocks. All panels shall have brass drawer type
handle.
9.3 Apparatus access doors shall be minimum 600 x 1500 mm with angle or channel frame. Provide
two 75 mm strap hinges with brass pins; and two handles minimum, operable from inside and
outside. All access panels shall be constructed from double thickness 18 gauge (1.3 mm)
galvanized steel, with insulation between sides with necessary reinforcing for rigidity. Doors shall
be made airtight with "tadpole" gaskets.
9.4 Provide access panels where shown, required and directed and in the following locations:
a Bottom of all duct risers.
b Next to outside air intakes and outlets.
c At each fire damper.
d Into apparatus casings to facilitate maintenance and cleaning of all components.
9.5 On extract ducts from commercial kitchens, provide access panels in following locations:
a At 3.7m intervals on horizontal ducts.
b At each floor on vertical ducts.
Panels shall be same material as duct work and shall confirm to NFPA 96.
10.0 BALANCING DAMPERS.
10.1 Install volume control dampers in accessible locations at all branch connections and wherever
necessary to adjust the flow of air to secure correct distribution. Casing and blades shall be made
of galvanized sheet metal, and shall be equipped with an approved device for fastening in any
desired position. This device shall be such that the damper cannot move or rattle and pointer
shall indicate the position of the damper from the outside of the finished duct insulation, and shall
be clearly marked with words “Open and Shut”.
10.2 Dampers shall be aerofoil multileaf opposed blade with blade height not more than 180 mm.
10.3 All blades shall be operated by a single operating quadrant with gears and links as necessary.

10.4 Spindles shall be non-corrodible, passing through non ferrous bushings or ball bearing supports
with seals. Capped bearings shall be provided on non drive side.
10.5 The whole damper assembly shall be mounted in a galvanized frame with flanges.
10.6 Seal material shall be rated upto 93 deg C with low water absorption and excellent chemical
resistance to acids, alkalis and oils.
11.0 FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS
11.1 These dampers shall be installed in ductwork to maintain a constant air flow regardless of
changes of pressure conditions. The damper shall be suitable for duct velocities ranging
between 2m/s to 8 m/s and shall operate from a minimum pressure of 20 Pa upto a maximum of
200 Pa.
12.0 MOTORISED DAMPERS
12.1 The Contractor shall furnish and install, control dampers as required for the proper functioning of
the system.
12.2 All control dampers shall be opposed blade.
12.3 Dampers frames shall be formed channels of not less than 1.8mm galvanized steel with mounting
holes for enclosed duct mounting.
12.4 Damper blades shall be of not less than 1.5mm thick galvanized steel. Blades on multi-blade
dampers shall not exceed 200mm in width and 1200mm in length. Blade shaft bearings shall be
provided at the ends of each blade. Blade side edges shall seal off against spring stainless steel
seals.
12.5 Dampers shall be supplied in standard sizes, in 50mm even increments, with transition as
necessary to mating duct sections.
12.6 Dampers shall be suitable for operation within the temperature limit of -40°C to 93°C. Horizontal
dampers shall have a rated face velocity of 2 m/s at 1500 Pa static pressure differential.
12.7 Dampers used for shut off function shall be of the low leakage type, rated under UL 555 S as
leakage Class-1.
12.8 Damper blades shall have neoprene or PVC edging on all outside air dampers.
13.0 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
13.1 Backdraft dampers shall be low leakage with parallel blades and neoprene edge seals.
13.2 Dampers frames shall be constructed from galvanized sheet steel with Aluminium blades. Blade
stub shafts shall be stainless steel in nonferrous bearings. Sealing strips on blades shall be
polyester foam.
13.3 All blades shall be coupled at the blade centres and shall be in width of not more than 1000mm
with maximum blade size of 200mm.
13.4 Leakage shall not exceed 10 m³/hr per m² at 1000 Pa pressure differential.
13.5 Pressure relief dampers shall be multi-parallel blade with weighted arm closing assist. The frame
shall be anodized Aluminium channel sections with formed Aluminium blades. Maximum blade
length shall be 100 mm, and polyester foam seating strips shall be incorporated on blade edges.
Bearings shall be in PVC with non-corrodible shafts.

14.0 SPLITTER DAMPERS
14.1 In each low pressure system take off, splitter dampers shall be provided. The only justification for
not providing splitters is in a system which can be demonstrated to be sized by a static regain
programme and which is run in high pressure fittings.
14.2 Splitters shall consist of hollow blades in a vane rail assembly, made from galvanized steel by a
recognized manufacturer.
14.3 A lockable quadrant adjustment lever shall be located outside the insulation, and marked clearly
to show vane position.
15.0 FIRE DAMPERS
15.1 Provide, where required by ordinances or codes, fire dampers made to UL 555, and complete
with angle iron frame, 72 deg. C fusible link, pivot rods, and spring catches. Enlarge duct sections
around fire dampers, to allow 100% unrestricted duct area while in open position. Provide
approved type access doors, with airtight gaskets, for inspection and servicing of fire dampers.
Fire dampers shall be 1.5 hours rated as minimum and shall be labelled by manufacturer.
15.2 Provide fire dampers in all ducts over 125 sq.cm. in area, in the following locations, whether or
not specifically required by ordinances and codes:-
a Duct entering and leaving fire shafts (duct shafts).
b Ducts passing through designated fire walls.
c Ducts through floors, and not encased in fire shaft.
d Ducts leaving and entering plant area.
e Ducts entering and leaving storage areas.
15.3 Where fire dampers are located remote from fire partition, duct between fire damper and partition
shall be encased in double metal lathe and plaster or other fireproofing acceptable to Authorities
having jurisdiction.
15.4 Fire damper construction shall be of galvanized steel casing, galvanized steel blades, fitted with
catch plates, stainless steel closure springs and stainless steel seals. Blades shall be out of the
air stream. Fusible links shall be rated for a fusing temperature of 72 deg. C unless otherwise
specified.
15.5 Damper installation frame shall be supplied by the fire damper manufacturer and installation shall
be done as recommended by manufacturer.
15.6 Dampers shall be UL listed or approved by an equal certification authority.
16.0 SMOKE DAMPERS
16.1 Smoke dampers shall be the low leakage type, rated under UL 555 S as leakage Class I.
16.2 Frame shall be of formed channel of not less than 1.6mm galvanized steel. Blades shall be
2.3mm, air foil shaped, double skin construction, opposed blade type.
16.3 Blade edge seals shall be inflatable silicon coated fiberglass and jamb seal shall be flexible metal
compression type.
16.4 Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve type pressed into frame.

16.5 Damper actuators shall be factory furnished suitable for either 240 volt or 24 volt application.
Complete unit shall be factory tested in compliance with UL 555 S.
16.6 Damper and actuator shall be qualified under UL 555 S to an elevated temperature 120°C.
16.7 The damper unit shall be supplied with a two position indicator switch linked directly to the
damper to provide the capability of remotely indicating damper blade position.
16.8 Dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, 92A and 92B.
16.9 Dampers shall be AMCA licensed for air performance and shall bear the AMCA certified ratings
seal.
16.10 Damper installation frame shall be provided by the smoke damper manufacturer.
17.0 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
17.1 Class 1 rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S. Leakage rate not exceeding
0.23 m³/min (8 cfm) at 1 kPa (4 inch WG) pressure differential.
17.2 Closing rating in ducts up to (4-inch wg) 1-kPa static pressure class and minimum (2000-fpm) 10-
m/s velocity.
17.3 Fire Rating shall be 1½ hours.
17.4 Frame shall be multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, (16 gauge) 1.60mm thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
17.5 Blades shall be air foil shaped, double skin, single piece construction, 2 mm thick 150 mm wide
on 13mm (1/2 inch) dia plated steel axles.
17.6 Bearings shall be self-lubricating stainless steel sleeve turning in extruded hole in the frame.
17.7 Blade seals inflatable silicon fiberglass material to maintain smoke leakage rate upto minimum
177 deg C (350 deg F) mechanically attached to blade edge. Jamb seal, stainless steel, flexible
metal compression type.
17.8 UL classified dual temperature device allows the damper to be reopened after initial closure from
high heat. Electrically and mechanically locks damper in closed position when duct temperatures
exceed 74 deg C (165 deg F). Allow damper to be operable through a high limit temperature
sensor for smoke management purposes while temperature is below 121 deg C (250 deg F).
17.9 Smoke Detector shall be Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
17.10 Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
17.11 Mounting Sleeve shall be factory-installed, galvanized sheet steel; minimum 1.00 mm (20 gauge)
thick, minimum 450mm (18 inch) long.
17.12 Damper Motors shall be two-position action or modulating to match operation sequence.
18.0 SILENCERS
18.1 Silencers shall be installed when required to achieve the specified noise levels.
18.2 At shop drawing stage the contractor will undertake calculation for every unit and every area and
determine the insertion loss required to meet the stated noise criterion. Supply and return duct
noise must be considered as well as duct breakout noise.

18.3 Materials of construction shall be galvanised sheet metal and mineral fibre acoustic fill which is
inorganic, inert, moisture and vermin resistant. Silencers shall be so constructed as to prevent
erosion and pregnability of the acoustic fill.
18.4 Silencers shall be factory made, and shall have available certified test data concerning insertion
loss. This must be available when required, in advance of ordering units. Where a silencer is
made under licence, or part assembled locally, then tests must also be made after assembly and
witnessed by an Independent Authority.
18.5 The static pressure loss of any required silencer must be considered in air handling equipment
original selection.
18.6 Silencers for hospital and health care projects shall be Class M1 certified for cleanliness. These
silencers shall include openable casings and polyester absorbent.
19.0 VIBRATION ISOLATION (APPLICABLE FOR ALL SECTIONS)
19.1 All plant and equipment shall be isolated from the building structure in such a manner that noise
and vibration is not transmitted through the structure.
Anti-vibration equipment will be manufactured by a specialist company acceptable to the

Engineer, and with standard ratings information available.
Seismic restraints, designed by a specialist company, shall be provided to withstand the effects
of earthquake motions.
The following requirements are minimum requirements and must be confirmed by the specialist
manufacturer's representative as being adequate for the particular equipment proposed by the
Contractor.
19.2 Chillers
Chillers shall be supported on spring isolators with minimum 50mm deflection and an isolation
efficiency of 99 percent.
19.3 Pumps.
Water pumps are to have open type spring isolators with equal stiffness in horizontal and vertical
planes. They shall be supported on 10 mm thick ribbed neoprene Vibropad and will be colour
coded to aid identification.
They will also have level adjustment screws and be rated for 75% more than the anticipated
design load.
The spring shall be located between the housing pad and the concrete inertia base. The inertia
base for each pump will be designed to give a static deflection of 50 mm at rated design load
conditions, and shall be fully independent of any adjacent pad.
19.4 Air Handling Units / Condensing Units – Floor Mounted
Floor mounted air handling units shall be mounted on 25 mm neoprene pads.
19.5 Air Handling Units / Fans suspended.
These shall have box type spring isolation with level screws and neoprene snubbers. Spring will
be colour coded to aid identification.
Springs will be rated for 50% more than the design load and shall have a static deflection at this
design load of 25 mm.

19.6 Centrifugal fans, floor mounted.
Centrifugal fans shall have open type spring isolation with equal stiffness in horizontal and
vertical planes. They shall be supported on 10 mm thick neoprene Vibropad and will be colour
coded to aid identification.
They will have level adjusting screws, and will be rated at 50% more than the design load and
shall have a static deflection of 50 mm.
The springs will be located between the fan and the secondary support steel.
19.7 Axial fans, floor mounted.
Axial fans shall have open type spring isolation with equal stiffness in horizontal and vertical
planes. They shall be supported on 10 mm thick Vibropad, and will be colour coded to aid
identification. They will have level adjusting screws, and will be rated at 50% more than the
design load, and shall have a static deflection of 50 mm.
19.8 Fan Coil Units – Suspended
Suspension hangers shall incorporate a colour coded elastomer-in-shear insert with a load plate,
assembled into a stamped or welded hanger bracket.
19.9 Piping.
All piping connected to isolated equipment shall be supported with isolation hangers for at least
the first three points of support on all sides of the equipment.
The first point shall have a static deflection of 2 x the equipment deflection, except that the
deflection of this point shall not exceed 50 mm ( with pipe work full).
The second and third supports shall have deflections of 25 mm each.
For suspended piping, springs will be box type spring hangers with snubber, level adjustments,
and colour coding.
For low level piping mounted on roller systems, the isolators will be open type springs with equal
stiffness in horizontal and vertical planes.
19.10 In addition, Flexible connection shall be included at inlet and outlet to all items of equipment.
Flexible connections will be of full line size and will be flanged with gaskets and mating flanges.
Flexible connections to fan coil units shall be braided stainless steel hoses with threaded ends.
For other equipment, connectors shall be twin sphere manufactured with multiple plys of nylon
tire cord fabric and neoprene in hydraulic rubber presses and vulcanized.
19.11 Ductwork.
All ductwork connections to vibrating equipment shall be through flexible connections as

described elsewhere in this section.

20.0 DUCT DRAINS AND DRIP PANS.
20.1 Provide drip pans under cooling coils mounted in ducts in built up plenums.
Drip pan shall be constructed of not less than 1.2mm thick steel (18g) hot dip galvanized after
fabrication, with all joints welded or soldered. Sides of pans shall be not less than 100 mm
upstream and 300 mm downstream of coil.
Pan width shall extend 50 mm outside coil headers and/or return bends to collect any
condensation released from these surfaces.
Pan shall be equipped with one or more 25 mm dia drain which must be run to drainage system
as indicated by the Engineer.
20.2 Drain pans for fan coil units shall be factory manufactured and supplied with the fan coil unit.
Drain pan must be factory insulated on the sides in addition to on the bottom, with at least 20 mm
rigid insulation.
20.3 Drain lines will have traps and falls as specified in the plumbing section.
21.0 DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS
21.1 Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be arranged for flush mounting in lay-in type ceilings and over
lap mounting in plaster, mineral tile and similar ceilings, with concealed fixings unless otherwise
directed.
21.2 Grilles, register and diffuser locations shall be adjusted to suit reflected ceiling drawings, or
Engineer’s site instructions. All grilles, registers, diffusers, louvres shall be from one
manufacturer.
21.3 Provide plaster frame for grilles, and diffusers installed in plaster ceilings.
21.4 All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be supplied completely factory powder coated. Finish
colour shall be to the approval of the Architect. The interior of all grilles and diffusers is to be
factory painted matt black.
21.5 All supply grilles and diffusers will have opposed blade balancing dampers. All will have foam
rubber sealing band around the edge to seal to the structure. All pivots will be round section, not
of formed sheet, and not relying on a spring steel locking wire.
21.6 Unless otherwise specified basic grilles and diffuser materials shall be Aluminium extruded
sections. Sections in the air-stream shall be carefully selected to minimize turbulence.
21.7 All grilles and diffusers supplied on this project shall be tested and rated in accordance with
ASHRAE Standard 70, ADC Test Code 1062-GRD and ISO 3741.
21.8 Linear bar grilles shall be fabricated from aluminium, with 6.4mm wide bars on 12.5mm centres
pressed into a notched steel retaining bar. The core can be either welded into the cuter frame,
or, where the grille is used in a sill application, held in the outer frame by spring clips fixed to the
core retaining bar.
The outer frame shall be 35mm deep and shall have a visible flange 25.4 mm wide. Mitered end
caps shall be welded to give a near invisible joint.
The grill shall be complete with an opposed blade damper painted matt black, and shall be fixed
with universal mounting brackets. Both the damper and the fixing brackets shall be accessible
through the face of the grille.

Continuous grilles shall be provided with positive alignment strips, which fit into special keyways
extruded into the frame of the grille to ensure clean unbroken lines.
21.9 Ceiling Diffusers shall be multicone giving 4 way horizontal discharge.
The three centre cones of the diffuser shall be manufactured from pressed aluminium, with the
remaining cones and the outer frame fabricated from extruded aluminium welded at the corners
to give near invisible joints.
One, two, and three way pattern cores shall be used as applicable. All cores shall be
interchangeable.
The core shall be removable without the use of special tools, but for safety, shall be fixed to the
outer frame by a small length of chain.
The diffuser shall be complete with an opposed blade damper painted matt black.
21.10 Wall registers shall be double deflection fabricated from aluminium, the front vanes being
horizontal, the rear vanes vertical. This grille shall be complete with an opposed blade damper
painted matt black and adjustable from the face of the diffuser.
Both sets of vanes shall be fully adjustable without the use of special tools.
21.11 Eggcrate return or extract grille shall be provided with a steel lattice core of 12.7mm x 12.7mm
openings, giving a free area of 90%.
The core shall be fixed into an extruded aluminium frame, with welded corners and a 25mm face
flange.
The grille is complete with an opposed blade damper painted matt black and adjustable through
the face of the diffuser.
21.12 Circular ceiling diffuser shall be of aluminium construction with two concentric inner spinnings.
The diffuser core shall be fully adjustable for vertical or horizontal air discharge, and shall be
removable without the use of special tools.
An iris damper shall be provided in the neck of the diffuser which is adjustable from the diffuser
face.
21.13 Vision proof door transfer grilles shall consist of a steel core with inverted-vee type blades, and
an extruded aluminium frame with matching rear flange.
The frame shall be adjustable from 28mm to 60mm to suit the door width.
Transfer grilles for 'LIGHT TIGHT' applications such as dark rooms shall be with two vision proof
cores back to back.
Transfer grilles on fire rated doors shall include a block of intumescent material as a fire stop.
21.14 Linear Slot diffusers shall provide an unobtrusive continuous air diffusion with a pleasing
aesthetic appearance. Hairline butt joints shall ensure clean unbroken linear runs for active and
dummy sections.
The diffusers shall be complete with pattern control blades, fully adjustable from face of diffuser
through 180 degrees and shall be fitted with end caps at each end.
The diffuser members shall be constructed from high quality aluminium extrusions while the
pattern control blades shall be of black rigid PVC or aluminium extrusions.

21.15 Exhaust valves shall be manufactured from high quality sheet steel spinnings protected by a
stove enamelled or powder coated paint finish. Flanges shall be fitted with sealing gaskets.
The valves shall be installed with the aid of a mounting ring and air flow adjusted by rotating the
central disc. Finish of valves shall be to Architect's choice.
21.16 Circular swirl diffuser shall be with adjustable blades complete with outer discharge nozzle,
suitable for vertical air discharge controlled by blade position. Suitable for mounting heights of 
3.80M and variations in supply temperature differentials between – 10 K to + 15K. Comprising of
diffuser face with rotating blades adjustable manually with top or side entry plenum box.
Diffuser face shall be in galvanized sheet, outer discharge nozzle in aluminium. The face of the
diffuser, discharge nozzle and connecting section shall be phosphate treated and stove enamel
finish in a colour to Architect approval using electro-dipcoat process, resistant to saturated
environment for a minimum of 100 hours without deterioration. The plenum box shall be in
galvanized sheet steel.
21.17 Jet nozzles shall be suitable for long throw distances while handling high volume rates and with
optimum acoustic properties. Assembly shall consist of one or more aerodynamically shaped
discharge nozzles with spherical outlet mounted in a housing with a mounting flange. The
discharge nozzle and face cover ring shall be aluminium constructed. Jet nozzle assembly shall
be connected to ductwork through a plenum box. The entire assembly shall be pretreated and
powder coated in a colour to Architect’s choice.
22.0 EXTRACT AIR LOUVRES
22.1 Louvres shall be extruded Aluminium frame with Aluminium blades of not less than 2 mm
thickness, and shall be firmly fixed so as not to vibrate. Unsupported blade width shall not exceed
1800 mm
22.2 Behind each louvre shall be an insect mesh screen 6 x 6 mm made from 2 mm diameter wire.
The screen will be clamped by a 20 mm frame and will be firmly fixed to the outer edges of the
louvre. The screen and frame shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
22.3 The connection to the louvre shall be flexible and shall ensure no duct load is transmitted to the
louvre.
22.4 Louvres shall be provided with powder coated finish to the approval of the Architect.
23.0 SAND TRAP LOUVRE FOR AIR INTAKE
23.1 Sand trap louvres shall have a double deflection inlet passage to separate sand from incoming
air by means of centrifugal forces.
23.2 Separation efficiency particle size 350-700 micron shall not be less than 90% at a face velocity of
1M/Sec and not less than 70% at a face velocity of 2M/sec.
23.3 Sand trap louvre shall be of aluminium construction, self cleaning and maintenance free. The
base of the louvre shall have self-emptying sand holes.
23.4 Pressure drop at 2 M/Sec average face velocity shall not exceed 120 pascals.
23.5 Insect mesh and cleanable panel filter shall be included.
23.6 Sand louvres shall be provided with powder coated finish to the approval of the Architect.

24.0 SUBMISSIONS
24.1 Technical Submissions
For any minor revisions in architectural layouts, contractor shall be responsible to carry out part
redesign for such area and submit necessary calculations for Engineer's approval before
proceeding with the shop drawings.
24.2 The Contractor will prepare full shop drawings, including sections, of distribution systems and
equipment.
24.3 Hardware Submissions.
The Contractor will submit catalogue information for all distribution equipment including, but not
limited to:
a Duct work.
b Flexible duct work
c Flexible connections.
d Access panels.
e Balancing dampers.
f Motorized dampers.
g Backdraft dampers.
h Splitter dampers.
i Turning vanes.
j Fire dampers.
k Silencers.
l Vibration isolators.
m Diffusers, grilles and registers.
n Louvres, sand louvres.
o Smoke dampers
p Combination smoke and fire damper
q Variable and constant volume terminal units.
24.4 The Contractor will submit samples for any or all of the above as requested by the Engineer after
receipt of the catalogues.
24.5 Samples will definitely be required of those items which are exposed, such as diffusers, grilles,
louvres. The samples must be of size, specification and finish to be relevant to the project.
24.6 Where a Country of Origin is given, this refers to the Head Office in the case of International
Corporations. However, for each product not manufactured in that Country, separate approval
must be obtained from the Engineer.
End of Section

PART A - SECTION 5
AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION EQUIPMENT
Revision History

PART A - SECTION 5
AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION EQUIPMENT
INDEX
1.0 DESIGN PARAMETERS .................................................................................................................... 3

2.0 PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS .................................................................................... 6
3.0 AIR HANDLING UNITS ...................................................................................................................... 8
4.0 FAN COIL UNITS.............................................................................................................................. 13
5.0 ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES ..................................................................................................... 14
6.0 AIR FILTERS .................................................................................................................................... 16
7.0 HYDRONIC PUMPS ......................................................................................................................... 18
8.0 VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS ............................................................................................................. 19
9.0 PRESSURIZATION UNIT ................................................................................................................. 20
10.0 ELECTRIC MOTORS........................................................................................................................ 21
11.0 MOTOR STARTERS, CONTROLS SWITCHGEAR ........................................................................ 22
12.0 PANEL BOARDS AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE. .................................................................. 22
13.0 FANS CENTRIFUGAL. ..................................................................................................................... 23
14.0 FANS, AXIAL. ................................................................................................................................... 24
15.0 PARTICULAR FANS ........................................................................................................................ 25
16.0 CLOSE TOLERANCE UNITS ........................................................................................................... 29
17.0 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... 33
18.0 SMOKE CONTROL STATION .........................................................................................................33
19.0 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION SYSTEM ................................................................................ 34
20.0 SUBMISSIONS. ................................................................................................................................ 34

Air Conditioning and Ventilation Equipment
1.0 DESIGN PARAMETERS
Design, in general, will be based on ASHRAE recommendation.
1.1 Design Conditions
a Summer
1 External : 46 Deg.C DB, 26 Deg.C WB
2 Internal : 24 ± 1 Deg. C DB, 50 ± 10% RH.
b Winter heating is not proposed. However, fresh air handling unit shall be provided with
heating coil.
(Humidity uncontrolled and hence resultant humidity is a function of the set point temperature).
1.2 Occupancy, Ventilation and Lighting loads to be used in cooling load calculations are as follows:
Minimum
Lighting Equipment load
Area Outside Air Occupancy
(W/m2) (W/m²)
Qty (L/s)
Bedroom * 2 12 5
Apartment Kitchen 1 12 350 watt
Apartment Living / * (2 x No. of bed 20 10
Dining Area rooms) + 2
Main Entrance 0.3 L/s. m2 20 m2 /person 25 -
Lobby
Corridors 0.3 L/s. m2 10 m2 /person 25 20
Service Rooms - - 12 As per equipment
heat dissipation
For other areas refer to ASHRAE standard 62.1 – 2013.
* Air quantity to achieve air balance.
Extract Air System

Area Extract Air
a. Guest toilet 15 L/s
b. Bathroom 25 L/s
c. Apartment Kitchen 50 L/s
d. Laundry 10 L/s
e. Basement car parking 10 air changes / hr (smoke extract) and
6 air changes / hr (high CO level).
3 air changes/hr (low CO level)
1.3 Noise Levels Range
a. Bedroom .................................................................................... NC 30-35
b. Living and dining ........................................................................ NC 30-35

c. Corridors and lobby.................................................................... NC 35-40
d. Service / Plant rooms ................................................................. NC 40-45
1.4 Solar Load
Solar loads to be based on maximum instantaneous values in appropriate direction for consideration
of the worst exposure calculations, and to be based on worst cumulative block load.
1.5 Air Filtration
For FAHU (Based on ASHRAE 52 – 76)
a. Primary filters (Flat Panel) ........................................................ 85%
b. Secondary filters (Bag) ....................................................................95%
c. Fan coil units (indoor AC units) shall be provided with cleanable aluminium filter.
1.6 Duct Work
Ductwork shall be designed on equal friction method.
For fan coil units:
Supply/return air ducts : Maximum velocity – 4.50 m/s. (900 FPM)
0.05 inch
Maximum pressure drop 0.40 Pa/m  100 ft 
 
For central extract fans / : Maximum velocity – 9.10 m/s (1800 FPM)
fresh air units
0.10 inch
: Maximum pressure drop 0.80 Pa/m  100 ft 
 
For smoke extract fans : Maximum velocity – 11.2 m/s (2200 FPM)
0.15 inch
Maximum pressure drop 1.20 Pa/m  100 ft 
 
The above limits may be exceeded in areas where space restrictions exist.
1.7 FAHU / FCU coil face velocity : Air velocity not to exceed 2.5 m/s.
1.8 Pressure Philosophy
Fresh air requirement to each zone will be generally determined by the level of dirty extract to that
same zone, or to a value as required for the levels of occupancy in each zone.
Areas requiring no dirty extract will be pressurized by returning approximately 10% less air than that
supplied.
Areas requiring dirty extract will be maintained under negative pressure by extracting volumes at
110% of the supply volume.
Corridors will be pressurized positive with respect to other areas
The building shall be kept under positive pressure to prevent hot or cold air infiltration.

1.9 Fire Philosophy and Smoke Management
Fire dampers will be positioned in all ductwork crossing fire walls. Fire dampers will be included in
supply, return and extract ductwork at each fire zone crossing. They will be triggered from a fusible
link connection sited in the damper.
Smoke / Heat detectors shall be positioned in all areas. A fire condition sensed by the detectors will
shut off the relevant FAHU through the fire annunciator panel and activate the smoke extract fan and
staircase/lift well pressurization fans.
 Makeup air shall be provided using pressurization fan located on roof for fire fighting lobbies
and smoke stop lobbies and.
All staircases and lift wells shall be pressurized via dedicated supply fan to keep staircases and lift
well under positive pressure in case of fire. Dedicated shaft shall be provided for each staircase for
pressurization air. Fan shall be provided with variable frequency drive to prevent overpressure
inside staircase.
1.10 System Description
1.10.1 The air conditioning installation shall be provided with chilled water from the district cooling
provider.
The chilled water will be supplied upto the energy transfer station (ETS) room by district cooling
provider.
Secondary chilled water pumps with variable speed drives will circulate water through the
secondary circuit. The speed of the pumps being varied depending upon the cooling load.
Secondary chilled water pumps will be located in separate pump room adjacent to ETS room at
basement level.
The chilled water system shall be single zone with no intermediate heat exchangers.
Chilled water temperatures (shall be confirmed by District Cooling Provider):
Chilled water Chilled water

inlet temperature outlet temperature
 Primary circuit (district cooling provider) 5 °C 14 °C
 Secondary circuit 6.5 °C 15.5 °C
 Chilled water pipe sizing for pipes upto 50mm φ Water velocity not to exceed 1.22
m/s. Pressure drop not to exceed
600 Pa/m.
 For pipe above 50mm φ and upto 200 mm φ Pressure drop not to exceed 400
Pa/m, velocity not to excedd 2.4
m/s.
 For pipes above 200mm φ Maximum velocity 3.0 m/s
 Coil connection pipes to be sized for full flow rate of respective coil.
1.10.2 Apartments and common areas will be air conditioned by fan coil units installed within the false
ceiling void.

1.10.3 The capacity of AC units shall be based on calculations.
1.10.4 Each indoor AC unit shall be provided with thermostat for the control of space temperature.
Fan coil units shall serve each of the residential areas through a network of insulated ducting.
Fresh air for ventilation shall be through Fresh Air AHUs located on the roof (to be coordinated
with Architect) level. Extract air shall be taken from all toilets and kitchens via separate extract
air ducts and connected back to the heat recovery section (Kitchen extract ducts shall be
connected to heat recovery section via electrostatic precipitator) of the FAHU to precool the
intake fresh air for maximum energy saving. Heat pipe section shall be provided in the FAHU to
precool the outside air further and reheat the off-coil supply air.
1.11 System zoning
The air conditioning of each area is proposed as follows:
a. Main corridors / lift lobbies, stores shall have dedicated FCU’s.
b. Staircase shall be cooled from the main corridor fan coil units to avoid fungus growth on
walls due to humidity build up. Motorized dampers shall be provided at supply / return
branches to close in case of fire.
c. Service rooms, mechanical / electrical rooms shall be air conditioned via dedicated
FCU’s.
d. 1 Bedroom Apartment
 One fan coil unit for bedroom
 One for coil unit for living room and kitchen.
 Additional units are added for exposed kitchen.
e. Two bedroom apartment:
 One unit for each bedroom
 One unit for living and kitchen
f. Duplex Apartment
 Based on the architectural layout of each apartment.
1.12 Btu meter:
Each apartment shall have Btu meter for chilled water system and to be connected with billing
system for billing purpose. The BTU meter shall be installed within the ceiling void in front of
each apartment unit and provided with access.
2.0 PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS
2.1 Design Requirements
a. Type: Counter current and parallel flow only
b. Design pressure / temperature: 16 bar / 100 deg. Celsius (minimum), unless otherwise
noted on the Heat Exchanger Schedule.

c. The Heat Exchanger shall be tested to at least at 1.3 times the working pressure at
design conditions without buckling or deformation of the heat transfer plates. The
pressure test shall be a differential pressure test where first the primary side is isolated
and open to the atmosphere while the secondary side is tested at the rated test pressure
and vice versa. Units shall confirm to PED Pressure Vessel Code.
d. Provide metal name plate with the following details;
1. Manufacturers’ name
2. Type of unit
3. Serial no.
4. Year of Manufacture
5. Fluid group
6. Inlet / Outlet connections
7. Volume
8. Design Pressure
9. Design Temperature
10. Test Pressure
11. Test Pressure Date
e. Units to be designed to prevent fluid intermixing and provide leakage to the outside of the
unit.
f. Units shall be sized with allowance for 15% expansion of capacity by adding additional
plates.
g. The supplier to confirm presence of manufacturers’ factory trained and qualified service
engineer to assist in installation and carry out commissioning at site.
2.2 Materials
a. Plates: One piece pressed type AISI 316 stainless steel plate with 2B finish and tapered
gasket groove 0.5mm minimum thickness. Higher thickness to be applied based on final
pressure rating.
b. The plates shall not have holes for sealing of gaskets
c. Plate height not to exceed 2.3m for a pressing depth of 2.5mm
d. Each plate to have herringbone corrugations to optimize heat transfer with nominal
pressure losses
e. Design of each plate should be such that it does not lock or support to the adjacent plate
f. Design to allow for the removal and replacement of single plate without removal of the
plate on either side
g. Gasket: One piece molded Nitrile Butyl Rubber (NBR) Clip / Clip-AD / Tape-on gasket.

h. Gaskets shall have relieving grooves to prevent intermixing of fluids and cause leak to the
outside of the units.
i. The gaskets shall be locked into the groove by Clip / Clip-AD / Tape ON method.
j. The gaskets should not be used for locking of plates before tightening.
k. Frame: The frame assembly shall be bolted construction and not welded frame assemble.
It shall be of Carbon-Steel construction coated with 2-part blue paint.
l. The moveable cover shall have only stainless steel material roller for ease of movement
without additional rigging or handling equipment
m. Lifting lugs shall be provided for lifting the units entire flooded weight.
n. Bolts shall be provided with rolled threads to reduce galling and minimum high width
hexagonal nuts to adequately distribute the load. Critical bolts to strictly have ball bearing
boxes
o. Provide plastic covers over threaded rod extension for protection of threads.
p. Connections to have studded port design.
q. The minimum thickness of the frame and pressure plates shall be as under:
Minimum thickness of frame and pressure plate

Port Diameter (mm) Frame Plate (mm) Pressure plate (mm)
Design Pressure: upto 16 bar
< 210mm 80mm 65mm
Design Pressure: above 16 bar
> 210mm 100mm 85mm
r. Provide insulated galvanized drainable drip trays beneath each chilled water heat
exchanger.
s. Factory fabricated removable and reusable insulation cover for each heat exchanger shall
be provided. The insulation cover shall be designed for easy removal and replacement to
facilitate cleaning, inspection and maintenance of plates. Stainless steel suitcase-type
latches shall facilitate assembly and disassembly of the insulation pieces.
t. The insulation panel shall be 1mm Allustucco 3s 3/4h exterior plating, 60mm
polyurethane foam insulation, 0.05m Aluminum foil inside layer and 20mm Armaflex lining
at the bolt holes.
3.0 AIR HANDLING UNITS
3.1 General
Supply and install all AHUs with capacities as shown in the schedule of equipment and on
drawings. The space available for the unit shall be confirmed with the civil and architectural
proposals and sizes of units shall be selected to fit into the spaces available.

3.2 Quality Assurance
The equipment manufacturer shall strictly adhere to following standards and specification:
a. ISO 9001 certificate required.
b. Equipment shall be Eurovent certified. Eurovent certificates issued for equipment

manufactured at parent factories shall not accepted. Only those certificates for the AHU
manufactured at the source from which they are procured, shall be accepted
c. Air Handling Unit manufacturer shall strictly adhere to CEN standards (Committee
European de Normalisation). Air handling units shall meet the EUROVENT
CERTIFICATION requirements as per EN 1886 as mentioned below:
1. Casing strength to .............................................. CLASS D1 (M)
2. Casing air leakage minus 400 Pa to .................. CLASS L1 (M)
3. Casing air leakage plus 700 Pa to ...................... CLASS L1 (M)
4. Thermal transmittance ........................................ CLASS T2.
5. Thermal bridge factor ......................................... CLASS TB2
6. Filter frame leakage ............................................ Class F8
3.3 Unit Construction
3.3.1 The unit casings shall be of double skinned panels. Casing shall be assembled with self
supporting modular panel elements with an integrated base frame made of zincated steel and
sections along upper sides of the units.
3.3.2 Sheet metal thickness for all units with fibre glass insulation shall be not less than
1.5 mm for the inner skin and 0.8mm for the outer skin and shall be made from galvanized steel
sheets or anodized aluminium alloy construction. The outside of the outer skin shall be plastic
coated to a thickness of 0.15mm for additional protection. Inside and outside of panel walls shall
be completely smooth. The overall heat thermal transmittance (Heat Transfer Coefficient) shall
not exceed k=0.59 W/m²k.
The units with polyurethane injected foam insulation, the inner and outer panel thickness shall not
be less than 1.0mm. The outside of the outer skin shall be finished with a 50 micron thick coat of
polyester based powder for additional protection.
3.3.3 All casing panels shall be insulated with glass fiber layer of 50mm thick or pressure injected foam
insulation.
3.3.4 The base frame of the units shall be made from sendzimir galvanized sheet metal for size with
largest dimensions upto 2500 mm, and hot dip galvanized U-profile for larger units. Service
doors shall be provided with special gasket and locking device. Access doors 400mm and larger
shall be provided with hinges and handles for external and internal opening.
3.3.5 Access doors with width smaller than 400mm shall be removable type fitted with quick release
flap turn lock with spring pressure arrangement. Sealant between panels shall be an anti
fungicide sealant material.
3.3.6 All air handling units installed outdoors shall be fitted with aluminum weather canopy.

3.3.7 The AHU manufacturer shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the exterior of
panels. In the event that any condensation problems appear after installation, the contractor
shall undertake all remedial measures to rectify and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any
stacked or double height coils shall have separate drain pans to reduce carry over.
3.3.8 Acoustical insulation through the panel:
HZ MID FREQUENCY OCTAVE BAND

125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
1 11 13 14 21 35 42
3.4 Vibration Isolation
The Air Handling Unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan, motor and
drive assembly on spring isolators. The fan discharge shall be connected to the air handling unit
casing through canvas connection to prevent vibration transfer. In addition to the above the
entire unit shall be mounted on additional vibration isolators.
3.5 Filter Section
3.5.1 Filter cells shall be of standard sizes and shall be obtained from reputed European manufacturer.
The filters shall be sealed against the filter frame using a permanently elastic gasket to a
standard compatible with the filter efficiency.
3.5.2 Pressure drop tapings shall be fitted to allow manometer or filter monitor to be connected. Filter
materials shall be flame-retardant, incombustible, non-odorous and offer no sustenance to
vermin. Each filter section has to be provided with manometer or other pressure measurement
device/component.
3.6 Cooling Coil Section
3.6.1 Water coils shall be fabricated from heavy gauge copper tubing expanded into Aluminum fins.
Return bends shall be die formed. Headers shall be heavy section seamless copper tubing with
connections made in steel pipe with anti corrosion protection paint and with external screw
thread. All joints shall be silver brazed. Fittings shall include plugged vent and drain taps for
each section.
3.6.2 Direct expansion coils of capacities as indicated on schedules shall have aluminium fins. Coils
shall be provided with brass distributors with solder type connections and shall have a minimum
of two distributors. Coils shall have full face active with intertwined circuit. Suction and discharge
connections shall be at the same end. After testing, coils shall be dehydrated and charged with
dry air.
3.6.3 The coil shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with ASHRAE / ANSI 15 code to 21 bar and
designed to operate at 16 bar NP. Maximum coil face velocity shall not exceed 2.5m/s. Droplet
moisture eliminators shall be fitted to all cooling coils, if the coil face velocity exceeds 2.5 m/s.
3.6.4 The coil shall be mounted on guide rails for side withdrawal. Header connection through the unit
casing shall be sealed with plastic grommet.
3.6.5 Drain pans shall be stainless steel grade SS - 304 either integrated in the insulated base or
placed under the coil within the coil section. Drain pans shall have drain connection to the
service side.

3.7 Fan and Fan Motor
3.7.1 Fans shall be double inlet, double width, forward curved centrifugal type for upto 700 Pa total
static pressure and backward curved non overloading type for above 700 Pa total static pressure,
with galvanized steel casings and fan scroll. Fans shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 300
and 301. and shall conform to DIN323, VDI2060 and ISO 1940/L. Every individual fan shall be
run before delivery to check bearing condition and vibration. Fan shafts shall be mounted in
taper sleeve bearings designed for continuous operation and a mean useful life of 200,000 hours.
Backward curved impeller should be coated with 60 micron epoxy painting of high quality.
3.7.2 The fan shall be connected to the outlet opening by means of an airtight flexible connection.
Fans shall not exceed a maximum outlet velocity of 12.50m/sec.
3.7.3 The degree of protection shall be IP55 with mounting method B3 and Class F insulation.
3.7.4 Fan bearing shall be re-lubricated type with extended lube lines to terminate outside the fan
section. The bearing shall be selected for life of 200,000 Hours operation. Fan drive shall be
rated at 150% of the maximum motor power of the units and shall be fitted with adjustable belt
tension arrangement.
3.7.5 Belt guards or screen protection door in fan section shall be provided in accordance with CEN
Standard.
3.7.6 The fan motor shall be suitable for operating 380V, 3Ph, 50Hz electrical power supply. The fan
motor shall be wired to the safety isolation switch or connection box. Motor shall be TEFC with
minimum performance rating of IE1 class according to IEC standards. Motor shall have thermal
reserve for overheating in case of voltage fluctuation in compliance with IEC 34-1 standard.
3.7.7 The contractor shall select power input and speed of the fan subsequent to ascertaining system
static pressure in accordance with pressure drop calculations to the approval of the Engineer.
3.7.8 The fan shall meet the safety requirements of the CE.
3.7.9 The motor shall be mounted on a common, torsionally rigid, galvanized steel base frame with
motor mounted on slide rails for adjustment of belt tension.
3.7.10 The fan and motor assembly shall be isolated from the casing by means of spring anti vibration
mountings selected to suit the speed of the fan and designed for 90% isolation.
3.8 Electric Heating Coil (Where Applicable)
Electric heating coils shall be heavy construction of 304L stainless steel with absolute safety
finned tubes. Maximum specific power shall be 4 watts/cm2. The heaters shall be thyristor
controlled.
Heater battery shall be supplied with manual reset over heat thermostat, prewired to terminal
strip and shall have thyristor control.
3.9 Special Construction
3.9.1 Out Door Version
3.9.1.1 All specifications in this section for indoor units shall be applicable for outdoor version in addition
to the following:
a. The outdoor air handling units shall be specifically designed for outdoor installation.
Indoor air handlers weatherized for outdoor use shall not accepted.
b. The outdoor unit’s outer joint shall be sealed with permanently flexible sealing compound.

c. A full size sloping roof with drip nose shall be provided which shall be both longer and
wider than the unit and painted in optional colour.
d. All outdoor units shall be constructed and delivered on a base fabricated from heavy duty
structure galvanized steel channel painted in optional colour. The minimum acceptable
height for the base frame is 150mm.
3.9.2 Air Handling Units – Hygienic Type
All specification in this section for indoor units shall be applicable for hygienic version in addition
to the following:
a. All hygienic AHU shall be selected to satisfy the best hygienic standard requirement for
equipment. Units must have hygiene certificate to the following standards:
1. VDI 6022 (Germany)
2. VDI 3803 (Germany)
3. ÖNORM H 6021 (Austria)
4. SWKI VA 104-01 (Switzerland)
5. DIN EN 13779 (Europe)
6. DIN 1946 Teil 4 (Germany)
7. SWKI 99-3 (Switzerland)
8. ÖNORM H 6020 (Austria)
9. TÜV certification.
b. AHU components shall be capable of being easily removed through large access doors.
Doors shall have special rubber gasket and aluminium handles with position indicator.
Doors shall open over the whole length of the section, in order to allow the free flow of
disinfectant into the external drain. (All sections shall be provided with such door).
c. The components inside the units shall be easily and safely accessible and removable by
one person. Access to all sections utilizing simple manually operated hinged doors fitted
with quick release bolting lock, except for coil section with side connection removable
panel with Bakelite knobs and lifting handles will be used. This arrangement will facilitate
the removal of all internal parts such as filters with pressure seals, heating coils, cooling
coils, moisture eliminator and splitters from silencer section, complete fan assembly etc.
d. The fan shall be flush mounted utilizing special rubber connector to simplify removal of
complete motor and fan assembly for purpose of cleansing of unit. The fan and motor
shall be located on stainless steel assembly which can be slid out over stainless steel
rails.
e. Outside drain in the form of channel running the whole length of the unit shall be provided
to remove liquids used for disinfecting the unit.
f. All internal surfaces of the air handling units shall be smooth. The units shall be double
skin construction with the inner skin of stainless steel Grade SS - 316. Also all internal
blanking plates, filter frames etc. shall be made in stainless steel Grade SS - 316.
g. Fan sections, humidifier sections, filter sections shall be fitted with inspection ports and
internal lighting wired to external isolating switch.

h. Coils shall be mounted on guide rails for side removal. Header connection shall be on
side with screwed flanges outside the units and easily removable side panels.
Coils shall be made with smaller face area than standard coil for facilitating removal and
cleaning of coil section.
i. No material shall be used that encourages the growth of bacteria and fungi in the
presence of moisture.
j. Extended lube line for fan bearing will not be fitted.
4.0 FAN COIL UNITS.
4.1 Units shall be complete with chilled water coil(s), fan(s), motor(s), drain pan, and all required
wiring, piping, controls and special features.
4.2 Horizontal Base Unit with Plenum for concealed installation shall have a factory installed,
galvanized steel plenum section and throw away filter. The plenum shall be either bottom or rear
return, lined with 12mm thick glass fiber insulation and include a removable panel to provide an
access to the fan/motor assembly.
4.3 Horizontal cabinet unit for exposed installation shall be constructed of galvanized steel with
baked enamel finish. Cabinet shall be lined with 12mm thick glass fibre insulation or PU
insulation and have removable bottom access panel. Unit shall include hinged bar type return air
grille on rear of unit with throwaway filter and integral double deflection supply grille.
4.4 Fans shall be direct driven, double width fan wheels shall have forward curved blades, and be
statically and dynamically balanced.
4.5 Fan motors shall be 3 speed permanent split capacitor type, Class ‘B’ insulation with sleeve type
bearings and oversized oil reservoirs to ensure lubrication. The fan motors shall be equipped
with integral automatic temperature reset for motor protection.
4.6 Standard base unit shall be equipped with a 4 row coil for installation in a 2 pipe system. Coils
shall have 9.5mm or 12mm dia copper tubes depending upon manufacturer’s standard,
aluminium fins bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion and have a working pressure of 16
bar. Each coil shall have a manual air vent and sweat connections for copper tubes.
4.7 The drain pan shall be constructed of galvanized steel extending the entire length and width of
the coil(s) and pitched for drainage. The inside surface of the drain pan shall be coated with
closed cell fire retardant foam insulation and the outside surface shall be insulated with PE
insulation. An extension drain pan shall be provided for installation at the job site under the valve
package.
4.8 Electric Heaters (where applicable)
Where indicated on schedules unit shall be equipped with electric resistance strip heaters
mounted on the entering air side of the cooling coil.
Heater shall include automatic reset high limit cutout, contactors, factory furnished junction box
and fuse to protect the motor.
Heaters shall be single stage single phase, for 50 Hz applications. Capacity shall be as shown
on the equipment schedule.
Control circuit for single power source connection shall be provided for motors and heaters.

4.9 Unit manufacturers shall have ISO 9001 certification.
Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA-90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation. All equipment wiring shall comply with NEC requirements.
4.10 Unit capacity ratings shall be certified in compliance with industry Standard 441-66 for
equipment, testing, and rating of fan coil air conditioners as administered at A.R.I. Entire unit
shall be Underwriter's Laboratory listed and comply with National Electric code. When units do
not have A.R.I certified ratings, the contractor shall perform capacity tests of the completed
installation, which are witnessed by the Engineer, to confirm specified capacity is achieved while
not exceeding specified sound power levels.
4.11 Units shall be provided with throw away filters for commissioning only. These shall be replaced
by 21mm thick aluminium washable filters with 70 percent gravimetric efficiency as per EN 779,
after testing and commissioning.
5.0 ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES
5.1.1 Energy Recovery Wheels
The rotor media shall be made of aluminium, coated to prohibit corrosion. All media surfaces
shall be coated with a non-migrating solid adsorbent layer prior to being formed into the
honeycomb media structure to ensure that all surfaces are coated and that adequate latent
capacity is provided. The media shall have a flame spread of less than 25 and a smoke
developed of less than 50 when rated in accordance with ASTM E87. In addition to the desiccant
coating that is applied to the surfaces of the aluminium substrate, the two faces of the total
energy recovery wheel shall be covered and sealed with a two-part polymer heavy duty coating
specifically chosen for chemical resistance.
The desiccant shall be inorganic and specifically developed for the selective adsorption of water
vapour. The desiccant shall utilize a 3A molecular sieve certified by the manufacturer to have an
internal pore diameter distribution which limits adsorption to materials not larger than the critical
diameter of a water molecule (2.8 angstroms).
Enthalpy wheels shall be certified by a qualified independent organization documenting equal

sensible and latent recovery efficiencies conducted in accordance with ASHRAE standard 84 and
the results presented in accordance with ARI 1060 standards.
An independent wheel test from a credible test laboratory shall document that the desiccant
material utilized does not transfer pollutants typically encountered in the indoor air environment.
The cross-contamination and performance certification reports shall be provided to the Engineer
for review.
5.1.2 The media shall be cleanable with low-pressure steam, hot water or light detergent, without
degrading the latent recovery. Dry particles upto to 800 microns shall pass freely through the
media.
5.1.3 The unit shall be provided with a factory set, field adjustable purge sector designed to limit cross
contamination to less than 0.04 percent of that of the exhaust air stream concentration when
operated under appropriate conditions.
5.1.4 The rotor shall be supplied with labyrinth seals only, which at no time shall make contact with any
rotating surface of the exchanger rotor face. These multi-pass seals shall utilize four labyrinth
stages for optimum performance.
5.1.5 The rotor media shall be provided in segmented fashion to allow for field erection or replacement
of one section at a time without requiring side access. The media shall be rigidly held in place by
a structural spoke system made of extruded aluminium.

5.1.6 The rotor housing shall be a structural framework, which limits the deflection of the rotor due to
air pressure loss to less than 0.8mm. The housing shall be made of galvanized steel to prevent
corrosion. The rotor shall be supported by two pillow block bearings which can be maintained or
replaced without the removal of the rotor from its casing or the media from its spoke system.
5.1.7 The maximum face velocity shall not exceed 3.0 m/sec.
5.2 Plate Type Energy Recovery
5.2.1 Material: Exchange plates, pure aluminum, profiled, coated, with a cutting edge protection
designed for the transfer of sensible heat.
5.2.2 Device base: stainless steel or equivalent as a tub drain panel, inclined for draining the
condensate entirely. Condensate drainage fitting.
5.2.3 Supply Air and exhaust air flow shall be separated in order to avoid the air flows mixing.
5.2.4 Thermal efficiency: The thermal wheels efficiency shall be at not less than 75%
5.2.5 The plate type heat exchanger shall be certified by Eurovent for performance data calculations.
5.3 Heat Pipes
5.3.1 General
a. Heat pipes for enhanced dehumidification shall comprise a precool fin block upstream of
the main cooling coil linked to a reheat fin block downstream of the cooling coil by means
of ‘wrap-around’ pipes. The heat pipes shall be delivered to the AHU manufacturer fully
charged and sealed, for inclusion in the air treatment section of the AHU.
b. Fins
The external fins shall be of aluminium with a minimum thickness of 0.15mm. Fins shall
be of the continuous plate type to maximize the external surface area rather the
individually finned tube pattern. The fins shall be of the louvered type to optimize the
airside heat transfer and spaced at such a distance as required by the conditions
specified.
c. Tubes
Tubes shall be of refrigeration standard seamless copper for heat exchanger use. Tube
diameter shall be 12mm with a grooved inner surface to enhance the internal surface
area and prevent pooling of liquid. The minimum root thickness of the tube shall be
0.35mm. The number of rows of tubes shall be selected to suit the application. Multiple
row heat pipes shall have tubes in a staggered, equilateral pattern to optimize the airside
heat transfer.
d. Casing
Casings shall be from galvanized sheet steel with a minimum thickness of 1.6mm. The
casing shall incorporate tube plates and top and bottom plates around both the pre-cool
and reheat heat pipe blocks. Cover boxes shall be provided around the wrap-around
pipes both to protect the exposed pipes and to rigidly join the two sections. Extra sheet
metal shall be provided to ensure rigidity during manufacture and transport

e. Working Fluid
The working fluid shall be refrigerant type classified as ASHRAE safety group A1. The
heat pipe circuits shall be factory charged and hermetically sealed with the calculated
weight of refrigerant.
f. Circuitry
1. Heat pipes shall be formed from an array of complete loops such that the working
fluid flows around the loop in only one direction i.e. liquid and vapour flow in the
same direction to ensure that returning liquid is not entrained by the vapour.
2. There shall be a multitude of loops in the height of the heat pipe and each loop
shall be individually charged. Heat pipes with header assemblies containing a
single circuit are not suitable as a single leak will render the entire heat pipe
inoperative.
3. When multiple row heat pipes are used the rows shall be connected together in a
counter flow orientation to optimize the performance of the heat pipe. Rows shall
not be manifolded together.
4. Heat pipe loops shall be arranged to slope down to the precool side to allow gravity
assisted liquid return to maximize the internal heat transfer.
g. Performance
h. Heat pipes shall be designed to comply with the specified conditions when subject to the
air volumes given in the specification. Heat pipe performance shall be independently type
tested and certified in line with the requirements of British Standards BS 5141 Part-1 /
European Standards EN 305 & 306 / American Standards ARI 410 for testing and rating
of heat exchangers. All software used to predict the performance of heat pipes shall be
based upon the results of these independent tests
6.0 AIR FILTERS
6.1 Pre Filters (Panel Type)
6.1.1 The pre-filter material shall be synthetic, pleated to provide a large effective area and shall be
supported by a wire mesh and galvanized metal frame. The filter cells shall be suitable for side
withdrawal on the inspection side. The filter class shall be MERV 4 as per ASHRAE 52.2 or G2
as per EN 779.
6.2 Bag Filters
6.2.1 Bag filters shall be high performance extended area disposable type filters Class MERV 13 as
per ASHRAE 52.2 or Class F8 as per EN 779. The filter media shall have an average efficiency
of 95%. Each filter shall consist of high density glass microfibre media with a chemically bonded
backer, individual pockets and a corrosion resistant galvanized steel enclosing frame. The filter
unit shall be completely factory assembled and shall be classified by underwriter's laboratories.
6.2.2 Pockets shall consist of glass micro fibers chemically bonded to a reinforced backing. They shall
be sewn with a tapered stitch which forms a 'V' or wedge shaped pocket resulting in uniform
velocity in the passages of the air entering and air exiting sides of the filter. The pockets shall be
equipped with a minimum of 40 support points per square foot of the filter media.
6.2.3 All stitching points shall be completely sealed with foam seal or equivalent. The pockets shall be
chemically adhered around the periphery of the galvanized steel retainers. Retainers shall have
rolled edges to reduce possible cuts to media, or lacerations to installers.

6.2.4 Enclosing frame shall be constructed of a 'J' return channel of galvanized steel.
6.3 Electrostatic Air Cleaner
6.3.1 Equipment Description:
The Electrostatic precipitator shall be supplied as a one-piece factory assembly of individual

modules selected to treat kitchen exhaust air. The unit shall be ETL or UL labeled per tests and
compliance with UL 867, 3rd Edition standards. The units shall also be in complete accordance
with ASHRAE standard 52-76 for air cleaners test and rating of Efficiency, Resistance and Dust
holding capacity and DOP for oil mist.
6.3.2 Unit Housing:
Housing shall be 1.0/1.5 mm thickness welded galvanized sheet construction to protect against
rust and corrosion. Each section shall include single door access, located one side of the unit.
The access door shall be mounted on steel hinges and secured with adjustable, gasket sealed
lever latches allowing for component access and removal. All doors shall be gasketed to prevent
air and water leakage. Doors to charged high voltage components shall be equipped with
electrical interlocks, for interconnection into the primary power supply, to prevent access when
the components are charged. All supplied with positive pressure cell contact plungers for power
disconnection when doors are open or cell is not fitted in the right direction of air flow.
6.3.3 Base construction:
The modules are to be mounted on a channel for rail or floor mounting or ceiling suspension.
Lifting lugs shall be incorporated in the base channel to allow for rigging.
6.3.4 Finish:
The external casing finish shall be a durable industrial grade semi gloss baked- on epoxy ester,
not less than 3 mil minimum thickness.
6.3.5 Electrostatic Precipitator Modules:
The electronic air cleaner shall be the two-stage dual voltage plate type. rated at not less than
95% efficiency per the {D.O.P. Test Method for oil mist} {ASHRAE test standards for dry
particulate}. The collection cells shall be in a single-pass arrangement to provide for maximum
collection efficiency.
6.3.6 Air Inlet and Outlet Collars:
Air inlet and outlet collars shall contain nominal 20mm metal mesh, air baffle, accessible from
the outside of cabinet through hinged access door. Doors shall be gasketed to prevent air
leakage from cabinet.
6.3.7 Ionizing-Collecting Cells:

Ionizing-Collecting cell shall be of one-piece construction 350mm deep in direction of airflow. All
support framing, end plates and ionizer ground electrodes shall be 2.30mm thick aluminum. Both
repelling and collector plates shall be 0.80mm thick aluminum, 240mm deep in direction of airflow
and rigidly retained in place with tubular spacers and tie rods. Spacing between plates shall be
no less than 7mm. Ionizing electrodes shall be minimum 7 numbers of 24 gauge stainless steel
spiked design, for prevention of corroding or breaking and more effective air cleaning, rigidly
supported both vertically and laterally (ionization wires are not acceptable). Ionizing electrode to
ground electrode spacing shall be 25mm and ionizer ground electrodes will be 95mm in direction
of airflow. Face area of each cell shall be 0.15 sq.m and the effective collecting area 5.92 sq.m.
High voltage support insulators shall be of self-glazing Cordierite standoff ceramic with all
surfaces, including center hole, glazed to enhance dielectric strength and retard tracking, not less
than 14 numbers per cell, each with min 95mm in diameter and 40mm in height, to reduce arc
tracking on insulators for better efficiency, longer cell life, easy cleaning, even the tacky
contaminants, and to prevent cracks and eliminate imperfections. Flexible wiring connected to
the insulators shall be insulated with form fitting nitrile boots sized to the specific wire size to
insulate and maintain collection efficiency. Insulators shall be mounted out of the airstream, to
reduce contaminant buildup. All high voltage electrical connections within each tier of cells, shall
be between cells and automatically made when cells are installed. All high voltage electrical
connections between cell tiers and between power packs and cells shall be located on the
access door end of the cabinet and manually connected for ease of service. High Voltage wire
connections to the cells shall be shielded by means of a removable insulator boot.
6.3.8 Power Supply
Power supplies shall be pulse width modulated and 100% solid state, high frequency with built in
short circuit and arc protection, providing a dual high voltage output of (+)12 KVDC for the
ionizer and (+) 6.0 KVDC for the collector. A regulated output of up to 5.5 MA (maximum per
supply) shall be supplied to maintain the specified collection efficiency. Integrally mounted door
operated electrical safety interlock switch shall be provided to prevent access to the high voltage
components without first interrupting the primary input power. The power supply shall operate
over a temperature range of (-)35 to 65 degrees C, be self-protecting and accommodate an LED
light indicating the performance status of the ionizing/collecting cell. High voltage output leads
shall be sealed and a bleed resistor incorporated to remove stored electrical charge when the
power supply is de-energized.
All power supply components shall be designed for ease of mounting and servicing. High Voltage
power supply cable shall be furnished in fifty 15m lengths as standard, for connection of the
control cabinet power supplies to the ATS Unit collector cells. High voltage power cables shall be
of one continuous length, splicing is not acceptable.
6.3.9 Electrical:
Factory wiring will be in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Required field wiring shall
conform to the National Electrical Code and any Local code requirements.
7.0 HYDRONIC PUMPS
7.1 The Contractor shall calculate the head and flow requirement for all pumps, based on his actual
layouts as approved shop drawings and shall submit calculations for Engineer's approval.
7.2 Pumps shall be end suction or split case type unless otherwise indicated. The efficiency of the
pumps shall be at least 70 percent for end suction pumps and at least 80 percent for split case
pumps.
7.3 Casing

Casings shall be of close grained cast iron designed for scheduled working pressure and shall be
hydrostatically tested. Suction and discharge flanges shall be drilled to ANSI Standards and be
machined flat face. Pumps shall be fitted with bronze renewable case wear rings indexed with a
dowel pin for fixed positioning.
7.4 Impeller
The bronze impeller shall be hydraulically and dynamically balanced. The impeller is to be
securely mounted on the stainless steel shaft, and attached with a stainless steel impeller key.
The impeller shall be locked in position by threaded sleeves.
7.5 Bearings
The stainless steel pump shaft shall be adequately supported by the pump bearings to limit the
shaft deflection to 0.05 mm.
Bearings shall be the ball type, grease lubricated and locked to the shaft with positive locks of
ample size to withstand any axial thrust loads.
7.6 Shaft Seal
The pump manufacturer shall recommend the proper mechanical seal based on the pressure,
temperature and liquid outlined on the equipment schedule.
7.7 Shaft Sleeves
Bronze shaft sleeves shall be firmly attached to the pump shaft through threading and locking
means. Shaft sleeve design shall prevent corrosion and wear to the shaft.
7.8 Base, Coupling and Guard
The pumps shall be mounted on a cast iron base and directly connected through a heavy duty
flexible coupling to a horizontal motor. The base shall be provided with a drip rim. The pump
manufacturer shall provide coupling guard which shall be mounted between the pump and motor
and attached firmly to the base.
7.9 Motors
The motor shall be sized to operate continuously without exceeding the horsepower rating
regardless of the flow and head throughout the entire range of operation. Motors shall be TEFC,
1450 RPM. Windings shall have Class 'F' insulation and shall have thermistors in windings to
protect against excessive temperature rise. Motors shall be selected for the pumps to operate at
any point of the pump curve. Refer to general requirements and specifications of motor included
elsewhere herein.
8.0 VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS
8.1 The pumping system shall include as a minimum, the programmable controller, adjustable
frequency drives, remote sensors, motors and pumps. Pumps shall comply with the specification
for hydronic pumps included herein.
8.2 The pump manufacturer shall take “Unit Responsibility” for the successful operation of the system
supplied by him.
8.3 The pump manufacturer shall supply the complete variable speed system and shall have a
minimum of ten years experience with variable speed pumping systems.

8.4 At the time of submittal for approval, the pump manufacturer shall provide a complete system
profile analysis which shall include as a minimum the pumps performance (variable speed pump
curves) and the operating characteristics in the system (system curve).
This system profile analysis shall include pump motor and adjustable frequency drive efficiencies,
load profile, staging points, horsepower, and kilowatt / hour draw.
8.5 Control Panel: Factory installed and connected as an integral part of pumpset; automatic for
multiple-pump, variable-speed operation, with load control and protection functions.
a. Control Logic : Solid-state system with transducers, programmable

microprocessor, VFC, and other devices in controller.
Install VFC for pump in separate panel; same type as
motor control panel enclosure.
b. Motor Controller : NEMA ICS 2, variable-frequency, solid-state type.
c. Enclosure : NEMA 250, Type 4.
d. Motor Overload Protection : Overload relay in each phase.
e. Starting Devices : Hand-off-automatic selector switch for each pump in

cover of control panel, plus pilot device for automatic
control.
f. VFC : Voltage-source, pulse-width, modulating-frequency

converter for each pump.
g. Manual Bypass : Magnetic contactor arranged to transfer to constant-

speed operation upon VFC failure.
h. Instrumentation : Suction and discharge pressure gages.
i. Lights : Running light for each pump.
j. Alarm Signal Device : Sounds alarm when backup pumps are operating.
1. Time Delay : Controls alarm operation; adjustable from 1 to 300

seconds, with manual reset
9.0 PRESSURIZATION UNIT
9.1 The unit shall be automatic comprising of break tank with lid, water connections with isolating
valve and float valve, centrifugal pumps (duty/standby) with continuously rated single phase
motor, pressure switch, pressure reducing valve with gauges and interconnecting pipework and
valves, all mounted on to a mild steel base plate. A water meter shall be provided to monitor the
quantity of water being added to the system during operation.
9.2 Expansion Tank
9.2.1 The expansion tank shall be sized to suit the system water quantity unless a larger size is
required for proper functioning of the system
9.2.2 The tank shall be fabricated from mild steel and shall be galvanized both inside and out after
completion of welding. The tank shall be rated for operation at the system pressure in
accordance with the pressure test requirements of ASME or approved equal.
9.2.3 The tank shall be complete with all tappings for inlet (which may also be the drain,) air recharge,
and pressure relief.

9.2.4 A spare diaphragm shall be maintained by the Contractor at site during the maintenance period
and shall be handed over to the Client in new condition at the end of the maintenance period.
10.0 ELECTRIC MOTORS
10.1 Unless otherwise specified in the equipment specifications, all motors supplied and installed as a
part of mechanical works shall conform to the following requirements:
10.2 Motors shall be of high efficiency, and shall be constructed and type tested in compliance with
relevant sections of BS. EN 60034 and BS. 5000. These shall be of totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC) type to IP54 either with foot-mounting or flange-mounting suitable for its application.
Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be designed for continuous running duty type S1 for
operation during 3 years without maintenance. They shall be of such size as to drive adequately
their associated equipment under the range of operating conditions, without overloading.
Windings shall be insulated with Class F insulation material to BS. EN 60085, and temperature
rise of windings shall be class B (I.E. maximum of 80 deg.C. as measured by resistance
method).
10.3 Electric motors up to and including 0.37 Kw shall be suitable for operation at 240 volts single
phase. Motors rated above 0.37 Kw shall be of the 3 phase squirrel cage induction type with drip
proof housing. Motors located directly in air streams shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled. All
motors and equipment shall be tropicalized.
10.4 All motors shall be fitted with a power factor correction capacitors rated at 85% of the motor
magnetizing KVA. Providing a power factor of not less than 0.93. This connection shall be in
accordance with the B.S. Code of Practice. The capacitors shall be directly connected to the
motor terminals. This connection shall be made by the equipment manufacturer. The capacitors
shall be complete with discharge resistors.
10.5 All the motors shall be provided with a substantial earthing terminal tapped into the frame or
clamping device located on the cable end box side of the motor. When air inlets are protected by
a screen, such a screen shall be of corrosion resistant material.
10.6 Terminal connections shall be constructed in such a way that direct contact between screws,
bolts or nuts and the conductor is avoided.
10.7 The terminals shall be alphabetically or numerically marked in such a way that the cyclic phase
sequence in time of the supply corresponds to the sequence of terminal markings, the direction of
rotation is clockwise when facing the driving end.
10.8 The terminal box shall be of sturdy construction with ample space for connecting cables. An
earthing bolt of adequate size shall be provided inside the terminal box for connecting to the
cable earthing. This will be in addition to the earthing bolt provided in the motor enclosure. The
terminal box shall be adequately weather proofed with a suitable non sticking reusable
non-hygroscopic gasket material. These terminal boxes also shall be provided with suitable
cable sealing end boxes or cable glands.
10.9 The rating plate or plates shall be made of a corrosion resistant metallic material, fixed to a
non-removable part of the frame, and shall be marked with the appropriate items in accordance
with IEC 60034-1, whereby the values given shall be those actually measured.
10.10 In addition to these items the following information shall be indicated:
a. Type of enclosure in accordance with IEC 34-5 (IP classification).
b. Locked rotor torque on % of rated torque

Locked rotor current in % of rated torque

c. Allowable running-up time in seconds (ART) bearing type, size, fit, re-greasing period and
type of grease.
d. Net weight.
e. Purchase order number.
10.11 All motor shafts shall be provided with a key way unless the motor is of the flange mounted type
in which case they shall be complete with adjustable rails.
10.12 The frame shall be painted in accordance with manufacturer's standards. However, the painting
shall at least consist of one coat of primer and two coats of oil-resistant finishing paint.
11.0 MOTOR STARTERS, CONTROLS SWITCHGEAR
All starters and other control components shall be supplied and installed under this section but
the contractor shall ensure that all components supplied shall comply with the requirements of
the relevant sections of the electric specifications.
12.0 PANEL BOARDS AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE.
Construction of all panel board, motor control centres, control panels etc. shall comply with the
relevant sections of the electrical specifications.
12.1 Air handling unit / fan starter panels:
Each air handling unit shall be supplied with a starter cubicle including the following:
a. A door interlocked isolator handle.
b. A three position HAND/OFF/AUTO control switch.
c. A "motor run" lamp (green).
d. A "motor trip" lamp (red).
e. Motor speed selector switch
f. Motor starter assembly.
g. Control fuse.
h. Filter pressure drop (filter clog indication)
i. Inter-connection with fire alarm system and extract fans.
j. Power fuses with carriers and bases.
k. Moisture elimination heating coil.
l. Heating element contactors and controls.
m. Heating element 'energized' lamp (Green)
n. Heating element 'tripped' lamp (Red)
Note: Control switch "Off" - Motor shall not run
Control switch "Test" - Motor shall run except for local lock-off stop buttons.

Control switch "Auto" - Motor shall start and stop under dictation from remote control
circuit.
Starter panels, where installed outdoor, shall be of the weatherproof type in IP 65 enclosure.
12.2 Fan Coil Unit Control Enclosure
Control components of each fan coil unit like contactors, transformers, controllers, etc. shall be
housed within an enclosure located besides the unit within the ceiling void.
12.3 Motor Control Centre
Motor control centre shall be of the cubicle type, floor mounted and shall contain the following:
a. Incoming as shown on the schematic diagram.
b. Busbars for each phase, neutral and earth.
c. Outgoing as shown on the schematic diagram.
d. Starter as indicated on the schematic diagram.
e. Pilot light for each phase.
f. Pilot light for each motor in the plant room.
g. Push button (start-stop) for each motor and plant room.
h. One ammeter with selector switch for each motor in plant room.
i. One ammeter for each phase for the incomer power supply.
j. Volt meter with selector switch.
k. All required interlock wiring.
l. Motor duty selector switch.
m. Phase monitor relay for each motor.
n. Low voltage protection device.
o. Bank of capacitors for power factor improvement as required by DEWA.
Where motor control centres are installed outdoor, the panel shall be of the weather proof type
(IP 65).
Motor control centre construction and components shall comply with the requirements as set out
in the relevant sections of the electrical specifications.
13.0 FANS CENTRIFUGAL.
13.1 Furnish, install and connect up complete, all supply, return, exhaust, transfer and exhaust fans.
All fans with motor brake power of 7.5 kW or more shall be of the backward inclined type, unless
otherwise indicated.
13.2 Fans shall have direction of rotation, discharge direction indicated on the casing. Fan
arrangement shall be selected to suit the space conditions.

13.3 Fan housing shall be rigidly built and braced. Where fan scroll is 480 mm or more in width,
provide access door with frame and gasket. All access doors shall be so fabricated that the inner
surface is flush with the inside of the scroll. Raised frame doors of the pan type shall be provided
on all fans where insulation is required. The doors shall be secured to the frame by hand-grip
latches and shall be provided with lift handles. Bolted doors are not acceptable,
13.4 Fans shall not produce excessive noise as compared to units of like size and power when used in
conjunction with the specified vibration isolation. Fan manufacturers shall furnish for approval for
each fan, certified sound power ratings with an octave band analysis and also the volume-
horsepower- pressure characteristic curves from shut-off to free delivery. Wheels shall have
ample strength and shall be statically and dynamically balanced to avoid vibration and shall have
blades designed to ensure quiet efficient operation.
13.5 Fans, unless otherwise indicated, shall be belted to respective motors by "V" belt drives. Sheaves
shall be cast steel. Drives requiring 2 grooves or more shall have variable pitch motor sheaves
and companion type fan sheaves. Belts shall have a rated capacity of not less than 150% of the
motor horsepower. All "V" belt drives for integral horsepower motors shall have not less than two
belts and shall have sufficient belt capacity to drive fans with one belt broken. Sheave ratio shall
be selected so that top fan speed is not less than 105% and not more than 110% of rated speed.
Drives for fractional horsepower motors may have one belt rated at 200% of motor horsepower. If
to balance an air system, a fan other than the one provided should be required, necessary
changes shall be made in the "V" belt drive by the Contractor at his expense. Supply and install
belt guards of perforated metal, or as approved, for all sheaves and belts. Belt guards shall be
grommetted at fan and motor shafts for ease in taking tachometer readings.
13.6 Each fan motor shall be sized to drive it's respective fan when fan is operating at a speed (due to
pulley adjustment) of 10% in excess of that required to meet fan performance, and when the fan
requires the maximum power at this speed.
13.7 All fans shall carry the AMCA, or similar approved Certification Association performance and
construction seal.
13.8 Fans shall be factory coated with one coat of primer and one coat of machine enamel. The
interior of all fans and all wheels shall be painted as per manufacturer's standard.
13.9 All fans discharging directly up through the roof shall be equipped with a 38 mm casing drain
which shall be piped to the nearest floor drain.
13.10 All fans scheduled to be arranged as belted vent sets shall have overhung wheels and motors
mounted on a common base with the bearings. All such belted vent sets shall be furnished with
weatherproof motor housings where located outdoors.
13.11 All double width, double inlet fans shall be provided with galvanized steel inlet guard screens.
14.0 FANS, AXIAL.
14.1 10.1 Axial flow fans shall be capable of giving the design flow when tested to B.S. 848.
14.2 Each fan shall be supplied with a suitably rated contactor/ starter/ isolator of approved pattern.
14.3 Fan casings shall be constructed of mild steel plates with angle stiffeners, with the casing hot dip
galvanized after manufacture. The inlets and outlets of the axial flow fans shall be flanged for
connection to the system. A drain plug shall be fitted and the casing designed to permit removal
of the impeller.

14.4 An access door is to be provided on the casings of all fans. Casings shall cover both impeller and
motor so that fans can be removed without disturbing adjacent ductwork or other components of
the system. A flameproof external terminal box shall be fitted on the casing.
14.5 All lubrication points are to be extended to the outside of the casing and in a position that will
permit access in relation to the adjacent plant, services or building structure.
14.6 Impellers shall be die cast in Aluminium alloy and X-rayed during manufacture. The impellers
shall be capable of running continuously at 20% in excess of the rated speed. The impeller shall
be keyed and locked onto the shaft, which shall be statically and dynamically balanced and
tested at over speed before dispatch from the Manufacturer's works.
14.7 Flexible connections shall be supplied and installed at both inlet and outlet of each fan.
14.8 The fan bearings shall be of the sleeve type wherever possible. The bearings are to be truly
aligned and rigidly mounted on to the casing.
14.9 Graphs of the performance curve of each fan are to be forwarded to the Engineer together with a
test report on the sound level at three diameters in a free field condition prior to the order being
confirmed.
14.10 Blade angle shall be adjustable over at least a 30 degree range, with markings at the root to
indicate the blade angle.
14.11 Axial flow fans are to be driven by electric motors of commercially silent pattern carrying a
Makers guarantee in this respect. The motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled.
14.12 All motors are to be positioned to permit effective ventilation of the motor and all component parts
of the fan and motor are to be suitable to withstand the temperature conditions expected in the
fan.
14.13 Electrical connections to the motors shall be in a totally enclosed terminal box secured to the
exterior of the casing. Wiring within the axial flow fans shall be suitable for the conditions within
the casings.
14.14 A suitable steel support is to be provided for each fan, and the frame is to be fabricated from
rolled steel channel with adequate cross members for bolting the fan into position. The frame
shall be of welded construction with anti-vibration mountings.
14.15 The anti-vibration mountings are to be rubber in shear pattern and of a type that are bolted to
both the fan and the support.
15.0 PARTICULAR FANS
15.1 Inline Axial Fans
15.1.1 Construction : All parts shall be heavy gauge mild steel sheet roll formed and welded, then hot
dipped galvanized to BS729 after fabrication to ensure full corrosion protection. Fan casing and
motor shall have a powder coated, highly durable and polyester epoxy paint finished. Impellers
shall be of the adjustable pitch aerofoil type complete with blades made from high quality
pressure die cast aluminium, natural finish. Impellers shall be factory set at an angle to provide
maximum performance. Hubs shall be made from die cast aluminium alloy. Assembled
impellers are to be dynamically balanced. Bearing shall be designed for service with a minimum
L-10 life in excess of 40,000 hours at the maximum catalogued operating speed.

15.1.2 Motor : Motors shall be foot mounted totally enclosed metric type to IP55, with sealed for life
bearings, standard industrial paint finish and Class F insulation to BS EN 60034, IEC 60034-1,
suitable for operating ambient temperatures of up to 54°C. Motors are to be wired via a
weatherproofed cable to an IP55 protected terminal box mounted on the outside of the unit
casing. Units are to be designed and manufactured with procedures as defined in BS EN ISO
9001. EEC Directives shall be met.
15.1.3 Performance : Units are to be designed and manufactured with procedure as defined in BSEN
ISO 9001. EEC Directives shall be met. Units are to be tested to ISO 5801 (airside
performance) and BS 848 pt 2 (sound performance).
15.1.4 Accessories : Fan shall be provided with the following accessories:
a. Speed Controllers
b. Mounting Feet
c. Anti Vibration Mounts
d. Matching Flanges
e. Flexible Connectors
f. Inlet Cones
g. Non return dampers
h. Wire Guards
15.2 Smoke Extract Fans (Including Carpark Ventilation Fans)
15.2.1 Description: Units are designed to permit operation at extreme elevated temperatures for a
known time period under smoke operation. Fans to be capable of withstanding temperatures of
upto 400°C generally for up to 2 hours duration. Roof units shall include a cowl of fiberglass or
aluminium.
15.2.2 Construction: Casings shall be heavy gauge, mild sheet steel, roll formed and welded, then hot
dipped galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461. Hubs shall be die cast aluminium alloy. Fan shall be
complete with adjustable pitch aerofoil impellers with blades pressure die cast aluminium alloy or
polyester powder coated steel.
15.2.3 Motor : Motors shall be foot mounted totally enclosed metric type to IP55, with sealed for life
bearings, standard industrial paint finish and Class H insulation to BS EN 60034, IEC 60034-1,
suitable for operating at high temperatures, motors are to be wired using high temperature rated
weatherproofed cable to an IP55 protected terminal box mounted on the outside of the unit
casing.
Units are to be designed and manufactured with procedures as defined in BSEN ISO 9001. EEC
Directives shall be met. Motor shall be tested for high temperature operation in accordance with
BS EN 12101-3.
15.2.4 Performance : Fan unit is tested to either National or European draft standards. Smoke extract
axial fans shall be tested to ISO 5801– Airside Performance, and BS 848 Part 2 - Sound level
performance.
15.2.5 Accessories: Fans shall be complete with the following accessories:
a. Mounting feet

b. Anti Vibration mounts
c. Matching Flanges
d. Inlet Cones
e. Non Return Dampers and Wire Guards
15.3 Stairwell Pressurization Units
Axial flow fans, cylindrical casing made of steel, hot dipped galvanized after manufacturer and
with flanged ends. Casing shall completely surround both the impeller and motor. Terminal box
shall be mounted on casing, prewired.
Aero foil impeller of aluminum or steel to provide stability at higher temperatures.
Polished stainless steel shaft, heavy duty grease lubricated ball or roller bearings suitable for
high temperature application.
Motors IP55 rated shall be totally enclosed with class ‘H’ insulation. Fan units shall be UL
certified or approved by an equal certifying authority. Fans shall be capable of continuous
operation for a period of 2 hours at 400 deg C.
15.4 Kitchen Extract Fans
Exhaust fans shall be centrifugal belt-driven type. Fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward-
inclined type. The wheel shall be constructed of steel and coated with a non-stick coating similar
to Teflon or equal. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
The fan housing shall be constructed of 16-gauge steel with a rigid internal support structure and
shall be leak-proof.
The fan housing shall include an access door allowing access to entire wheel for cleaning.
Motors shall be heavy-duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load, and furnished at
the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Drive frame assembly shall be constructed of heavy-
gauge galvanized steel. Motors and drives shall be mounted on heavy-duty vibration isolators,
out of the airstream. Motors and drives shall be readily accessible for maintenance. Motors shall
be TEFC, IP55, Class-F insulation.
Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in cast pillow block lubricatable ball
bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum L10 life in excess of 100,000 hours at
maximum catalogued operating speed. Dual drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of
driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the cast type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel
and motor shafts.
Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. All fans shall have a dual belt and
pulley system. A NEMA-3R disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan
motor to a junction box installed outside the motor compartment.
All fans shall bear the AMCA sound and air performance seal.
Fans shall be listed underwriters laboratory for UL/cUL 762 listed for all electrical components
and grease removal.
Grease trap shall include the drain connection. The unit shall collect grease and water from the
fan and extract the grease from the water for ease of grease disposal.
15.5 Mechanical Roof Extract Units

The weather cap and base shall be moulded in ultra violet stabilised polyester resin, glass
reinforced, rendered fire retardant to BS476:Part 7, Class 2 or to equivalent North American
Standards.
The material shall be strong, light in weight, shall give excellent resistance to atmospheric
corrosion and shall be suitable for operational use in a wide range of climatic conditions.
The unit shall be load tested to ensure a generous structural factor of safety enabling the units to
withstand all normally encountered weather conditions. The cowl shall be secured to the
mounting brackets by stainless steel screws.
Aluminium anti back draught shutters shall be fitted as standard, being opened by air movement
and closed by stainless steel springs.
Synthetic rubber buffers shall be provided to ensure quiet operation.
Impellers centrifugal or mixed flow shall be high efficiency, designed specifically for applications
in this range of roof extract units.
Fan support arms shall be of mild steel, resiliently mounted to the base.
The unit shall be designed to operate efficiently when mounted horizontally or on a pitched roof
up to an angle of 30 deg. from the horizontal .
Motors shall be metric sized, ball bearing, squirrel cage induction type. All motors shall have
Class F insulation with degree of protection IP55.
Motor bearings shall be prelubricated with high quality grease. Bearing shall be selected for a
minimum L10 life in excess of 100,000 hours.
Accessories shall include lid guards, silencers and unit mounted isolators.
All fans shall be manufactured to strict quality controls as regulated by BS EN ISO 9001,
Underwriter's Laboratory.
Fans shall be air tested in accordance with BS 848 Part 1 and/or fans performance shall be
AMCA certified.
15.6 Twin Fan Toilet Units
Unit casing shall be manufactured in epoxy coated aluminium alloy and shall house twin fan
assemblies, each comprising double inlet forward curved centrifugal impellers running in an
individual scroll. Impellers may be either direct driven or belt driven depending upon the fan duty.
Motors shall be TEFV type with sealed for life bearings. Motor insulation shall be Class 'F'.
Fans shall be fitted with air flow sensors and shall discharge into a common plenum chamber
through a linked shutter system. Motors and flow sensors shall be prewired to fitted isolator
accessible from outside.
Units shall be supplied for either roof mounting or plant room use as indicated on the drawings.
Units shall be supplied with auto changeover panels with duty/stand-by selector switch, run/fail
indication lamps, cyclic relay for duty sharing. Starter/Auto changeover panels shall be
incorporated within electrical power supply panels as indicated on electrical schematic drawings.
15.7 Wall/Window mounted Extract Fans

Extract fans shall be of the propeller type suitable for window mounting. Fan construction shall
be of moulded plastic. Motors shall be of the shaded pole induction type enclosed in aluminium
alloy cases and protected by a thermal overload cut-out. Motor bearings shall be self-aligning oil
impregnated porous bushes with an ample oil reservoir.
Fans shall be provided with solenoid operated back draught shutters, opening and closing as the
fan is switched ON and OFF.
15.8 Bifurcated Fans
15.8.1 Unit case shall be manufactured in steel epoxy coated after manufacture to withstand corrosive
fumes. Flanges shall be drilled in accordance with BS EN ISO 13351. An in built central
chamber, ventilated to the external ambient air, shall contain the drive motor. By keeping the
motor totally out of the hot, contaminated airflow, adequate motor cooling is maintained.
15.8.2 Impeller blades shall be designed with special aero foil section to give excellent performance and
low noise characteristics. Impellors shall be of injection moulded chemically coupled glass re-
inforced polypropylene. All impellors shall be assembled using zinc plated set screws and self-
locking nuts. Impellors shall be fully adjustable and the selected blade angles shall be easily set
utilising the unique scale of graduations at the root of the blade.
15.8.3 Motors shall be foot mounted metric type totally enclosed fan cooled with IP55 protection.
16.0 CLOSE TOLERANCE UNITS
16.1 General
The air conditioner shall be designed specifically for data center environmental control. It shall
automatically monitor and control heating, cooling, humidifying, dehumidifying and filtering
functions for the data processing facility. The unit shall be built to the highest quality Engineering
and manufacturing standards and shall be completely factory tested before shipment. The unit
shall be with draw through air pattern to provide uniform air distribution over the entire face of the
coil. The unit shall incorporate two cooling coils (chilled water + DX). The chilled water coil shall
provide primary cooling and shall utilise an external chilled water source.
16.2 Component Accessibility
Service access to all electrical and mechanical parts shall be through the front and side of the
unit. All the electrical and mechanical parts (except the heaters, blower motors and expansion
valves) shall be serviceable without disrupting the air pattern through the unit.
16.3 Electrical

The electrical system shall conform to National Electric Code (NEC) requirements. The control
circuit shall be 24 volts AC, wired in accordance with NEC Class 1 requirements. All wiring shall
be neatly wrapped or run in conduit and routed in bundles. Each wire shall end with a service
loop and be securely fastened by an approved method. Each wire in the unit (except jumpers
less than 150 mm long) shall be numbered every 80mm for ease of service tracing. All electrically
actuated components shall be easily accessible from the front of the unit without reaching over
exposed high voltage components or rotating parts. Each high voltage circuit shall be individually
branch circuit protected on all three phases. Main power circuit breaker shall be factory mounted
on the electrical panel. All motors shall have thermal and short circuit protection. Line voltage and
24 volt control circuit wiring shall be routed in separate bundles. The electric box shall allow full
service access without disrupting the air pattern through the unit.
16.4 Electric Reheat
The unit shall have electric resistance heaters sized to offset the sensible cooling capacity in the
dehumidification mode. The reheat elements shall be of low watt density, tubular construction
with a non-corrosive metal sheath. Each stage of electric reheat shall be three phase, with the
load on each leg of the three phase electrical system identical to prevent the possibility of uneven
phase balance. The reheat elements shall be electrically and thermally protected in accordance
with the UL requirements.
16.5 Coils
The evaporator coils shall have copper tubes, aluminum fins and galvanized steel end plates.
The coils shall be raised above a stainless steel condensation pan.
16.6 Clogged filter Alarm
An adjustable air pressure differential switch shall be provided to sense the pressure drop across
the filters. Upon sensing excessive pressure drop, the switch shall activate the alphanumeric
"CLOGGED FILTER" indicator and audible alarm on the microprocessor indicator panel.
16.7 Humidification Bypass
The unit shall have adequate air bypass to support all the added humidification moisture without
exceeding 80% RH in the cold air stream.
16.8 Blowers
The air conditioner shall be configured for draw-through air pattern to provide uniform airflow over
the entire face of the coil. The unit shall have at least two DWDI blowers. Each shall be the
centrifugal type with forward curved blades, both dynamically and statically balanced. The
blowers shall operate in the Class 1 range and shall be belt driven with dual drive belts. The
speed of the blowers shall be adjustable by means of a variable pitch motor pulley. Belts shall be
sized for 200 percent of the motor KW rating, and shall be oil and heat resistant and static
conducting. The blowers shall have corrosion protected, painted steel housings and wheels. The
blower shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings, designed for a minimum L10 life in excess
of 100,000 hours. The blower shaft shall be cold finished centerless ground solid steel, treated for
rust protection.
16.9 Humidifier

The humidifier shall be of a self-contained steam generating type with a disposable cylinder
constructed of high temperature plastic and containing lattice electrodes. The unit shall be
designed to operate without chemical additives on ordinary tap water, and shall have a fully
automatic, solid state, energy saving control circuit to control the humidifier output and shall
automatically compensate for changing water conditions via controlled flush and fill logic. The
control system shall allow the humidifier to operate with any water conditions without changing
electrode spacings or cylinders and still provide maximum cylinder life. The humidification system
shall require no cleaning or maintenance during the cylinder life. The humidification control
system shall give the service personnel a visual alert that the humidifier canister requires
changing. The steam shall be discharged into the evaporator coil air bypass through a calibrated
discharge tube designed to equally distribute the steam into the air stream without condensation.
Infrared and ultrasonic humidifiers shall be acceptable as alternatives.
16.10 Filtration
The air conditioners shall have 80 percent efficient filters as measured by ASHRAE Standard 52-
76. The filters shall be with full depth filter pleats. Filters shall be UL Class 2.
16.11 Finish
The unit shall be electrostatically painted and baked to ensure proper surface adhesion; panels
shall have textured finish.
16.12 Frame
The frame shall be made of ASTM structural angle steel or of aluminium as per manufacturer’s
standard to provide maximum strength. Internal steel structural and mounting frame parts and
sheet metal pieces shall be welded. External panels shall be mounted with cam type latches and
shall be hinged and removable for internal access. The panels shall be double skinned with
fiberglass infill.
16.13 Blower Mount
The blower motor shall be mounted on an adjustable base, provided with a locking assembly to
prevent motor play. The motor shall be 1450 RPM and shall have copper windings, phase
isolation and shall be UL component recognized and CSA approved. The motors shall have a
minimum NEMA service factor of 1.15 as applied.
16.14 Dehumidification Dampers
A damper shall be installed in the fan discharge. The damper shall be controlled by an actuator
that shall adjust airflow in response to measured humidity in the room. Modulation of this damper
shall provide proportional control of latent cooling capacity.
16.15 Microprocessor
The control system shall be a field programmable self-calibrating, BMS interfaceable micro -
processor controller based with an alphanumeric and graphic display to provide all system
function and alarm data.
16.15.1 Temperature Anticipation
Controller shall anticipate and adjust to changing room conditions to minimise the rate of change
of temperature and energy consumption.
16.15.2 On Board Operator Instructions

The factory mounted alphanumeric display shall indicate a step-by-step trouble shooting
procedure for pre-selected alarm conditions. It shall also provide built in prompting instructions for
field configuration of the controller to the Client’s specifications. Graphic diagrams shall be
displayed for temperature and humidity variations over the last 24 hours.
16.15.3 Run Times
Controller shall store in memory and display on demand the running hours of the motor devices
and humidifier.
16.15.4 Self-Diagnostics
Controller shall display both the microprocessor control output signal and the mode of operation
that room conditions require. The system shall self-check the microprocessor memory and
display the microprocessor status.
16.15.5 Restricted Program Access
The microprocessor shall have restricted program access to prevent unauthorized modification of
system setpoints and the system configuration options. The level of access shall be field
selectable.
16.15.6 Easy Service
The microprocessor shall be mounted inside the air conditioner and shall be connected to all of
the unit's wiring via a single edge connector to allow easy installation and removal. The
microprocessor shall have individual microfuses for each controller output to a system contactor.
16.16 Accessories
16.16.1 Floor Stand
The air conditioner shall be supported on field fabricated structural steel frame.
16.16.2 Main Power Disconnect
The unit shall have a non-automatic main power circuit breaker to disconnect all high voltage
power to the unit. The disconnect switch shall be accessible without removing the electric box
cover and shall replace the standard power distribution block in the electric box.
16.16.3 Condensate Pump
The unit shall be supplied with a factory wired and piped condensate pump with a water reservoir
and float and shall be capable of overcoming atleast six metres of head pressure. All parts in
contact with water shall be of non-corrosive material.
16.16.4 Smoke Detection Alarm
The air conditioner shall be supplied with a factory installed and wired smoke detector and heat
sensor to sense smoke concentrations and heat in the return air. The smoke detector shall be
specifically designed to operate in the high air velocities it will experience in the unit. Upon
detecting smoke concentrations or excessive heat, the air conditioner shall automatically turn off
and it shall activate an alphanumeric SMOKE/FIRE ALARM indicator and audible alarm on the
microprocessor indicator panel.
16.16.5 Air cooled Condensing Unit

The unit shall provide secondary cooling in the event of power outage. Unit shall be complete
with scroll/screw compressors, copper/aluminium condenser coils, condenser fans and controls,
factory/charged with refrigerant R410A.
17.0 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM
A water leak detection system shall be provided in areas identified on drawings.
The water leak detection system shall be able to detect water and display location in metres at
the leak detection panel. The system shall also be configured to communicate with the building
management system for remote monitoring.
The leak detection cable shall be round and shall contain four conductors. The cable materials
shall be nonporous, plenum rated and resistant to breakage, cut-through and abrasion. The
cable shall be able to detect water immediately and shall be able to shed water quickly. The
cable shall provide a signal that will allow direct reading of the location where leak is detected. If
water leak is detected at two cable points simultaneously, the indicated reading shall be between
the two points. The cable shall also provide a method of sensing continuity so that a cable fault
can be detected. The cable shall be fixed to the floor with adhesive clips.
The panel shall provide the following indications as a minimum:
a. Digital LCD readout of water location
b. Audible Alarm
c. Silence/Update push button
d. System normal LED indicator
e. Water detected LED
f. Cable fault LED indicator
g. LED indication of meters on readout
18.0 SMOKE CONTROL STATION
Fire fighter’s smoke control station (FSCS) shall be located as indicated on drawings.
The control station shall include the following features:
a. The fire fighter’s smoke control station shall provide full monitoring and manual control
capability over all smoke control systems and equipment.
b. The control station shall have the highest priority control over all smoke control systems
and equipment. Where manual controls are also provided at other building locations for
control of smoke control systems, the control mode selected from the FSCS should
prevail. FSCS control should override or bypass other building controls such as hand off
auto and start/stop switches located on fan motor controllers, and controls intended to
protect against electrical overloads, provide for personnel safety, and prevent major
system damage.
c. The fire fighters smoke control station shall contain a building diagram that clearly
indicates the type and location of all smoke control equipment (fans, dampers, etc.). The
building areas affected by the equipment shall also be clearly indicated.

d. The actual status of the systems and equipment that are activated or are capable of
activation for smoke control shall be clearly indicated at the fire fighters smoke control
station.
e. Status indication shall be provided for on and off status of each individual fan used for
smoke control. ‘ON’ status should be sensed by pressure difference as proof of air flow.
19.0 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION SYSTEM
19.1 The system to comprise of remote sensors, exact location to be agreed with the Engineer.
Sensors to be wired to multiple channel carbon monoxide monitors.
19.2 Control shall be 24 volt, 1 ph, 50 Hz.
19.3 Monitor controls to be housed in a lockable NEMA-12 enamel finished cabinet with hinged door
and be complete with window.
19.4 Cabinet to be fitted with indicating lights to indicate sensor being monitored and level of carbon
monoxide.
19.5 Carbon monoxide sensors will continuously monitor the concentrations of carbon monoxide (CO)
prevailing within the car park.
19.6 Under normal conditions, the ventilation fans shall run at low speed (3 ACH).
19.7 On sensing 25ppm at any CO sensor, a visual and audible alarm shall be initiated at the panel.
The ventilation fans shall be triggered to run at medium speed (6 ACH).
19.8 Zone indication of CO sensor being monitored shall be indicated on the multiple channel CO
monitor.
19.9 The CO monitor shall be configured to interface with the building management system..
20.0 SUBMISSIONS.
20.1 Initial technical submissions are to accompany the bid including full technical details of every item
of equipment proposed for the project, with the appropriate figures and details highlighted in
marker pen or similar in standard manufacturer's catalogues.
20.2 After award of contract, resubmission will be made with any changes specifically noted.
20.3 Technical submissions for the all HVAC equipment and materials are required to be submitted.
20.4 In the event that the Engineer requires further information on any of the proposed items the
Contractor shall arrange visits to similar units which he has installed. In any event, all equipment
proposed for the project shall be currently installed and working satisfactorily locally. The
Contractor must be able to provide references of at least three satisfied Owners and Engineers
with equipment of the particular size and model proposed.
End of Section

PART A - SECTION 6
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
Revision History

PART A - SECTION 6
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
INDEX
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 3
2.0 SENSORS ........................................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 DAMPER ACTUATORS ...................................................................................................................... 6
4.0 AIR FLOW MEASUREMENT DEVICE ............................................................................................... 6
5.0 CONTROL VALVES ............................................................................................................................ 7
6.0 DDC/VAV CONTROLLER ................................................................................................................... 7
7.0 ROOM THERMOSTATS ..................................................................................................................... 9
8.0 CHILLED WATER ENERGY METER ................................................................................................. 9
9.0 ELECTRONIC METER FOR DOMESTIC WATER AND IRRIGATION WATER METERING .......... 10

Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
1.2 The control system stated herein is intended to define functional requirements of an acceptable
system. Contractor shall, in his tender, highlight and allow for alterations / modifications to the
system or the system components; which in his opinion are necessary to accomplish the purpose
of maintaining predetermined environmental conditions and other requirements at no additional
cost. Contractor shall not make any system modifications, including operating parameters, control
settings, etc. without prior written approval of the Engineer.
1.3 The contractor shall be responsible for all electrical installation required for a fully functional
system and not shown on the electrical plans or required by the electrical specifications. All
wiring shall be in accordance to all local and national codes. All line voltage wiring, all wiring
exposed, and all wiring in equipment rooms shall be installed in conduit in accordance to the
electrical specifications. All electronic wiring shall be 1.5mm² minimum and shielded if required.
All wiring in the central control room shall be concealed in an approved manner.
1.4 All wiring shall be properly supported and run in a neat and workmanlike manner. All wiring
exposed and in equipment rooms shall run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure.
All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to prevent obstruction to
devices and terminals.
2.0 SENSORS
2.1 All sensors shall be factory calibrated. Each sensor shall be accompanied with calibration
certificate when delivered to site.
2.2 Temperature Sensors
Temperature sensors shall be either of the thermistor (NTC) type with a high linear resistance
change versus temperature change or platinum (PT1000) to ensure good resolution and
accuracy.
Sensors shall be factory calibrated and shall be connected to remote controller by means of
suitable cables.
Sensors shall not require compensation for cable length, etc.
For information temperature sensors, sensors shall be provided with immersion pocket. The
sensing range shall be of 0°C to 120°C.
For room / wall mounted temperature sensors, sensors shall have a connection plate to permit
easy removal of the sensor during decorations, etc. The sensing range shall be of 0°C to 40°C.
The accuracy shall be within ±0.5%. There shall be provision for temperature display in the
sensors.
For ductwork type temperature sensors, sensors shall have a separate mounting flange with
snap-on connection to permit sensor adjustment.
For outdoor temperature sensors, the sensing range shall be of 0°C to 100°C. The accuracy
shall be within ±0.5%.
2.3 Humidity Sensors
Humidity sensors shall be of the capacitance type with operating range of 5% to 95% and the
accuracy shall be within ±3% RH at 23°C. Sensors shall be suitable for use on the duty
expected.

The sensors shall vary the output voltage with a change in relative humidity.
Humidity sensors shall be available for room or ductwork mounting.
Sensors shall be connected to remote controller by means of suitable cables. Sensors shall not
require compensation for cable length, etc.
2.4 Absolute humidity (Dew Point) Sensors
Absolute humidity (dew point) sensors shall utilize an active element to sense the actual quantity
of water vapour per volume of dry air when the relative humidity is from 12 to 100 percent.
Sensors shall be highly repeatable and change resistance with a change of moisture content in
the air.
Sensors shall be connected to remote controller by means of suitable cables. Sensors shall not
require compensation for cable length, etc.
Accuracy of the sensors shall be within ±3% R.H. at 23°C.
2.5 Combined Type Humidity and Temperature Sensors
Sensors shall have elements mounted in a common enclosure and be able to be connected to
remote controller by means of suitable cables.
Sensors shall not require compensation for cable length, etc.
Accuracy of the sensors shall be within ±0.5% and ±3% R.H. at 23°C for temperature and
humidity control respectively.
2.6 Differential Pressure Sensors
Differential pressure sensors shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure.
Sensors shall be connected to the remote controller by means of suitable cables, and sensors
shall not require compensation for cable length etc.
2.7 Carbon Dioxide Sensors
Non-dispersive technology with sensing range of 0 to 2000ppm shall be used for carbon dioxide
sensors.
The accuracy shall be within 5%.
Carbon dioxide sensors shall be available for room or ductwork mounting.
2.8 Carbon Monoxide Sensors
Carbon monoxide sensors shall be factory assembled units, designed to continuously monitor
and indicate the level of carbon monoxide in parts per million on its meter and to activate the
alarm circuit, alarm horn and warning light when the carbon monoxide concentration reaches the
alarm point and deactivate the alarms when the carbon monoxide concentration drops below the
alarm point.
The alarm point shall be factory set at 50ppm and shall be internally adjustable from 10 to
300ppm. Sensor response shall be 90% of maximum reading within 20 seconds with 200ppm
carbon monoxide concentration.

The sensor coverage shall be based on the requirements of the appropriate regulations but not
be less than 500m² per one sensor.
Unit shall be designed for operation with 220 V, 50Hz, single phase supply and shall have solid-
state circuitry, terminal strip with contacts for recorder, alarm and fault outputs, replaceable
factory-matched pair of catalytic, semi-conductor sensors, meter calibrated 0 to 300ppm,
illuminated ON, PURGE, ALARM ON, FAULT/TEST switches, momentary ALARM RESET switch
and an alarm horn, all mounted on the unit’s cover.
Unit shall have environment-proof, fiber glass polyester case with hinged, latched and lockable
cover. Alarm light shall be mounted on the top of the case and conduit connector or opening and
a test gas connector at the bottom of the case.
Sensors shall have at least a life time of 3 years with warranty certificate from the manufacturer.
Replacement shall consist of replacing the detector head and filter.
Sensors shall comply with UL Standard, BS standard or other relevant regulations for gas
monitoring.
2.9 Nitrogen Dioxide Sensors
Nitrogen dioxide sensors shall be factory assembled units, designed to continuously monitor and
indicate the level of nitrogen dioxide in parts per million on its meter.
Electrochemical type sensor with resolution of 0.1 ppm shall be used for the nitrogen dioxide
sensors.
The sensing range of 0 to 20 ppm shall be used.
Unit shall have environment-proof, fiber glass polyester case with hinged, latched and lockable
cover. Alarm light shall be mounted on the top of the case and conduit connector or opening and
a test gas connector at the bottom of the case.
Sensors shall have at least a life time of 3 years with warranty certificate from the manufacturer.
Replacement shall consist of replacing the detector head and filter.
Sensors shall be complied with UL Standard or other relevant regulations for gas monitoring.
2.10 Air Velocity Sensors
Air velocity sensors shall be capable of linear indication of the velocity of air in a ductwork from 0
to 15 m/s, and shall vary its output voltage with a change in air velocity.
Sensors shall have range selection for low velocities.
Accuracy of the air velocity sensors shall be within ±1% of the range.
Sensors shall be connected to the remote controller by means of suitable cables, and sensors
2.11 Contamination Sensors
Contamination sensors shall vary the conductivity as the degree of gas or smoke concentration
changes.
The sensor shall be connected to the remote controller by means of suitable cables, and sensors

2.12 Flow Sensors
Flow sensors shall be of the electromagnetic type.
Sensors shall be capable of measuring range suitable for the application.
Electrodes shall be of stainless steel or other approved material suitable for the liquid to be
measured.
Energy saving function for external battery power supply shall be provided as required.
Complete self-diagnostic function of the measurement system (sensor and converter) shall be
provided.
Accuracy of the air velocity sensors shall be within ±1 % of the range.
2.13 Flow Switches
Flow switches shall be electric and two-position with snap action.
Operating pressure of the switches shall conform to the requirement of the installation.
Switches shall be adjustable for sensitivity to flow and the adjustment range shall include flow
values applicable to the equipment protected by the flow switches.
3.0 DAMPER ACTUATORS
3.1 Actuators shall be of the linear or rotary type for either modulating or two positioning control.
Actuators shall have a manual opener for power failure. Control voltage shall be either 24V DC
or 220V AC as required by the application.
3.2 Actuators shall be selected to match the opening torque of the dampers.
3.3 Actuators on fire and life safety applications shall be UL approved.
3.4 Damper opening time shall not exceed the limits imposed by NFPA.
4.0 AIR FLOW MEASUREMENT DEVICE
The air flow measurement station shall consist of multiple air flow elements, factory mounted and
prepared in a casing designed for flanged connections to the ductwork. The station shall also
include a flow straightening section comprising of honeycomb having 12mm opening and 75mm
depth. Material of construction shall be galvanized casing, anodized aluminium flow sensors and
aluminium air flow straightener.
Each flow measuring element shall be designed and built to comply with and provide results in
according to ASHRAE and AMCA guidelines. The number of sensing ports in each element and
the number of elements shall comply with ASHRAE Standard-111 for equal area duct traversing.
The airflow traverse elements shall be capable of producing steady, non-pulsating signals of true
total and static pressure with an accuracy of two percent of actual flow for operating velocities as
low as 1m/sec.
The air flow elements shall not induce a measurable pressure drop, greater than 50Pa at
20m/sec. The units shall have a self generating sound rating of less than NC 40 and the sound
level within the duct shall not be amplified nor shall additional sound be generated.
Multiple elements shall be manifolded together for connection to a differential measurement

device for flow measurement and indicating purposes.

5.0 CONTROL VALVES
5.1 Control valves shall be of the modulating type with a turn down ratio of at least 50 to 1. Valve
bodies shall be cast gunmetal, brass cast iron or as otherwise indicated. Seat and inner valve
material shall be brass, stainless steel or as otherwise indicated. Valve sizes 50mm and smaller
shall be screwed and supplied with union fittings. Valve sizes 65mm and larger shall be flanged.
Valves actuator shall be equipped with manual opener to allow manual positioning of valve in the
absence of control power. Valves shall have authority of at least 0.5 (50%) and shall have
suitable actuator to close against full pump head. Valve body shall be rated for differential
pressure stroke <20 mm. Values shall be selected for normally closed condition with spring
return.
5.2 Pressure Independent Control Valves (PICV)
5.2.1 General
The PICV shall be installed at the chilled water return pipe connection to Fan Coil Unit / Air
Handling Unit / Close Control Unit / Plate Heat Exchanger. This valve shall function as a
pressure independent control valve with integral differential pressure control, adjustable flow
limiting and temperature control via a fully modulating actuator (0 – 10V signal).
5.2.2 The PICV shall have the following characteristics:
a Pressure class = PN16 or PN 25 as per system pressure.
b Maximum differential pressure = 400 ka.
c Maximum closing pressure = To suit pump shut off pressure
d Maximum working temperature = 100 °C
e Minimum working temperature = -2°C
5.2.3 The valve upto 50mm size shall have forged fitting, nickel-plated brass body, chrome plated
brass cone and stem with EPDM stem seal, PTFE ball seat and polyester-reinforced silicone
diaphragm.
For valve size 65mm and above, the construction shall have cast iron/ductile iron body, stainless
steel cone and stem with EPDM stem seal, PTFE ball seat and stainless steel characterized disk.
5.2.4 The valve shall be supplied with fully modulating actuator with 0 – 10V signal and 24V mains
supply.
5.2.5 The valve sizes of DN65 and above shall have flanged ends.
5.2.6 Integral flow verification test points shall be provided for flow measurement for valves upto 50mm
and stainless flow measuring orifice plate for valves above 50mm. Y – strainer shall be provided
before the valve.
6.0 DDC/VAV CONTROLLER
6.1 Controller shall consist of a one piece DDC controller complete with microprocessor, power
supply, self calibrating pressure transducer, and integral actuator. Provide DDC/VAV controller
factory fit and calibrated for the minimum and maximum air flows scheduled on the drawings.
6.2 Controller housing shall be UL 94-5 5V or equivalent listed material for use in ceiling plenum
applications without need of special metal enclosure. Controller shall work over an ambient
temperature operating range of 0-55C (32-122F), 5-95% non condensing humidity. Power supply
to unit shall be 20-30 VAC, 50 Hz, maximum power consumption of 5VA.

6.3 For reheat applications, provide factory fitted power relays rated for coils as required. Mount
relay in electric control enclosure and wire to DDC/VAV controller.
6.4 Controller shall be UL 916 listed, CE mark compliant, and conform to IEC 801.4 transient and
surge immunity standards. UL and CE marks shall appear on product labels.
6.5 Unit shall operate properly over inlet velocity pressure range of (0.00 to 2.00 in WC) 0-500 Pa.
End to end accuracy shall be +/- 5% of flow measured at 250 Pa inlet velocity pressure.
6.6 Cooling only model DDC/VAV controller shall be used in cooling only applications. Cooling and
reheat model DDC/VAV controller shall be used in reheat applications and contain 3 Form A
relays, pilot duty rated for control of floating proportional, time proportional or staged reheat
valves and coils.
6.7 Integral damper actuator shall be (53 lb-in) 6 N-m torque, over the shaft mounting type. Stroke
shall be fully adjustable from 0-90 degrees rotations with visible position indicator. Actuator shall
be equipped with manual position override. The actuator stroke time shall be 3.6 minutes
maximum for 90 degree rotation at 50 Hz operation.
6.8 Room temperature sensor shall be complete with digital LCD display. Temperature sensor shall
permit local adjustment of temperature set point, minimum flow, and maximum flow.
6.9 The VAV room digital thermostat shall also display the following:-
a Room space temperature (Degree C or in Degree F freely configurable)
b Room temperature setpoint (Degree C or in Degree F freely configurable)
c Maximum flow
d Minimum flow
6.10 The room temperature sensor shall be wired to the DDC/VAV controller using a two wire non
polarity sensitive cable.
6.11 The room thermostat shall have plug-in facility to a portable operator terminal to get the following
additional operation such as:
a Damper percentage opening
b Differential pressure across flow sensor
c Flow in CFM
d VAV box maximum flow
e VAV box minimum flow
f Heater status
g Minimum flow setting for heaters
6.12 It shall be possible to modify the VAV controller parameters from the room thermostat key
buttons without the use of any additional devices.
6.13 The controller should have the option of working along with a duct thermostat and any dry
contacts.

7.0 ROOM THERMOSTATS
7.1 Digital thermostat which shall permit adjustment of fan speed (low/medium /high/off) and
temperature set point. Unit shall display fan speed, space temperature and space temperature
set point.
8.0 CHILLED WATER ENERGY METER
8.1 The energy meter shall be made up of a flow meter, two temperature sensors, energy calculator,
and serial communication port. All local read-out units shall allow the operator to observe the
operating parameters. The energy meter shall be furnished with remote readout via meter bus
communication for energy, flow, supply temperature and return temperature for monitoring
purpose by the BMS.
8.2 The flow meter shall be of the ultrasonic type producing analog signal proportional to flow, with
stainless steel construction and Teflon liner.
Meter size shall be selected based on the flow rate and shall correspond to the pipe diameter
with flanged connections for the larger pipe sizes.
8.3 Minimum technical requirements:
a Accuracy - 1.0% of calibrated span.
b Repeatability - 0.25% of calibrated span.
c Supply effect
Variation - 0.25 calibrated span for 10% power supply.
d Temperature - 0.50% of calibrated span over rated range of 1ºC to 40ºC.
e Built-in battery with 6 years life for emergency operation in case of power failure.
f EEPROM memory.
g LCD Display with backlight.
8.4 Display Features:
Energy meter shall be capable of monitoring and providing the following as a minimum:
a Provide hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annually water consumption for each meter.
b Compare consumption to previous days, weeks, months and years for trend analysis.
c Determine out of range values to alert building operator to unusually high consumption.
d Record peak water consumption for each meter.
e Accumulated thermal energy: KWh
f Accumulated water flow: m³
g Actual water flow: l/h
h Supply temperature: ºC
i Return temperature: ºC

j Peak thermal power: KW
k Peak water flow: l/h
l Hour Counter: HRS
8.5 The display shall be fixed type.
8.6 The energy meter shall be interfaced with the BMS software for hourly, weekly, monthly and
annually energy readings.
9.0 ELECTRONIC METER FOR DOMESTIC WATER AND IRRIGATION WATER METERING
9.1 The electronic water meter shall be made up of a flow meter and serial communication port. All
local read-out units shall allow the operator to observe the operating parameters. The meter shall
be furnished with remote readout via meter bus communication for water, flow for monitoring
purpose by the BMS.
9.2 The flow meter shall be of the electromagnetic type producing signal proportional to flow, with
IP 67 enclosure and Teflon liner.
Meter size shall be selected based on the flow rate and shall correspond to the pipe diameter
with flanged connections for the larger pipe sizes.
9.3 Minimum technical requirements:
a Accuracy - 1.0% of calibrated span.
b Repeatability - 0.25% of calibrated span.
c Supply effect
Variation - 0.25% calibrated span for 10% power supply.
d LCD Display with backlight.
9.4 Display Features:
Electronic water meter shall be capable of monitoring and providing the following as a minimum:
a Provide hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annually water consumption for each meter.
b Compare consumption to previous days, weeks, months and years for trend analysis.
c Determine out of range values to alert building operator to unusually high consumption.
d Record peak water consumption for each meter.
9.5 The display shall be fixed type.
9.6 The water meter shall be interfaced with the BMS software for hourly, weekly, monthly, annually
meter readings.
End of Section

PART A - SECTION 7
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
Revision History

PART A - SECTION 7
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
INDEX
1.0 SUMMARY ....................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXAMINATION................................................................................................................................................. 3
4.0 PREPARATION................................................................................................................................................ 4
5.0 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING................................................................... 5
6.0 PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS...................................................................................... 5
7.0 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS ..................................................................... 6
8.0 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS........................................................................ 7
9.0 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS ........................................................................... 8
10.0 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS............................................................. 8
11.0 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS ............................................................... 9
12.0 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY HYDRONIC SYSTEMS ................................................... 9
13.0 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS ................................................................................................ 9
14.0 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS ................................................................................................................... 10
15.0 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS .............................................................................................. 10
16.0 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS ........................................................................................ 10
17.0 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS ..................... 11
18.0 TOLERANCES ............................................................................................................................................... 12
19.0 REPORTING .................................................................................................................................................. 12
20.0 FINAL REPORT ............................................................................................................................................. 12
21.0 INSPECTIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 20
22.0 ADDITIONAL TESTS ..................................................................................................................................... 21

Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
1.0 SUMMARY
1.1 This section specifies the requirements and procedures for mechanical systems testing,
adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid
quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications and recording and
reporting the results.
1.2 Test adjust and balance the following mechanical systems:
a Supply air systems, all pressure ranges, including variable volume system
b Return air system
c Exhaust air system
d Hydronic system
e Refrigeration system
f Noise and sound control
g Fire and life safety systems
h Control system
1.3 This section does not include testing heaters and pressure vessels for compliance with safety
codes, specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices.
2.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2.1 Agency Qualifications:
Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the
qualifications specified below, to be the single source of responsibility to test , adjust, and
balance the building mechanical system identified above, to produce the design objectives.
Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design measurement and
establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design
specifications, and recording and reporting the results.
An independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency who have been in continuous business
for at least 10 years in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and
having at least one professional Engineer with a minimum of 7 years dedicated experience as a
Test and Balance Engineer.
3.0 EXAMINATION
3.1 Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing and balancing of systems and
equipment.
3.2 Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
3.3 Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
3.4 Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for
environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions
about HVAC system and equipment controls.

3.5 Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify
that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts and are properly separated from adjacent
areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
3.6 Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
3.6.1 Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that
can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a
system.
3.6.2 Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed
under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. Compare
results with the design data and installed conditions.
3.7 Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning,
and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
3.8 Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
3.9 Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and
tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
3.10 Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
3.11 Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated
perforations.
3.12 Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function.
3.13 Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
3.14 Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
3.15 Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
3.16 Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing and balancing
procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set
points if different from indicated values.
4.0 PREPARATION
4.1 Prepare a testing and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
4.2 Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
a Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
b Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
c Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
d Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
e Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
f Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

g Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
h Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
5.0 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
5.1 Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", ASHRAE 111 NEBB's
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems",
SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.
5.2 Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary for testing and balancing procedures.
a After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
b After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with
specification.
c Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to specification.
5.3 Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable,
permanent identification material to show final settings.
5.4 Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound IP or metric SI units as
agreed with the Engineer.
5.5 Record ambient temperature conditions and time at which testing and balancing of each
equipment / system was carried out.
6.0 PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
6.1 Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
6.2 Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
6.3 For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
6.4 Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
6.5 Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
6.6 Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
6.7 Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
6.8 Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
6.9 Check for airflow blockages.
6.10 Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

6.11 Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
6.12 Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified elsewhere herein.
7.0 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
7.1 Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
7.1.1 Measure total airflow.
a Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements,

measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.
7.1.2 Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream
from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.
d Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that
houses the fan.
7.1.3 Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit,
and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
7.1.4 Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery
equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
7.1.5 Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static
pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate
actual conditions.
7.1.6 Obtain approval from Architect / Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed.
7.1.7 Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating,
economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake
horsepower.
7.2 Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
7.2.1 Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total
airflow for that zone.
b Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

c Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
7.3 Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
a Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written

instructions and calculating factors.
7.4 Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and
the dampers at air terminals.
a Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract
Documents.
b Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
8.0 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
8.1 Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated
airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with
the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the
indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed
evenly among the branch ducts.
8.2 Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted,
adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
a Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a
position that simulates full-cooling load.
b Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for
the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge system losses.
c Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
d Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make
this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
e Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the
same as described for constant-volume air systems.
f If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets
balanced for maximum airflow.
g Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
h Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.

i Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
j Record final fan-performance data.
9.0 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
9.1 Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
9.2 Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
9.3 Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
a Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
b Check liquid level in expansion tank.
c Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
d Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.
e Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
f Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
g Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
h Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
10.0 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
10.1 Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement
pumps:
10.1.1 Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure
differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage
heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has
the intended impeller size.
a If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from
Architect / Engineer.
10.1.2 Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and
mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated
water flow is achieved.
a Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload
conditions.

10.1.3 Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system
based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with
nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor
nameplate amperage.
10.1.4 Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
10.2 Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
10.3 Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open
position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
10.4 Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
10.5 Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
a System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
10.6 Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than indicated flow.
10.7 Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
a Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
b Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
c Record settings and mark balancing devices.
10.8 Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
10.9 Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.
10.10 Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
11.0 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
11.1 Balance systems with automatic control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through
heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.
12.0 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
12.1 Balance the primary circuit flow first and then balance the secondary circuits.
13.0 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS
13.1 Measure water flow through all circuits.
13.2 Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
13.3 Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
13.4 Measure inlet fluid pressure.
13.5 Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.

14.0 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
14.1 Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
a Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
b Motor horsepower rating.
c Motor rpm.
d Efficiency rating.
e Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
f Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
g Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
14.2 Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation.
Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number,
and nameplate data.
15.0 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
a Verify proper rotation of fans.
b Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
c Record compressor electrical data and refrigerant pressures.
16.0 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
16.1 Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
a Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
b Water flow rate.
c Water pressure drop.
d Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
e Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
f Airflow.
g Air pressure drop.
16.2 Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:
a Nameplate data.
b Airflow.
c Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.
d Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.

e Calculated kilowatt at full load.
f Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
16.3 Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
a Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
b Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
c Airflow.
d Air pressure drop.
e Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
17.0 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
17.1 Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
a Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.
b Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.
c Check the refrigerant charge.
d Check the condition of filters.
e Check the condition of coils.
f Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.
g Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
h Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements
taken. Report deficiencies.
17.2 Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to
remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify
the following:
a New filters are installed.
b Coils are clean and fins combed.
c Drain pans are clean.
d Fans are clean.
e Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
f Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
17.3 Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected
by the renovation work.
a Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and
determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

b Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment
manufacturer.
c If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5
percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or
decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
d Balance each air outlet.
18.0 TOLERANCES
18.1 Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
a Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 10 percent or minus 5
percent.
b Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent.
c Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent or minus 0 percent.
d Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent or minus 0 percent.
19.0 REPORTING
19.1 Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
19.2 Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures
in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in
systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each
building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
20.0 FINAL REPORT
20.1 General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
a Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
b Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
20.2 Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
a Pump curves.
b Fan curves.
c Manufacturers' test data.
d Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
e Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.

20.3 General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
a Title page.
b Name and address of the testing and balancing contractor.
c Project name.
d Project location.
e Architect's name and address.
f Engineer's name and address.
g Contractor's name and address.
h Report date.
i Signature of testing and balancing supervisor who certifies the report.
j Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
k Summary of contents including the following:
1 Indicated versus final performance.
2 Notable characteristics of systems.
3 Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
l Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
m Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
n Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
o Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
1 Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
2 Conditions of filters.
3 Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
4 Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
5 Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
6 Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
7 Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
8 Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
20.4 System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
a Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

b Water and steam flow rates.
c Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
d Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
e Terminal units.
f Balancing stations.
g Position of balancing devices.
20.5 Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
a Unit Data:
1 Unit identification.
2 Location.
3 Make and type.
4 Model number and unit size.
5 Manufacturer's serial number.
6 Unit arrangement and class.
7 Discharge arrangement.
8 Sheave make, size in (inches) mm, and bore.
9 Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in (inches)

mm.
10 Number, make, and size of belts.
11 Number, type, and size of filters.
b Motor Data:
1 Motor make, and frame type and size.
2 Horsepower and rpm.
3 Volts, phase, and hertz.
4 Full-load amperage and service factor.

mm.
c Test Data Indicated and Actual Values:
1 Total air flow rate in (cfm) L/s.
2 Total system static pressure in (inches wg) Pa.

3 Fan rpm.
4 Discharge static pressure in (inches wg) Pa.
5 Filter static-pressure differential in (inches wg) Pa.
6 Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in (inches wg) Pa.
7 Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in (inches wg) Pa.
8 Heating-coil static-pressure differential in (inches wg) Pa.
9 Outdoor airflow in (cfm) L/s.
10 Return airflow in (cfm) L/s.
11 Outdoor-air damper position.
12 Return-air damper position.
13 Vortex damper position.
20.6 Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
a Coil Data:
1 System identification.
2 Location.
3 Coil type.
4 Number of rows.
5 Fin spacing in fins per (inch) mm o.c.
6 Make and model number.
7 Face area in (sq. ft.) sq. m.
8 Tube size in (NPS) DN.
9 Tube and fin materials.
10 Circuiting arrangement.
b Test Data Indicated and Actual Values:
1 Air flow rate in (cfm) L/s.
2 Average face velocity in (fpm) m/s.
3 Air pressure drop in (inches wg) Pa.
4 Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in (deg F) deg C.
5 Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in (deg F) deg C.
6 Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in (deg F) deg C.

7 Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in (deg F) deg C.
8 Water flow rate in (gpm) L/s.
9 Water pressure differential in (feet of head or psig) kPa.
10 Entering-water temperature in (deg F) deg C.
11 Leaving-water temperature in (deg F) deg C.
12 Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
13 Refrigerant suction pressure in (psig) kPa.
14 Refrigerant suction temperature in (deg F) deg C.
15 Inlet steam pressure in (psig) kPa.
20.7 Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-
station air-handling units, include the following:
a Unit Data:
2 Location.
3 Coil identification.
4 Capacity in (Btu/h) kW.
5 Number of stages.
6 Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
7 Rated amperage.
9 Face area in (sq. ft.) sq. m.
10 Minimum face velocity in (fpm) m/s.
1 Heat output in (Btu/h) kW.
3 Air velocity in (fpm) m/s.
4 Entering-air temperature in (deg F) deg C.
5 Leaving-air temperature in (deg F) deg C.
6 Voltage at each connection.
7 Amperage for each phase.

20.8 Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
a Fan Data:
2 Location.
3 Make and type.
4 Model number and size.
5 Manufacturer's serial number.
6 Arrangement and class.

mm.
b Motor Data:
1 Motor make, and frame type and size.
2 Horsepower and rpm.
3 Volts, phase, and hertz.

mm.
7 Number, make, and size of belts.
c Test Data Indicated and Actual Values:
1 Total airflow rate in (cfm) L/s.
2 Total system static pressure in (inches wg) Pa.
3 Fan rpm.
4 Discharge static pressure in (inches wg) Pa.
5 Suction static pressure in (inches wg) Pa.
20.9 Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
a Report Data:

1 System and air-handling-unit number.
2 Location and zone.
3 Traverse air temperature in (deg F) deg C.
4 Duct static pressure in (inches wg) Pa.
5 Duct size in (inches) mm.
6 Duct area in (sq. ft.) sq. m.
7 Indicated air flow rate in (cfm) L/s.
8 Indicated velocity in (fpm) m/s.
9 Actual air flow rate in (cfm) L/s.
10 Actual average velocity in (fpm) m/s.
11 Barometric pressure in (psig) Pa.
20.10 Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
a Unit Data:
b System and air-handling unit identification.
c Location and zone.
d Apparatus used for test.
e Area served.
f Make.
g Number from system diagram.
h Type and model number.
i Size.
j Effective area in (sq. ft.) sq. m.
k Test Data Indicated and Actual Values:
20.11 Air flow rate in (cfm) L/s.
a Air velocity in (fpm) m/s.
b Preliminary air flow rate as needed in (cfm) L/s.
c Preliminary velocity as needed in (fpm) m/s.
d Final air flow rate in (cfm) L/s.
e Final velocity in (fpm) m/s.
f Space temperature in (deg F) deg C.

20.12 System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:
a Unit Data:
1 System and air-handling-unit identification.
2 Location and zone.
3 Room or riser served.
4 Coil make and size.
5 Flowmeter type.
2 Entering-water temperature in (deg F) deg C.
3 Leaving-water temperature in (deg F) deg C.
4 Water pressure drop in (feet of head or psig) kPa.
5 Entering-air temperature in (deg F) deg C.
6 Leaving-air temperature in (deg F) deg C.
20.13 Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and
include the following:
a Unit Data:
1 Unit identification.
2 Location.
3 Service.
4 Make and size.
5 Model number and serial number.
6 Water flow rate in (gpm) L/s.
7 Water pressure differential in (feet of head or psig) kPa.
8 Required net positive suction head in (feet of head or psig) kPa.
9 Pump rpm.
10 Impeller diameter in (inches) mm.
11 Motor make and frame size.
12 Motor horsepower and rpm.

16 Seal type.
1 Static head in (feet of head or psig) kPa.
2 Pump shutoff pressure in (feet of head or psig) kPa.
3 Actual impeller size in (inches) mm.
4 Full-open flow rate in (gpm) L/s.
5 Full-open pressure in (feet of head or psig) kPa.
6 Final discharge pressure in (feet of head or psig) kPa.
7 Final suction pressure in (feet of head or psig) kPa.
8 Final total pressure in (feet of head or psig) kPa.
9 Final water flow rate in (gpm) L/s.
20.14 Instrument Calibration Reports:
a Report Data:
1 Instrument type and make.
2 Serial number.
3 Application.
4 Dates of use.
5 Dates of calibration.
21.0 INSPECTIONS
21.1 Initial Inspection:
a After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and
balance readings documented in the final report.
b Check the following for each system:
1 Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
2 Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.

3 Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point.
4 Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
5 Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
21.2 Final Inspection:
a After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request
that a final inspection be made by Architect / Engineer.
b The testing and balancing contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the
inspection in the presence of Architect / Engineer.
c Architect / Engineer shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report,
to be rechecked.
d If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
e If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
21.3 Testing and balancing will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If testing
and balancing fails, proceed as follows:
21.4 Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device
settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.
21.5 If the second final inspection also fails, Client may contract the services of another testing and
balancing contractor to complete testing and balancing according to the Contract Documents and
deduct the cost of the services from the original testing and balancing contractor's final payment.
21.6 Prepare test and inspection reports.
22.0 ADDITIONAL TESTS
22.1 Within 90 days of completing testing and balancing, perform additional TAB to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
22.2 Seasonal Periods: If initial testing and balancing procedures were not performed during near-
peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing and balancing during near-peak
summer and winter conditions.
End of Section

Propos
sed 3B + G + 9 Storey Res sidential Building on Plot No. R-22, R-223, R-24
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
kh Abdurahm man Hamad A Al Thani
PAR
RT A - SECTIION 8
PLUMBING
G
Revision H
History
00 Ju
uly 2015 Final MEP Speciffication SM//DB Y
YS/YA JH
Rev. Date Desc

cription of Re
evision Preparred By Ch ecked By Approved By
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
PAR
RT A - SECTIION 8
PLUMBING
G
INDEX
1.0 SC
COPE OF WORK.
W ......................................................................................... ..................................... 3
2.0 SE
ERVICES DE N. ........................................................................... ..................................... 3
ESCRIPTION
3.0 PIIPEWORK IN
NSTALLATIO RAL ..................................................... ..................................... 4
ON : GENER
4.0 ST
TORAGE AND
A PROTECTION ................................................................... ..................................... 4
5.0 GRADIENT AN
ND DRAINA ELINES .............................................. ..................................... 5
AGE OF PIPE
6.0 PIIPEWORK SUPPORTS
S ................................................................................ ..................................... 6
7.0 SION .......................................................................................... ..................................... 7
PIIPE EXPANS
8.0 G ................................................................................................. ..................................... 7
AIIR VENTING
9.0 NTI WATER HAMMER CUSHIONS
AN C ............................................................. ..................................... 7
10.0 UDDLE FLANGES ........................................................................................ ..................................... 8
PU
11.0 PIIPEWORK MATERIAL
M .................................................................................. ..................................... 8
12.0 EX PIPES ....................................................................................................... ..................................... 8
PE
13.0 JO F PIPES ...................................................................................... ..................................... 9
OINTING OF
14.0 IN 0
ORK ........................................................................ ................................... 10
NSULATION OF PIPEWO
15.0 W
WATER STOR
RAGE TANK 0
ESSORIES ......................................... ................................... 10
K AND ACCE
16.0 ALVES ........................................................................................................... ................................... 11
VA
17.0 3
TRAINERS ..................................................................................................... ................................... 13
ST
18.0 EL
LECTRIC WA 3
TERS ...................................................................... ................................... 13
ATER HEAT
19.0 TH
HERMOSTA 4
G VALVES ............................................................... ................................... 14
ATIC MIXING
20.0 VA
ARIABLE-SP 4
STER PUMP S ........................................................ ................................... 14
PEED BOOS
21.0 CO
ONSTANT-S
SPEED BOO 6
PS...................................................... ................................... 16
OSTER PUMP
22.0 CA
ARTRIDGE TYPE
T 8
ER FILTER ............................................................. ................................... 18
WATE
23.0 HY
YDROSTATIC TESTING
G OF WATER 8
YSTEMS ......................... ................................... 18
R PIPING SY
24.0 PO
OTABLE WA
ATER PIPING
G STERILIZA
ATION AFTE 9
SSIONING ... ................................... 19
ER COMMIS
25.0 0
ESTING OF EQUIPMENT ............................................................................ ................................... 20
TE
26.0 RE 0
O EQUIPMENT ....................................................................... ................................... 20
EJECTION OF
27.0 TE
ESTING AND
D ADJUSTM 0
ONTROLS ........................................... ................................... 20
MENT OF CO
28.0 GO
OVERNMEN
NT AND LOC 0
RITIES ............................................... ................................... 20
CAL AUTHOR
Part A - Sectio
on 8 2 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK.
1.1 The work sh hall include design

d checkk, supply, installation, testing, commisssioning, adjustment and
d
ork of the water services installation.
setting to wo
1.2 By virtue off carrying out a check on the com mplete design, the contrractor is to assume fulll
responsibilityy for the corrrect functioni ng of the sys
stem and to carry
c any liabbility or guara
antee as mayy
be necessarry to protect all a parties in this regard.
1.3 The plumbin ng services subcontracto

s or shall be re
esponsible fo
or coordinatioon with other trades and
d
services and d shall prov vide all mate erials, labour and superrvision, equippment, toolss, appliance,,
services, etcc. for carryingg out the follo
owing items of works:
a Dom d cold water installations

mestic hot and s.
b Wate
er filtration, treatment and
d sterilization
n.
c Therrmal and protective insula

ation of pipew
work, plant and
a equipmeent.
d Noisse suppressio
on measuress for plant an
nd equipmentt.
e Prote
ective paintin
ng of all mate
erials.
f Identification of all
a services.
g Electrical power and control panels for power supply to equipmennt including cabling from
m
paneels to respeective equip
pment. Pow wer supply terminating in an isola ating switch
h
terminating within 3 meterss of each equipment
e shall
s be proovided by thhe electricall
subccontractor.
h All builder's
b work including b
breaking and
d making go
ood of walls , floors, etc.., equipmentt
foundation pads, sleeves, etcc.
i Hoissting of heavy
y equipment..
2.0 SERVICES DESCRIPTIO

ON.
2.1 System Dessign
The plumbin ng system shall be design dance with the recommenndations of th

ned in accord he Chartered
d
Institution of
o Building Services
S Enggineers andd to the reqquirements oof the Authoority Having
g
Jurisdiction.
2.2 System Desscription
Water for domestic

d use shall be tapp
ped off from the
t Authority water main. Water shall be stored in n
RCC-waterr tank locatedd in basemen nt floor. The water tank shall
s have a sstorage capa
acity sufficientt
for two day water consumption for doomestic use.
Water from the RCC-wa ater tank shalll be transferrred to roof GR

RP tanks via water transfe er pumpsets..
Water shall be pressurizzed to last thre
ee floors via booster
b pumppsets locatedd on roof adjacent to waterr
tank, to maintain 2 bar pressure
p at drraw off pointss.
Pressure reeducing valvees shall be prrovided wherre required to

o maintain thee terminal wa
ater pressure
e
within the ra
ange 2 to 2.5
5 bar.
Hot water to
o apartmentss shall be by electric wate
er heaters installed within tthe ceiling vo
oid of the wett
area. Cappacity shall be
e as shown o on the design drawings.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 3 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
3.0 PIPEWORK
K INSTALLAT
TION : GENE
ERAL
3.1 Pipe materiaals shall be as specified eelsewhere herein. The Contractor shalll install union
ns or pairs off
flanges in the pipework system
s at thee following lo
ocations :-
a At intervals not greater

g than 1
15 m.
b To enable
e the disconnectio
d n of all item
ms of plant, equipment,, pumps and
d valves forr
main
ntenance purrposes.
c To enable
e sections of pipeework to bee subsequen ntly dismantlled and refiixed withoutt
distu
urbing other pipework,
p pla
ant, equipme
ent and building fabric.
d Whe
ere indicated on the draw
wings.
3.2 Pipework sh
hall be run ne g lines on plan and shaall, where ne
eatly, parallell to walls or grid ecessary, sett
around columns and prrojections. A All vertical pipe
p shall be
e plumb. Diirection chan
nges in pipe
e
groups shall be set out frrom a comm mon centre po oint.
3.3 All screwed and flanged joints shall b

be easily acc
cessible.
3.4 Where pipess are fitted around

a colummns or piers,, the direction change shhall be made
e using shortt
offsets and shall
s be supp e centre line of the colum
ported on the mn.
3.5 It shall be the responsibility of the Co

ontractor to ensure
e that th
he pipework systems are
e at least 150
0
mm from any electrical conduit,
c cable
e or wiring.
3.6 Pipes enterin

ng or leaving
g trenches orr ducts, shall be square to
o them. All ppipework sha
all be fixed in
n
such a man nner as to be e readily acccessible for tools, welding operationns or removable withoutt
dismantling adjacent pipework.
3.7 Where pipew

work passess through waalls, etc., the Contractor shall
s ensure that these pipes
p are nott
subsequently bedded-in by making g
good by othe er trades.
3.8 Pipework pa assing througgh brick or cconcrete shall be enclose ed in a pipe sleeve of su
uch diameterr
that the pipe maybe removed witho out cutting oro deforming g the pipewoork. In particular wheree
plastic pipess pass throug
gh a fire rate
ed wall, fire arresting
a slee
eves shall bee used with a packing off
intumescentt strip betweeen the pipe aand sleeve.
3.9 Pipework paassing through internal o or external dry

d sheet co
onstruction w walls shall pass
p through
h
formed holess of such size
e that the pip
pework may beb removed without cuttinng or deform
ming the pipe..
3.10 All holes thro

ough such wa alls shall be cclosed after the
t erection and
a testing oof the pipewo ork by meanss
of removable e split closing
g plates on bboth sides of the wall. All closing platees shall be manufactured
m d
from galvaniized sheet stteel of not le ess than 16g g thickness in
n the case off brick or con ncrete walls..
All closing plates shall be painted d or finished d in accorda ance with thhe requirem ments of thiss
specification
n.
4.0 STORAGE AND PROT

TECTION
4.1 The Contracctor shall enssure that all pipework an

nd fittings delivered to thee site for inc
clusion in the
e
Works are stored
s in an approved m manner to avvoid deterioraation due to accidental damage
d andd
atmosphericc conditions.
4.2 The plastic pipework

p components sh hould, at all times, be stored in a loccation offerin
ng protection
n
from direct sunlight, i.e
e. from ultra a violet ligh
ht and the associated heating effe ect, it being
g
remembered d that materia
als close to tthe ground will
w be heated d by reflectioon in sandy lo
ocations.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 4 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
a The storage site should be fla

at, level and free from sh
harp stones, fflints etc.
b Pipe
es should nott be stacked to heights ex
xceeding the
e following:
Pipe size inch/m

mm Max. Stackingg Height
1 Upto 90 mm h) ..................................... 10 x pipe ssize

m dia (3 inch
2 110 to 160 o 6 inch) ........................... 6 x pipe sizze

0mm dia (4 to
3 a (8 inch) or greater ............................ 4 x pipe sizze

200mm dia
N.B:-Smaller pip
pes should o
only be neste
ed inside larger pipes w
which are adjacent to the
e
ground.
c Plastic pipework componentss should be protected

p from direct sunnlight and heat of the sun
n
by providing shad
ded areas.
4.3 Any part off the pipeworrk installation

n which, in the
e opinion of the
t Engineerr, is sub-standard, undulyy
distorted, marked by toools or in a d deteriorated condition shall be removved and rep placed at the
e
expense of the
t Contracto or.
4.4 Before final erection, alla pipework, shall be fre ee of scale, rust, oil or oother forms of o corrosion..
Such defectts shall be removed
r an d the pipew work made goodg in a m manner appro oved by the e
A stoppage or restrictiion occurring
Engineer. Any g after the pipework systtems have been b put intoo
operation whhich is attribu
utable to negllect by the Contractor shaall be rectifiedd by the Con
ntractor at hiss
own expense.
4.5 The open ends of all pipes prepare d for welding, shall be protected
p byy plastic plug
gs. Plugs off
paper, cardb
board, cotton
n waste, hesssian or simila
ar material will
w not be perrmitted.
4.6 Open ends of all pipes intended forr threading shall

s be prov vided with eiither a prote
ective cap orr
screwed soccket to protec
ct the thread ed ends of pipe
p in additio
on to the plasstic plug.
4.7 uPVC pipe work

w shall be unlight. Where pipe worrk exposed to
e protected ffrom direct su t sunlight, itt
should be painted
p by a Titanium D Dioxide based industrial quality whitee paint and NOT of the e
cellulose typ
pe. Pipe wo ork shall be lightly abrad
ded, cleaned, wiped with white spirit and paintedd
nder coat and followed b y white gloss
with white un s paint.
4.8 Poly propyle

ene pipework
k exposed to sunlight sha ed by inclusi on of carbon
all be protecte n black in the
e
compound.
5.0 GRADIENT AND DRAIN

NAGE OF PIP
PELINES
5.1 All pipeworkk shall be erected in such a manner th

hat air may be e vented andd liquids drained from thee
whole or iso olated sectioons of the ssystem. Ex xcept where specified e lsewhere he erein, 32mmm
diameter keyy-operated cocks
c ose unions shall be fitted at all low pooints of wate
with ho er systems to
o
ensure comp plete drainag
ge.
5.2 Pipelines shall be graded

d to fall in the
e direction off flow unless
s indicated ottherwise on the
t drawingss
or elsewheree herein.
5.3 At low pointss in water pippework syste ems, all vesssels and on the dead sidee of each paiir of isolating
g
valves in thee distribution mains, drainn points are to
o be provided
d in accessibble positions. These shalll
be fitted with
h drain cocks s of a type sp
pecified elsewwhere hereinn.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 5 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
6.0 PIPEWORK
K SUPPORTS
S
6.1 All pipeworkk shall be ad

dequately sup pported. All support insta
allations shaall be in acco
ordance with
h
relevant British Standard
d Specificatio
ons and Code es of Practice
e, except wheere modified or extendedd
by the contrract documents. Seismiic restraint hangers
h and supports, ddesigned by a specialist,,
shall be provvided to overrcome earthqquake motion ns.
6.2 Supports shall allow free

e movement for expansio on or contraction of pipew
work and sha
all be located
d
to ensure th
hat pipework k branches o or fittings are
e not fouled by the suppport during expansion
e orr
contraction of
o the pipewo ork service.
6.3 Double bankking of pipewwork from a ssingle suppo ort position will
w be permittted, provided d the normall
operating temperature of the fluids in
n the two pip pes do not differ by moree than 30 deg grees C., butt
only where space
s restric
ctions prohibiit individual support.
s Triple banking w
will not be perrmitted.
6.4 Where doub ble banking is necessaryy, the larger of the two pipes shall bee uppermostt, and where e
pipes are th
he same sizze but manu ufactured from different materials, thhen the pipe
e having the e
st coefficien t of expans
material witth the lowes sion shall be e uppermosst. Support intervals forr
double-bankked pipeworkk of different sizes shall re
elate to the smaller
s size.
6.5 ng pipes shall be supporte

Vertical risin ed at the bas
se and the su
upport shall w
withstand the
e total weightt
of the pipe and
a fluid conttained.
6.6 Supports shall not be pe

ermitted whicch clamp the pipe so thatt it is in contaact with build
ding fabric orr
structure.
6.7 All supports shall be spec

cifically desig
gned for the outside diam
meter of the ppipe concerne
ed (including
g
specified packings). Oveersized brackkets will be re
ejected.
6.8 Where non-fferrous pipew e supported using ferrous pipe clampps or rings, an
work is to be a approved d
o the clamp or ring shall be used to prevent conttact between
plastic coating applied to n the ferrouss
and non-ferrrous surfacess. Where casst iron rollers
s are to be used in contaact with copper pipework,,
these shall be
b copper-pla ated.
6.9 Pipework sh hall be suppported indiviidually by hangers cons

sisting of m
malleable split rings with
h
malleable iro
on sockets or steel cleviss type hangers.
6.10 Pipework sh hall be supported as recom mmended by y the manufacturer as reqquired in the specification
n
and in particcular on both sides of all cchanges in direction. Pipe
ework shall bbe supported such that noo
load is impossed upon plaant machineryy. Pipework k shall be sup
pported at inttervals not ex
xceeding the
e
following :-
6.11 Cast Iron, Stteel or heavy

y gauge copp
per pipework
k.
a 15 mm
m .............................. 1.8
8m
b 20 mm
m .............................. 2.5
5m
c 25 mm
m ............................ 2.75
5m
d 32 mm
m ............................ 2.75
5m
e 40 mm
m .............................. 3.0
0m
f 50 mm
m .............................. 3.0
0m
g 65 mm
m .............................. 3.6
6m
h 80 mm
m .............................. 3.6
6m
Part A - Sectio
on 8 6 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
i 100 mm ............................ 4.5

5m
j 150m ve at interva ls not exceed

mm and abov ding the reco
ommendationns of MSS SP
S 58.
6.12 Steel, light gauge

g copper Plastic water pipeework
a 15mm ............................... 1.2

2m 15 to 50 .............. ............ 1.05
5m
b 20mm ............................... 1.5

5m 65 ....................... ............ 1.02
2m
c 25mm ............................... 1.8

8m 80 ....................... ............ 1.35
5m
d 32mm ............................... 2.2

2m 100 ..................... ............ 1.75
5m
e 40mm ............................... 2.5

5m 150 ..................... ............ 2.00
0m
f 50mm ............................... 2.7

7m 200 ..................... ............ 2.04
4m
g 80mm ............................... 2.7

7m
h 100 & over........................ 3.0

0m
i All pipe supports anufactured in accordance with MSS S

s shall be ma SP 58.
7.0 PIPE EXPAN

NSION
7.1 Pipework sh orted in such a manner as to permit frree movemeent due to ex

hall be suppo xpansion and d
contraction. Pipework su
upports shalll be arrange ed as near asa possible tto joints and
d changes in n
direction and
d each suppoort shall take
e its share off the load. The
T spacing of the suppo orts shall nott
exceed the intervals giv
ven elsewherre herein. Where
W there are two or more pipes the supportt
spacing mayy be based on
o the centre es required byy the smallesst bore pipew
work.
7.2 Vertical risin

ng pipework shall
s be sup ported at the
e base or as indicated too carry the to
otal weight off
anches from risers shall n
the riser. Bra not be used as a means of support foor the riser.
7.3 Provision forr movement due to expaansion and contraction sh

hall be madee either by looops, speciall
expansion jooints or by changes
c in d
direction of the
t pipework
k. Supportss at such points shall be e
arranged to ensure that all moveme nt is taken up op, joint or chhange in dire
u by the loo ection of the
e
pipework.
8.0 AIR VENTIN

NG
8.1 Automatic aiir eliminators

s shall be pro
ovided at all high
h points in
n water pipew
work system. They shalll
be installed at the highes
st points of th
he sections they
t are intended to ventt.
Insect scree
en shall be prrovided on alll open vents
s and overflows.
8.2 Air vents on water systeems shall be of float typee, air eliminattor of approvved manufac cture, havingg
bottom inlet and top outllet with screw
wed connecttions. They shall have a brass body y, float valve
e
and valve seeat, incorpora
ate a check vvalve and shall be so dessigned as to aallow the inte
ernal parts to
o
be removed for maintena ance or inspeection withou
ut disturbing pipework.
p A
Air vents shall be suitable
e
for the syste
em pressure es and tempe eratures. AnA air release e pipe shall be connecte ed to the airr
outlet and ta
aken to the nearest suitabble dischargee point.
9.0 ANTI WATE

ER HAMMER
R CUSHIONS
S
9.1 In all open circuit

c water systems
s therre shall be a series of water hammer cushions in each branch
h
connection and
a in particu ular each verrtical branch or pipe run.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 7 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
9.2 On gravity distribution sy

ystems, Thesse cushions shall
s comprisse a branch iin the pipe with
w a verticall
connection not
n less than n 300mm hig h above the centre line of o the branchh. This connection shalll
be sealed att the top, thus trapping a pocket of airr to act as a cushion.
9.3 On boosted water insta allations, pro prietary water hammer arrestors shhall be provided. Waterr
hammer arreestors shall be
b stainless ssteel construuction with ne
esting type beellows contained within a
casing havin
ng sufficient displacemen
d nt volume to dissipate
d the
e kinetic enerrgy generate
ed.
10.0 PUDDLE FL
LANGES
10.1 Where pipewwork passes through the external walls of the builddings or trencches below ground
g level,,
ply and cast or build pudd
the Contracttor shall supp dle flanges in
nto the struct
cture.
10.2 ges are to be manufacture

Puddle flang ed from the same
s materia
al as the pipeework of which they form
m
a part.
10.3 Each puddlee flange shall comprise a length of pipe, flanged or o screwed aat each end according to o
diameter witth an undrille ange welded on the outside at a poin t where it will be located
ed slip-on fla d
mid-way in the thickness s of the wall. The puddle e flange is to
o be painted externally with two coatss
of bituminou
us paint beforre being builtt into the stru
ucture.
11.0 PIPEWORK
K MATERIAL
11.1 Incoming wa
ater main tapped off from the city wate
er main upto the water stoorage tank sh
hall be uPVC
C
to BS EN 14
452 (former BS
B 3505 Classs E) with so olvent welded
d joints.
11.2 Water transffer pipework

k shall be uP
PVC to BS EN
E 1452 Cla ass E with ssolvent welded joints forr
system presssures upto 7 bar. For ssystem pressures exceeding 7 bar, wwater transfe
er pipe workk
shall be copper to BS EN
N 1057 (Formmer BS 2871, Table X) with
w welded jooints.
11.3 Cold/cooled//hot water distribution pip

pework, exce mbedded in buuilder’s work
ept those em k shall be
a Polypropylene (P
PPR) compossite pipes maanufactured according
a to DIN 8077 an
nd DIN 8078,,
PN 20,
2 SDR 7.4 with electro fusion joints for pipe size
e upto 100mmm dia meter.
b Polypropylene coomposite pip

pes shall consist of a middle layer of sspecially form
mulated fibre
e
glasss between ex
xternal and i nternal layerrs of PPR.
11.4 Cold/cooled//hot water vertical riserss shall be PPPR compositte pipes for pipe sizes upto
u 100mm
m
diameter and d working prressures of u
upto 7 bar at 70deg C and
d copper to B
BS EN 1057 with welded
d
jjoints for pip
pe sizes abovve 100mm diia and pressures exceeding 7 bar.
11.5 Pipework emmbedded in builder’s

b worrk, within batthrooms, kitc
chens, etc. sshall be pipe in pipe PEX
X
pipes to DIN
N 16892 and DIN 16893 wwith DVGW approval.
a
11.6 All pipe sizes indicated on

o drawings a
are clear inte
ernal dia metters.
12.0 PEX PIPES
12.1 General
12.1.1 Cold and hot water distribution pipew ded within builder’s work iinside toilets, bathrooms,,
work embedd
kitchen shall be compose ed of:
a Crosss linked polyyethylene pip g to DIN 16892 and 168993 pulled in a corrugated
pe according d
condduit of ordina
ary polyethyle
ene.
b Fittin
ngs and valve e or DZR construction.
es of bronze
Part A - Sectio
on 8 8 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
12.2 Pipes
12.2.1 The inner pipe shall be a cross linkk polyethylen

ne pipe with
hstanding uppto 95 deg. C at a max..
pressure of 10 bar with
hout deforma ation or dammage. Short time tempeerature loadinng upto 110
0
degree C.
12.2.2 The pipe shall be resista

ant to all nat ural constituents of drink
king water too DIN 2000, disinfectants
d s
and cleaning
g agents to DVGW
D – W2291 and DIN N 2000, anti-c
corrosion ag ents to DIN 1988 T4 (E))
and common n building maaterials, suchh as mortar, cement and plaster.
12.2.3 The pipe ma minimum of 50 years guarantee for the pipes and 10 yearss
anufacturer shall offer m
guarantee fo
or the comple
ete system.
12.2.4 All pipes sha

all be stampe wing clearly the name of the manufac
ed on equal i ntervals show cturers along
g
with the presssure and temperature ra
ating of thesee pipes.
12.2.5 All pipes sha

all be laid so that the 16m
mm pex wate
er pipe can be replaced, iif necessary..
12.3 Fittings & Acccessories
12.3.1 Pipes shall be

b connected ent fittings via a wall box of reinforcedd plastic fitted
d to the differe d with bronze
e
elbow suitabble for 15mm
m or 20mm th hreaded conn nection. The box shouldd be suitably y designed in
n
order to ena
able the repla
acement of e xisting pipes s in the eventt of their dam
mage.
12.3.2 All valves, bo

ox elbows, teees, bends sh hall be of bro
onze or DZR construction
c . Connectio on shall be off
a cone grip unions
u type allowing
a : full flow capacitty, minimum pressure losss, easily detachable with h
torque clearlly defined forr a fool prooff installation. Contractor shall
s use propper tools for assembly ass
recommende ed by manuffacturer, i.e. a assembly pliiers, ratchet torque wrencch, cutters, etc.
e
13.0 JOINTING OF
O PIPES
13.1 uPVC pipe jointing

j uence shall be carried out as per the written rrecommenda
sequ ations of the
e
manufacture er and it musst be stated tthat any omission or variation from thhe jointing prrocedure willl
result in a marked
m reducttion in the eff
fficiency of th
he joint. It is
s essential inn the jointing process thatt
only cleanerr and solventt cement reco ommended by b the manuffacturer is ussed to make joints.
13.2 When makin

ng a joint in high
h ambientt temperature
e conditions the followingg should be observed
o :-
a Store
e the cement in a cool sh
hady place.
b Whe
en possible protect
p pe which is about
the pip a to be in
nstalled from
m direct sunlig
ght.
13.3 Low pressurre copper pipe work sha y or solderedd connections. Joints to
all be jointed by capillary o
sanitary fittin
ngs, valves etc.,
e shall be
e made with h brass comp pression unioons. Solderring shall be e
carried out using
u lead fre
ee solder. Dielectric joint with neoprene or similaar insulator shall
s be fitted
d
at junctions between
b coppper and galvvanized mild steel. Direc ct joints betw
ween copper and
a steel willl
not be permitted. High pressure cop pper pipework shall have e welded joinnts.
13.4 Ferrous pipe

es shall be screwed
s welded. All welds shall be in accorrdance with the relevantt
or w
Piping Desig
gn Code give
en elsewhere e herein. Metthods, other than
t those coovered by the standards,,
maybe used d provided th
hat their suittability is de
emonstrated and that theeir use is the subject off
agreement with
w the Engineer.
13.5 PPR pipewo ork shall be screwed or welded. Welding

W shall be in accorrdance to ma
anufacturerss
recommenda ations and shall
s be carrried out by certified welders. Wheere required, appropriatee
welding macchines shall be
b used.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 9 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
14.0 INSULATION OF PIPEW

WORK
14.1 Pipe work em

mbedded in block walls sshall not be insulated.
14.2 In all other areas,

a pipewoork shall be iinsulated with preformed sections of aaluminium fo
oil faced rigid
d
fibre glass in nimum dens ity 65 Kg/m³, and covered with 20x200 woven glas
nsulation, min ss fibre cloth..
b thoroughly soaked in fire resistant, fungicidal protective seealer prior to
Cloth shall be o application n
and applied whilst still we
et.
14.3 Insulation thickness shalll be as follow

ws:
Pipe
e Size (mm) Insulation Th
hickness (mm
m)
a Upto
o 50 ...................................................... 25
b abovve 50 .................................................... 40
14.4 Cold water services

s ework instal led on roof shall
pipe s be insuulated in a ssimilar fashio
on described
d
above. In other
o areas, cold
c water piipes do not require
r to be insulated.
14.5 All insulated

d pipework in
nstalled on ro
oof, within pllantroom and
d wherever eexposed to view
v shall be
e
cladded withh aluminium sheets
s at lea
ast 0.5 mm thhick.
15.0 WATER STO

ORAGE TAN
NK AND ACC
CESSORIES
S
15.1 The manufa acture and design of the e hot press moulded
m insulated GRP sectional water
w storage
e
tanks shall be
b to the quuality standa rd requireme ents of BS EN E ISO 900 1 and shall comply withh
BS EN 1328 80 glassfibre reinforced p
plastic cistern
ns for cold waater storage..
15.2 Cisterns shaall be manu ufactured byy the hot prress moulded method, gglass reinforrced plastic,,
moulded at temperature es up to 150 0 deg.C usinng isophthalic unsaturate
ted polyester resins, UV
V
stabilized an
nd ‘E’ glassfib
bre reinforce
ement.
15.3 The cistern design

d shall incorporate 1.00 x 1.00m m pillow panels to walls oof insulated cisterns with
h
provision forr flat panels for connectioons and fittin
ngs. Purposee made coveer panels 1.0 00m x 1.00m m
and 1.00m x 0.50m flat panels
p positio
oned to give free draining
g channels.
15.4 Base panelss available ass internally fl anged IFB with

w 1.00m x 1.00m flat paanels, fasten
ners internal,,
or externallyy flanged EF
FB with 1.00m m x 1.00m flat panels an
nd one pillow
w sump panel, fastenerss
external.
15.5 All Surfacess of the panels shall be smooth and d crevice fre
ee to providee hygienic finish and be
e
dimensionally accurate with
w sharply d defined profiles.
15.6 Float valve chambers

c d with central hinged lock
to be provided kable ABS lidd, 1.00m x1.00m in plan,,
with options of 180mm, 300mm,
3 500 mm depth with
w provision for type A aiir gap in com
mpliance with
h
BS EN 1307 76.
15.7 Man access 600mm diam

meter hinged
d lockable AB
BS lid.
15.8 All tanks de

eeper than 1.50m shall be fitted witth internal GRP
G ladders,, external sttandard dutyy
galvanized steel
s access ladders.
15.9 Where parttitions are required,

r theey must be e of full he
eight using standard pa anels. Each
h
compartmen
nt to be capable of suppoorting water on
o either side
e with one sidde empty.
15.10 Panels to be
b rigidly su
upported by a combinattion of stain
nless steel ttie rods inte
ernally and d
b sections externally. Bolts and nuts
galvanized box n used in assembly off tanks shall be stainlesss
steel 316/A4
4 grade.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 10 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
15.11 Steelworks designed

d to BS5950, inte
ernally stainlless steel 316/A4 grade and externally mild steell
galvanized to
t BS729. The cisterns to incorpora w bracing on depths greater than
ate external wall n
1.50m, and tie
t rods for depths
d 2.00m
m and above..
15.12 All cisterns to

t be installe us foundation, close centter beams co
ed on either fflat continuou onforming to
o
manufacture er’s specification of flatne
ess and defle
ection.
15.13 Installation shall

s be carried out by ap
pproved insta
allers.
15.14 Extruded synthetic rubbe

er sealing sttrip to be use
ed covering full width of panel flange
e providing a
watertight se
eal.
15.15 Testing shalll be carried out on comp

pletion of ins
stallation and
d to be comppleted within ten working
g
days of asse
embly.
15.16 The testing of

o panels and sealant sh
hall be as listted by water research ceenter conform
ming to waterr
fittings Byela
aws Schemee.
15.17 Certificate of WRAS app

proval shall b
be provided.
15.18 Composite Material

M Spec
cifications
a Denssity ............................................................. 1800 kg

g/m³ ............. ....................... ISO 1183
3
b Wate n ................................................0.18 mg
er Absorption m ............... ........................... ISO 62
2
c mal ...................................... 2.1 x10-5 Deg.C

Coeffficient Therm D ......... ................... ASTM D696
6
d ansion flexurral strength ............................... 220 Mpa ............... ......................... ISO 178
Expa 8
e s................................................. 12 Gp
Flexural Modules pa ................ ......................... ISO 178
8
f Tenssile Strength ................................................. 100 Mpa ............... .................... ISO R 3268

8
g act Strength..................................................180 kj//m²............... ......................... ISO 179

Impa 9
h ctivity ....................................... 0.6 W/m

Therrmal Conduc m².C ............. .............. BS 7491:Part 3
i Glasss Content ....................................................... 30 %
j ess..............................................40 mm
Insulation thickne
k on .................................................0.00
Lightt Transmissio 0
Panel streng
gth shall be fully
f complia E 13280, giving a factorr of safety in excess of 6
ant with BS EN
times workin
ng pressure against
a ruptu
ure.
16.0 VALVES
16.1 Valves shall be provided

d to isolate ea
ach item of plant
p and eac
ch main brannch.
16.2 The Contracctor shall make

m all rea sonable atte empts to en nsure the mmanufacture of valves iss
consistent th
hroughout the
e whole of th e installation
n in order to minimise
m stocck holding off spares. Alll
valves shall be WRAS approved.
16.3 Valves and cocks

c of any
y tank or vesssel not within
n a secure bu
uilding shall bbe lockable.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 11 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
Any valves and cocks exposed

e to p
public view, shall be of the easy cleean pattern and have a
polished finissh.
16.4 Valves in pla

ant room, tan
nk rooms etcc., shall be off the handwh
heel pattern.
16.5 All valves shall be locatted so as too provide ea asy access foor operation and servicing. Controll
valves shall normally be installed in h
horizontal lines with stem
ms vertical.
16.6 Each such regulating

r va e fitted with a regulation indicator caalibrated in te
alve shall be enths of one
e
revolution off the handwh
heel.
16.7 Ball, Globe and

a oblique valves
v shall b
be used on service
s pipelines where reegulation is required, and d
shall be supp
plied and fitte
ed in position
ns indicated on
o the Contract Drawingss. Valves sh hall be of the
e
same nomin nal bore as thhe pipeline inn which they are indicatedd.
16.8 Globe and oblique

o valves used for ci rcuit regulatiion shall hav
ve characterizzed plug disc
cs.
16.9 Handwheelss shall be de esigned for o ure suitable ffor safe handling. Theyy
operation at a temperatu
shall be of the
t open whheel type ma anufactured from
f malleab
ble iron or ddie cast alum
minium alloy..
Handles sha all have 'open
n/shut' directtion indicatio
on.
16.10 Provide all supply

s lines to bidets with
h check valve
es.
16.11 Provide cold

d water supply to water he
eaters with check
c valves.
16.12 Provide angle valves for incoming wa

ater supply to
o all fittings.
16.13 Provide back flow preventor at conn

nections to all medical, la
aundry and kkitchen equip
pment, waterr
coolers and as required by BS 6700..
16.14 Globe valves upto 50mm m dia shall h ave threaded d ends with bronze bodyy, screwed bonnet, rising g
stem, metal to metal sea at and disk. Globe valv ves 65mm an nd larger shaall be cast iro
on body and
d
bonnet, outsside screw, riising stem, ccopper alloy trim,
t secure guided disk aand flanged ends.
16.15 Gate valves upto 50mm dia. shall be e bronze body with threaaded ends, bbronze wedg ge disc, high
h
quality packking and glan
nd, non risinng stem with h screwed boonnet. Gatee valves 65m mm dia. and d
larger shall be
b flanged ca
ast iron bodyy, non rising stem,
s bronze
e trim, wedgee disc type co
omplete withh
hand wheelss, bolted bon
nnet and stuffffing box.
16.16 Check valve es upto 50mm

m dia. shall b e threaded bronze
b patterrn swing typee with metal to
t metal seatt
and screw-inn cap. Valve
es 65mm dia a. and abovee shall be flan
nged cast iro n swing typee with copperr
alloy seat an
nd disc comp
ponents.
16.17 Pressure red ducing valve

es shall be o
of the adjustaable type, of brass consttruction with union ends,,
integral stain
nless steel screen
s strain
ner, nylon re
einforced Buna-N diaphra ragm and sta ainless steell
seat. Presssure gauges shall be fitte
ed at inlet and
d outlet.
16.18 Valves shall always be in

nstalled in acccessible loca
ations to permit easy opeeration and maintenance.
m .
16.19 Special caree must be exe ercised in thee installation of screwed valves
v to avooid straining their bodies,,
and preventiing the gate oro seat from closing tight. The wrenc ch shall alwaays be applieed to the side
e
being attachhed to the va alve. When attaching pipe to a valve e already in place, a sec cond wrench h
shall be usedd to hold the valve while tthe pipe is be
eing tightened
d. A pipe shhall not be sccrewed so farr
into a valve as to damag ge the seat.
16.20 Unless otherrwise require

ed by BS Sta ndards and Codes,
C backfflow preventeers shall be of
o the doublee
check valve type incorpoorating resilie
ent elastic and
d positively tight seals deesigned to pe
ermit water to
o
flow in one direction onlly. Backflow w preventers s shall be suitable for insstallation in horizontal
h orr
vertical posittion.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 12 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
Construction
n shall be:
a Bodyy - Bro nze
b Checck valve - Bra ss
c Drain
n valve - Bra ss
d Seals/Membranc
ce - Nitriile : NBR Rubber
e Sprin
ngs/bolts/Nuts - Staiinless steel
16.21 Valves shalll be pressurre rated for 16 bar. All valves used
d on this prooject shall bear
b the BSII
kitemark as a quality ass
surance.
17.0 STRAINERS
S
17.1 The Contracctor shall insttall strainers in the pipelin

ne before the
e following iteems of equip
pment :-
a Presssure reducin
ng valves.
b Sole
enoid valves.
c omatically controlled valve

Auto es.
d Pum
mps.
17.2 Strainers shall be suitab

ble for withstaanding the maximum
m operating tempperature and
d pressure off
the pipeline in which they
y are installe
ed.
17.3 Install strainers in pipelin

ne before all equipment as
a recommen
nded by equiipment manu
ufacturers.
17.4 Strainers sizze upto 50m

mm dia shall be bronze body
b with thrreaded endss and open mesh monell
metal screen n.
17.5 Strainers sizze 65mm dia and larger sshall be of the

e cast iron sttraight Y- typpe. The strain
ners shall be
e
complete with cast iron body and ca ap, steel screeen rods and d standard pperforated sta ainless steell
screens.
17.6 Duplex Filterrs
Where indica ated on drawwings install d

duplex filters complete with cast iron bbody, quick reelease coverr
for ease of basket removal withoutt the need for f tools or lifting gear, resilient cov ver, O-seals,,
multiple lightt weight baskets for easyy manhandlin ng, sliding ga
ate valves wwith positive compression
c n
seating, stepped angle basket seatt for positive e basket seating, robusst basket support cagess
complete witth replaceable mesh inse erts, external valve positioon indicatorss showing whhich chamberr
is on streamm, replaceablee valve seatss.
18.0 ELECTRIC WATER

W HEA
ATERS
18.1 Hot water he eater shall bee either horizo

ontal or vertical type. Where
W specifieed these shall be suitable
e
for under sin n. Vessel s hall be forme
nk installation ed from glass lined steel . Heating element
e shalll
be electric im
mmersion typ pe.
18.2 Each heaterr shall be prov

vided with a tthermostat with
w adjustable setting in tthe range 32 to 82 deg. C
and a safetyy thermal cut out operablee at 90 deg. C with manu
ual reset.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 13 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
18.3 The vessel and electrica

al componen nts shall be encased in a sheet mettal enclosure
e with baked d
enamel finish. Tank shaall be insulate
ed either with
h fiberglass or
o PU foam. A temperatture indicatorr
mounted on the casing shall
s display the temperature of waterr.
18.4 Each heaterr shall be sup pplied with a safety valve e inlet unit off brass compplete with sto
op valve, non
n
return valve,, relief valve,, outlet for exxpansion watter with pipe to drain.
18.5 Heaters sha

all be provided with Magn
nesium anode
es for additio
onal protectioon against co
orrosion.
19.0 THERMOST
TATIC MIXIN
NG VALVES
The thermosstatic mixing valve shall be a fully digital recirculation valve ffor installatio
on within the
e
plantroom and
a shall be
e designed specifically to be the primary
p tempperature controller in a
continuouslyy pumped reccirculating ho
ot water systtems.
The mixing valve

v shall ha
ave the follow
wing feature
es:
a Accu
urate control of blended w
water temperratures within
n ±1°C at thee draw off po
oints.
b Auto
omatic shut off
o of the hot water flow upon cold watter inlet suppply failure.
c grammable set point rang

Prog ge of 29 – 71°C
d Abilitty to thermally disinfect a

at recommen
nded tempera
atures.
e Prog
grammable High/Low
H tem
mperature ala
arm display.
f Prog
grammable te error level for safety shutt down.
emperature e
20.0 VARIABLE-S
SPEED BOO
OSTER PUM
MPS
20.1 Description: Factory-as ssembled an nd -tested, fluid-handling system foor domestic water, with
h
pumps, pipin ng, valves, specialties, an
nd controls, and
a mounted d on base. PPump types shall be one
e
of the following as indica
ated in the eqquipment sch hedule:
a Pum
mps (For Pum
mps Upto 10 L/s):
1 nd suction, close-couple
Type: En ed, single-sttage, overhuung-impellerr, centrifugall
pump.
2 Casing: Radially
R splitt; cast iron, unless
u otherw
wise indicatedd.
3 Impeller: Closed, AS STM B 584 cast bronze

e or stainleess steel; sttatically and
d
dynamically balanced a
and keyed to
o shaft.
4 Shaft and Shaft Sleevve: Stainless steel shaftt, with coppeer-alloy shaftt sleeve and
d
deflector.
5 Seal: Mechanical.
6 Orientation
n: Mounted
d horizontally
y or vertically as indicatedd.
b Pum
mps (For Pum
mps Above 10
0 L/s):
1 Type: End suctio on, frame-mounted, separately

s coupled, single-stage,
s ,
overhung-impeller, cen
ntrifugal pum
mp. Include back-pullout
b ddesign.
2 Casing: Radially
u wise indicatedd.
otherw
Part A - Sectio
on 8 14 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik

d
and keyed to
o shaft.
4 Shaft and Shaft Sleevve: Stainles

ss-steel shaftt, with coppeer-alloy shaftt sleeve and
d
deflector.
5 Seal: Mechanical.
6 Bearing: Pre-greased
d, permanenttly shielded ball
b type.
7 Coupling: Flexible, w ith metal gua

ard.
c Pum mp Head Excceeding 12 Bar):

mps (For Pum
1 Type: Vertical,
V in--line, multistage, separrately couppled, overhu
ung-impeller,,
centrifugall pump.
2 Casing: Cast-iron
C or ssteel base and stainless--steel chambber.
3 d dynamicallyy balanced and

Impeller: Closed, staiinless steel; statically and a keyed to
o
shaft.
4 Shaft: Sta
ainless steell.
5 Seal: Mechanical.
6 Bearing: Water-lubriccated sleeve type.
d Moto
ors: Single speed, 290 00 RPM maximum, Cla ass-F insulaation, with pre-greased,
p ,
perm
manently shie
elded, ball-tyype bearings.. Select motors that will not overload
d through fulll
range of pump performance ccurve.
e Pipin
ng: Copper tube and co
opper fittings,, unless othe
erwise indicatted..
f Conttrol Panel: Factory insttalled and connected

c as
s an integraal part of booster pump;;
automatic for muultiple-pump , variable-sp on, with loadd control an
peed operatio nd protection
n
functtions.
1 ogic: Solid-sstate system with transducers, program

Control Lo mmable microprocessor,,
VFC, and other
o devicess in controlle FC for pump motors large
er. Install VF er than 25 hp
p
in separate
e panel; sam
me type as motor control panel enclossure.
2 Motor Con
ntroller: NEM
MA ICS 2, va
ariable-frequency, solid-sstate type.
3 Enclosure: NEMA 25
50, Type 4.
4 erload Protecction: Overload relay in each phase..

Motor Ove
5 Starting Devices:
D Ha and-off-autom or switch for each pump
matic selecto p in cover off
control pan
nel, plus pilo
ot device for automatic
a co
ontrol.
i Dup
plex, Automaatic, Alternatting Starter: Switches lead pump to lag main
n
pum
mp and to two
o-pump operration.
ii Trip
plex, Sequen
nce (Lead-La
ag-Lag) Startter: Switchees lead pump to one lag
g
main pump and to three-pum
mp operation.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 15 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
6 Pump Ope
eration and S
Sequencing: Pressure-s
sensing methhod.
i Time Delay: C
Controls pum
mp on-off operation; addjustable from 1 to 300
0
seco
onds.
7 VFC: Volltage-source , pulse-width

h, modulating
g-frequency cconverter forr each pump..
8 Manual Bypass:
B Maagnetic conttactor arranged to trannsfer to con
nstant-speed
d
operation upon VFC fa
ailure.
9 Instrumenttation: Sucttion and disc

charge pressure gages.
10 Lights: Running
R light for each pum
mp.
11 Alarm Sign
nal Device: Sounds alarm when bac
ckup pumps are operating.
i Time Delay: C m operation; adjustable from 1 to 300 seconds,,

Controls alarm
with
h manual rese
et.
12 Thermal-b
bleed cutoff.
13 Water-storrage-tank, lo
ow-level cutout.
14 on-pressure cutout.
High-suctio
15 Low-discharge-pressu re cutout.
16 High-disch
harge-pressu
ure cutout.
17 Building automation
a ssystem interfface: provide
e auxiliary ccontacts for interface to
o
building au
utomation syystem.
g Base
e: Structura
al steel.
21.0 CONSTANT OOSTER PU MPS

T-SPEED BO
21.1 Description: Factory-as ssembled an nd -tested, fluid-handling system foor domestic water, with
h
pumps, pipinng, valves, sp
pecialties, an
nd controls, and
a mounted on base. P Pump type shhall be one off
the following
g as indicated
d in equipme ent schedules:
a Pum
mps (For Pum
mps Upto 10 L/s):
1 nd suction close-couple
Type: En ed, single-sttage, overhuung-impeller, centrifugall
pump.
2 Casing: Radially
R splitt; cast iron un
nless otherw
wise indicatedd.

d
and keyed to
o shaft.
4 Shaft and Shaft Sleevve: Stainless steel shaftt, with coppeer-alloy shaftt sleeve and
d
deflector.
5 Seal: Mechanical.
6 Orientation
n: Mounted
d horizontally
y or vertically as indicatedd.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 16 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
b Pum
mps (For Pum
mps Exceedin
ng 10 L/s):
1 Type: End suctio on, frame-mounted, separately

s coupled, single-stage,
s ,
overhung-impeller, cen
ntrifugal pum
mp. Include back-pullout
b ddesign.
2 Casing: Radially
u wise indicatedd.
otherw

d
and keyed to
o shaft.
4 Shaft and Shaft Sleevve: Stainles

ss-steel shaftt, with coppeer-alloy shaftt sleeve and
d
deflector.
5 Seal: Mechanical.
6 Bearing: pre-greased
d, permanenttly shielded ball
b type.
7 Coupling: Flexible, w ith metal gua

ard.
c Pum
mps (For Pum
mps Head Exxceeding 12 Bar):
B
1 Type: Vertical, multtistage, separately coup

pled, overhuung-impeller, centrifugall
pump.
2 Casing: Cast-iron
C or ssteel base and stainless--steel chambber.
3 d dynamicallyy balanced and

Impeller: Closed, staiinless steel; statically and a keyed to
o
shaft.
4 Shaft: Sta
ainless steell.
5 Seal: Mechanical.
6 Bearing: Water-lubriccated sleeve type.
d Moto
ors: Singlee speed 290 00 RPM ma aximum, Claass-F insulaation, with pre-greased,
p ,
perm
manently shie
elded, ball-tyype bearings.. Select motors that will not overload
d through fulll
range of pump performance ccurve.
e ng: Copper tube and co

Pipin opper fittings unless otherrwise indicateed.
f Conttrol Panel: Factory insttalled and connected

c ass an integraal part of booster pump;;
automatic for muultiple-pump,, constant-sp
peed operatiion, with loaad control an
nd protection
n
functtions.
1 Control Lo ogic: Electtromechanica

al system with
w switchess, relays orr Solid-state
e
system with transduceers, program
mmable micro
oprocessor aand other deevices in thee
controller.
2 Motor Con ntroller: NEM MA ICS 2, general-purpo ose, Class A,, WYE Delta a or direct on
n
line to mattch the requirrement of Local Authoritie
es with underr voltage rele
ease feature,,
motor-circuit-protector--type disconnect, and short-circuit prootective deviice.
3 Enclosure: NEMA 25
50, Type 4.
4 Motor Ove
erload Protecction: Overload relay in each phase..
Part A - Sectio
on 8 17 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
5 Starting Devices:
D Ha and-off-autommatic selecto
or switch for each pump
p in cover off
control pan
nel, plus pilo
ot device for automatic
a co
ontrol.
i Dup
plex, Automaatic, Alternatting Starter: Switches lead pump to lag main
n
pum
mp and to two
o-pump operration.
ii Trip
plex, Sequen
nce (Lead-La
ag-Lag) Startter: Switchees lead pump to one lag
g
main pump and to three-pum
mp operation.
6 Pump Op peration and Sequencing: Current-- or pressu re- sensing method ass
indicated.
i Time Delay: C
Controls pum
mp on-off operation; addjustable from 1 to 300
0
seco
onds.
7 Instrumenttation: Sucttion and disc

charge pressure gages.
8 Lights: Running
R light for each pum
mp.
9 Alarm Sign ckup pumps are operating.

nal Device: Sounds alarm when bac
i Time Delay: C m operation; adjustable from 1 to 300 seconds,,

Controls alarm
with
h manual rese
et.
10 Thermal-b
bleed cutoff.
11 Water-storrage-tank, lo
ow-level cutout.
12 on-pressure cutout.
High-suctio
13 Low-discharge-pressu re cutout.
14 High-disch
harge-pressu
ure cutout.
15 Building Automation
A S de auxiliary contacts forr interface to
System Interfface: Provid o
building au
utomation syystem.
g Base
e: Structura
al steel.
22.0 CARTRIDGE
E TYPE WAT
TER FILTER
R
22.1 Provide cartridge type water filters att following location:
22.1.1 At the entry to all cold wa

ater connecttions to kitche
en and pantrry sinks.
22.1.2 At the sinks in dark room

ms.
22.2 Filter shall be

b in-line to the
t appliance e and installed in an acc
cessible mannner to facilittate cleaning
g
easily. Filteering media shall
s be food grade polyp
propylene carrtridge to achhieve water quality
q upto 5
microns.
22.3 g shall be shatter proof t ransparent plastic.

Filter casing p Cov
ver shall be ffitted with air vent of the
e
spring releasse type.
23.0 HYDROSTA
ATIC TESTIN
NG OF WATE
ER PIPING SYSTEMS
S
23.1 All water pip

ping systems drostatically tested for en
s shall be hyd nsuring compplete tightnes
ss under the
e
test pressure e duration of time as spec
e and for the cified under the
t respectivve system co oncerned.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 18 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
23.2 Systems ma
ay be tested as
a a whole o
or in sections
s to facilitate the progresss of the work
k.
23.3 No part of any

a piping sy ystem shall be tested to
o pressure le
ess than thee specified te
est pressure
e
measured att the highest point of the system.
23.4 Care shall be taken not to

t subject anny equipmentt, apparatus or device to a pressure exceeding
e itss
prescribed te
est pressuree as obtainedd from its na
ame plate da
ata or from mmanufacturerr's publishedd
data. Pressure tests sh hall be appliied before connecting
c piping
p to eqquipment. Relief
R valvess
instruments,, automatic air
a vents and all devices that
t might be
e damaged bby the test prressure shalll
be removed, disconnecte ed or blanke
ed off.
23.5 No pressure plied against the closed ga

e shall be app ate of gate va
alves. All vaalves shall be
e in the open
n
position but not complete
ely back sea ted during te
esting. End valves shall be capped.
23.6 In testing flanged piping, temporarry blank flan b installed and firmly anchored
nges shall be a to
o
accommoda ate all develo
oped end thru
ust.
23.7 All piping tha

at can be damaged by en nd thrust dev
veloping fromm hydrostaticc testing shall be properlyy
anchored du uring testing especially att changes of direction.
23.8 The piping system

s to be tested shall b y plugging and blanking aall openings in
be closed by n the system
m
in an approvved manner and filled sloowly with waater making sure
s to vent aall entrapped
d air. Plugss
shall be rele
eased temporrarily to ensu
ure that wate
er has reache
ed all parts oof the system
m.
Pressure shall be appliedd to the syste

em by means s of a hand pump
p drawingg from a water container..
The pump discharge
d shall be conne ected to the system through a globee valve, chec ck valve and
d
recently calib
brated pressure gauge off suitable ran
nge to have the test presssure read in the
t middle off
the range.
23.9 After the test pressure is reached, the

e pump shalll be blocked off by closingg the globe valve
v and the
e
variations off pressure in the system m
monitored on
n the pressure gauge.
23.10 The test pre

essure shall be maintaine ystem for 24 hours duringg which time
ed on the sy e the system
m
shall have no noticeable drop in presssure.
23.11 While the syystem is undeer pressure, a careful insp

pection shall be made of all pipes and d joints and iff
any leaks in joints or eviidence of de
efective pipe or fitting is disclosed
d thee defective work
w shall be
e
corrected im
mmediately by y replacing d
defective parrts with new joints and m materials. No make shiftt
repairs or ap
pplication of any
a repair co ompound will be permitte ed.
23.12 After the corrrection is made the presssure test sh

hall be repeated until a coompletely tig
ght system iss
ensured.
23.13 The test pre

essure shall be
b released slowly so as
s not to produ
uce shocks aand sudden contractionss
that might da
amage the piping.
p
23.14 All piping shall be tested to at least 1 1/2 times the

e system wo
orking pressuure.
24.0 POTABLE WATER

W PIPING STERILIIZATION AFTER COMMISSIONING
On completion of the pottable cold wa ater supply services syste em includingg any parts off the existing
g
service theyy shall be stterilized by tthe application of chlorin ne. The minnimum requirements forr
chlorination shall be to flu
ush the pipew work thoroug
ghly to remov ve dirt. Chloorine shall then be added d
to the storagge tanks and d water draw wn from all draw-off
d poin
nts until chloorine is detec
cted at each h
outlet point. The mains are then to be allowed to t stand for a period for 224 hours, aftter which the e
outlets are to
o be tested for
f chlorine. If chlorine is not found to be presennt, all the ab bove shall be e
repeated unttil residual chhlorine is dettected. Afte
er this, the sy
ystem is to bee completely flushed with h
clean water and precautions taken to o avoid subseequent conta amination of the installation.
Part A - Sectio
on 8 19 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
Propos
Al-Erk
kyah, Lusail City,
C Doha, Qa
atar for Sheik
The final req

quirements for
f chlorinatioon will be ad dvised by the Engineer dduring the course
c of the
e
or shall howevver, allow in his tender for the requirem
contract. The contracto ments as outtlined above..
25.0 TESTING OF
O EQUIPME
ENT
25.1.1 After installa uipment sha ll be tested for performa

ation, all equ ance and prooper functioning and forr
demonstratin ng to the fu ull satisfactio
on of the Engineer
E ment meets
that the equipm s the designn
requirements as shown on o the Drawiings and as specified.
s
25.2 Should any equipment provep defectiive, unsatisfa

actory or doees not compply with the Specification,
S ,
the Contracttor shall corre
ect, repair or replace suchh equipment or his own acccount as dirrected by thee
Engineer. Affter the correection is madde, subseque ent tests shall be perform
med until the equipment
e iss
proven to fulfil the requirements to thhe entire satis
sfaction of th
he Engineer.
26.0 REJECTION
N OF EQUIPMENT
26.1 Equipment shall

s be rejec
cted if :-
a It has a capacity less than req

quired.
b It's electric
e ed.
motorr is overloade
c It causes objectio
onable noise
e or vibration.
27.0 TESTING AND ADJUST

TMENT OF C
CONTROLS
All controls and

a instrume ents shall bee operated simultaneously with the e quipment or system thatt
they control and tested fo
or proper, acccurate and dependable
d functioning aand operation.
All controls and ents shall be calibrated and adjusted to the satisfaaction of the Engineer.
a instrume
28.0 GOVERNME OCAL AUTH ORITIES

ENT AND LO
Perform at appropriate
a tim he currency of site work, all tests requuired by Gove
mes during th ernment andd
Local Authoorities who may
m from tim
me to time have
h jurisdic
ction over thhe work, and d obtain the
e
necessary certificates off approval. LLocal regulations shall bee strictly folloowed.
E
End of Sectio
on
Part A - Sectio
on 8 20 of 20 July 2015
5
Plumbing
PART A - SECTION 9
SOIL, WASTE VENT AND STORM WATER SYSTEMS
Revision History

PART A - SECTION 9
SOIL, WASTE VENT AND STORM WATER SYSTEMS
INDEX
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK. ................................................................................................................................3
2.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................3
INTERNAL DRAINAGE ......................................................................................................................................3
3.0 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................................3
4.0 CLEANOUTS ON SOIL WASTE VENT AND STORMWATER INSTALLATION ...................................4
5.0 MATERIAL ..............................................................................................................................................5
6.0 FLOOR / ROOF / BALCONY DRAINS ...................................................................................................5
EXTERNAL DRAINAGE .....................................................................................................................................6
7.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................................6
8.0 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................................6
9.0 MANHOLES ............................................................................................................................................8
10.0 GULLY GRATES ....................................................................................................................................8
11.0 SUMP PUMPS ........................................................................................................................................8
12.0 TESTING OF DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE SYSTEMS .......................................................................9

Soil, Waste Vent and Storm Water Systems
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK.
1.1 The work shall include design check, supply, installation, testing, commissioning, adjustment and
setting to work of the drainage installation.
1.2 By virtue of carrying out a check on the complete design, the contractor is to assume full
responsibility for the correct functioning of the system and to carry any liability or guarantee as
may be necessary to protect all parties in this regard.
1.3 The drainage services subcontractor shall be responsible for coordination with other trades and
services and shall provide all materials, labour and supervision, equipment, tools, appliance,
services, etc. for carrying out the following items of works:
a Soil and waste drainage systems.
b Storm water drainage systems.
c Noise suppression measures for plant and equipment installed within this section of the
contract.
d Protective painting of all materials installed within this section of the contract.
e Identification of all services.
f Electrical power and control panels for power supply to equipment including cabling from
panels to respective equipment. Power supply terminating in an isolating switch
terminating within 3 meters of each equipment shall be provided by the electrical
subcontractor.
g All builder's work including breaking and making good of walls, floors, etc., equipment
foundation pads, sleeves, etc.
2.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.1 System Design
This shall be a gravity drainage system designed in accordance with the recommendations of the
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
The system will be two pipe, soil and waste together with vent installation.
All internal waste, soil and vent pipes shall be connected to the underground city service mains
through a series of gully traps and manholes as required. All work shall be installed and tested in
accordance with BS EN 12056 code of practice for sanitary works.
Basement car park drainage shall be collected into sump pit located in basement floor, then
pumped to main drainage network through pressure break manholes.
A separate rain water system will be installed to collect all rain water from the roof and then to be
collected with storm water tank in the basement.
INTERNAL DRAINAGE
3.0 INSTALLATION
3.1 Vent pipes shall extend through roof and terminate 600mm above it with vent cowl. Vent pipes
passage through the roof shall be made watertight by proper flashing.

3.2 All changes of direction shall be gradual and not abrupt, 45 degree fittings shall be used
wherever possible, and 90 degree fittings shall be of the longsweep type. All unnecessary turns
and off sets shall be carefully avoided, and run as directly as possible from the sanitary fixtures to
the vertical stacks.
3.3 Concealed pipes shall be installed in such a manner as to permit easy accessibility for
maintenance this applies particularly to valve locations.
3.4 All pipes shall be fixed in neatly arranged lines, and adequately pitched horizontal lines to allow
the system to be properly vented and drained. Air pockets, traps and sags shall be carefully
avoided.
3.5 Supports, clamps and hangers shall be made of galvanized steel with rubber internal rubber seal,
fixed with drilled plugs. Cutting and pinning of fixings will not be permitted.
3.6 Run building drains at a minimum grade of 1% (1:100) pitch unless otherwise noted, downward in
the direction of flow. Pitch branch connections to stacks from fixtures at 2% (1:50) where
possible.
3.7 Provide all the required appurtenances to make the drainage system complete in compliance with
code requirements including traps, pipe fittings, hangers, and the like.
3.8 Wherever possible, vent stack offsets shall be made with 45 degree fittings.
3.9 Take special care in setting roof drains to ensure that they are set at an elevation which will
prelude formation of puddles.
3.10 Install connections to roof drains in conjunction with the roofing specified under civil works, so
that the building is adequately protected during construction from damage by storm water.
3.11 No short radius bends to be used. Use short "Tee-Wye" fittings in vertical piping only.
3.12 Any piping passing through roofs shall be so arranged to be a minimum of 300mm (1 ft.) from
walls or other obstructions so as to permit proper flashings which are provided by another trade.
3.13 Where drainage pipework crosses fire rated partitions, walls and floors, provide proprietary fire
rated intumescent sleeves with a fire rating equal to or greater than the fire rating of the
respective wall or floor.
3.14 Long horizontal runs of soil and waste pipework shall be vented from the top end, whether
indicated or not on drawings.
4.0 CLEANOUTS ON SOIL WASTE VENT AND STORMWATER INSTALLATION
4.1 Cleanouts shall be installed at each change of direction of drainage pipes, greater than 45
degrees, inside the building, and where indicated on the drawings. Cleanouts shall be not more
than 10m apart in horizontal lines. A cleanout shall be provided at or near the foot of each
vertical waste or soil stack.
4.2 Cleanouts on concealed piping shall be extended through and terminate flush with finished wall
or floor. Pits or chases may be left in the wall or floor, provided they are of sufficient size to
permit removal of the cleanout plug and proper cleaning of the system.
4.3 Where it is necessary to conceal a cleanout plug, a heavy duty covering plate shall be provided,
which will permit ready access to the plug.
4.4 Cleanout plugs shall be of heavy duty with seal and lock. Final finish shall be to the approval of
the Architect.

4.5 Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as the pipes up to 110mm pipe diameter and not
less than 110mm for larger piping.
4.6 Cleanouts shall be so installed that there is a clearance of not less than 45cm for the purpose of
rodding and cleaning.
4.7 Provide cleanouts at foot of all stacks, changes of directions, at the ends of branch runs, in
straight runs as required and where indicated.
5.0 MATERIAL
5.1 Unless otherwise indicated, all above ground drainage pipes and fittings (soil, waste, vent, rain
water, AC condensate drain) shall be uPVC to BS EN 1329 for pipe sizes 82mm dia and above
and MuPVC/ABS to BS 5255 for pipe sizes 50mm dia and smaller. All pipework shall be with
push fit joints.
5.2 Drainage pipes buried underground up to manhole shall be uPVC to BS EN 1401 with push fit
joints.
5.3 Sewage pipe between manholes shall be uPVC to BS EN 1401 with push fit joints and protected
with concrete encasement.
5.4 Pumped discharge from sump pumps and sewage pumps shall be HDPE to DIN 19535 with
electric socket welded joints.
5.5 Drainage pipes for commercial kitchen shall be HDPE to DIN 19535 with electric socket welded
joints.
5.6 Acoustic lagging shall be provided for all horizontal drainage pipes, installed within ceiling voids
as detailed in drawings.
5.7 All pipes under building and those subject to traffic specially under roads shall be protected with
reinforced concrete.
6.0 FLOOR / ROOF / BALCONY DRAINS
6.1 Floor drains unless otherwise indicated shall have traps of a minimum water seal of 7cm. The
open area of strainer shall be at least two thirds of the cross-sectional area of the drain line to
which it connects. Floor drains shall have cover of heavy duty stainless steel (subject to
Engineer Approval) with a removable strainer and cover plate. Floor drain shall have built in
rodding eye.
All floor drains / cleanouts must be coordinated with floor tiling layout. Funnel floor drains, within
plantrooms, shall include a Nickle bronze funnel secured to the floor grating.
Floor drains / gratings / cleanouts in commercial kitchen and laundry shall be stainless steel
grade 316.
6.2 Roof drains shall be epoxy coated, cast iron body with membrane flashing clamp, seepage
flange, and convertible 45º and 90º outlets, gravel guard to suit insulation and ballast or pavers
thickness, cast metal, oven cured epoxy coated dome.
6.3 Balcony drain cover shall be of stainless steel with non-trapped sump.
6.4 Flower bed drain shall be heavy duty, dome type, cast iron body with bottom outlet complete with
combination membrane flashing clamp / gravel guard, low silhouette dome and stainless steel
mesh over dome, no floor trap is required.
6.5 Channel grating shall be heavy duty ductile iron to dimensions as indicated on drawings.

EXTERNAL DRAINAGE
7.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
7.1 Pipe connections to manholes, collection tanks and percolating pits shall be made in a
completely watertight and approved manner.
7.2 Pipes shall be kept clean until final acceptance of the work. Exposed ends of all incomplete
lines shall be closed with wooden plugs and adequately secured at all times when pipe laying is
not actually in progress.
7.3 Pipes shall be installed on a good foundation and adequate means taken to prevent settlement.
Pipes laid in trenches shall be provided with a solid uniform bearing throughout their entire
length.
7.4 Pipes shall not be buried at less than 60 cm below finished grade for protection against
mechanical damage. Pipes shall not be run closer than 1m to building bearing walls and footings
for protection against building settlement.
7.5 All pipes shall be laid to a uniform slope. Slopes of sewer drain shall be limited to 3% maximum.
The free vertical drop of a sewer pipe into a manhole shall be limited to 45cm between the invert
level of the pipe opening and the bottom of the manhole. Where conditions necessitate that the
drop would exceed 45cm at the maximum slope of 3% a drop manhole shall be used.
7.6 Trenches shall be kept free of water by pumping, use of well points, underdrains or other
approved means during pipe laying operations so that all pipe joints are made in the dry.
7.7 Precautions shall be taken to protect incomplete work from floating due to storms or from any
other cause. All pipe lines or structures not stable against uplift during construction shall be well
braced or otherwise protected.
7.8 All completed underground lines shall be subject to the inspection and approval of the Engineer.
All pipes shall be true to line and grade. The full circle of the pipe shall be visible at the
manholes.
8.0 INSTALLATION
8.1 The drains shall be laid truly straight in line and to an even gradient.
8.2 Excavations shall be made true and even to falls. The bottoms being trimmed to correct level
and well rammed. Remove mud, rock projections, boulders and hard spots and replace with
approved fill material well consolidated.
8.3 Minimum width of trench shall be 300mm greater than external diameter of pipe.
8.4 Any trenches excavated in error to a greater depth than required shall be in-filled back to the
required level with concrete mix, at the Contractor's expense.
8.5 Before laying, all pipes and components shall be checked for defects and joint spaces cleared of
dirt.
8.6 Socketted pipes to be laid with sockets uphill.
8.7 Flexible joints shall be made in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
8.8 Where lubrication of the joint is required the pipe manufacturer's recommended lubricant shall
only be used.

8.9 Spigot and socket cement joints where required shall be made with ring of tarred gasket well
caulked in socket and remaining socket space filled with 1:3 cement mortar, finished in 45 deg.
fillet.
8.10 Lay and compact bed of granular material to provide 100mm thickness over the full width of the
trench. Scoop out locally at pipe sockets where socketted pipes are used. Adjust pipes to line
and level and ensure that pipe barrels rest uniformly on the bedding.
8.11 Add granular side fill uniformly up each side of pipes compacting by hand.
8.12 Any trench sheeting should be lifted before the fill is compacted.
8.13 The granular material shall be compacted in 100mm layers by hand up to 100mm minimum
distance above top of pipes.
8.14 Granular material shall be locally available crushed rock graded in relation to pipe size as follows:
a 10mm nominal size aggregate - 100mm dia. pipes
b 10 or 14 mm nominal size aggregate - 150mm dia. pipes
c 10, 14 or 20mm nominal size aggregate - 200mm dia. pipes & above.
8.15 During bad weather, or in wet fine-grained soils such as clays, silts or sands, it is important to
prevent the trench bottom being churned up by men working in the trench. In such cases a
blanket of granular material 75mm thick laid over the trench bottom immediately after excavation,
or alternatively a sealing layer of weak concrete 50mm thick, is required.
8.16 Provide concrete bed to drain pipes and concrete infill where drain track is below level of bottom
of foundation base and within 900mm horizontal distance from foundation base. The concrete
infill to be carried up to the level of the bottom of the foundation base.
8.17 Drain tracks beyond 900mm of adjacent foundations and where the bottom of the trench is lower
than a depth beneath the foundation equal to the horizontal distance between the nearside of the
trench and the foundation less 150mm, shall be infilled with concrete upto that depth.
8.18 Concrete bed and surround shall incorporate movement joints at each drain pipe joint.
8.19 Each joint shall form a plane surface in the concrete above and below the drain and vertical to
the drain and centre line, and shall separate the lengths of concrete with 13mm thick resilient
fibre board or expanded polystyrene pre-cut to pipe diameter and concrete cross-section height
and width and left insitu.
8.20 Drains below roadways, car parks, and any area subject to vehicular traffic with less than 900mm
of cover shall be bedded and surrounded with concrete 150mm minimum thickness all round with
provision for movement joints.
8.21 Granular fill shall be laid in 100mm layers and compacted to a level 300mm minimum above top
of pipe followed by main backfill material placed and compacted in 300mm layers, any trench
sheeting being withdrawn as the work proceeds. Heavy mechanical compactors shall not be
used until there is at least 300mm cover over the pipes.
8.22 Construction vehicles shall not be allowed to cross drain trenches until the final surface is placed
except where timber sleepers or steel plates are positioned to bridge the trench.

9.0 MANHOLES
9.1 All manholes shall be constructed to the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and in
compliance with BS EN 124.
9.2 Internal manhole covers shall be bolt down airtight double seal, recessed top.
9.3 Covers are to be insitu concrete filled, with surface finish to match surrounding floor. All covers
are to be medium duty, lockable and sealed, with a clear opening of 600mm x 600mm.
9.4 Covers for external manholes and those subject to vehicular traffic shall be kite marked heavy
duty ductile iron single seal, non rock heavy duty with square push fit seal plate. Covers to be
complete with lifting key-holes, and generally constructed in accordance with BS EN 124 and
shall have a clear openings of 600x600mm unless otherwise indicated. Double seal covers shall
be provided in coordination with the Engineer.
9.5 All covers shall be of ductile iron and shall be grey - epoxy coated, kite marked.
10.0 GULLY GRATES
10.1 Where indicated on drawings provide kite marked kerb gully unit of ductile iron hinged grate, road
retaining bar with clear opening size 532x405mm. Unit to be black bitumen coated and shall be
designed to deter ingress and help prevent blockage. A GRP grid shall be provided as standard.
10.2 Storm water gratings shall be kitemarked, heavy duty ductile iron, non rock clear openings size
600 x 600mm, grey - epoxy coated and shall comply with BS EN 124.
11.0 SUMP PUMPS
11.1 Pump casing shall be either stainless steel or cast iron with wear resistant diffusers.
11.2 Impeller shall be either stainless steel or cast iron wear resistant, semi shrouded, multi vane.
11.3 Motor shall be squirrel cage induction type, class F insulation capable of a maximum of
15 starts/hour.
11.4 Motor casings shall be with integral cooling ribs for maximum heat dissipation.
11.5 Shaft sealing shall be with two independent mechanical seals assembled in tandem to provide a
reliable and durable sealing performance and maximum resistance to abrasion and thermal shock.
11.6 An oil filled housing for lubricating and cooling mechanical seal units shall provide an additional
leakage barrier.
11.7 Shaft shall be stainless steel mounted on pregreased rolling element bearings.
11.8 Thermal sensors in the stator shall switch off the pump in case of overheating and switch on
automatically after cooling down.
11.9 Cable junction chamber shall be a sealed terminal chamber with separate gland assemblies
incorporating strain relief clamps.
11.10 Pumps shall be suitable for a maximum depth of submersion of 10m with the flanged outlet directly
vertical upwards.
11.11 Pumps shall be selected to match the duties indicated on drawings.

12.0 TESTING OF DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE SYSTEMS
12.1 Before the sanitary fixtures are installed, drainage and vent pipe systems shall be subjected to a
water pressure test to ensure and prove their tightness and to a flow test to ensure their freedom
from obstructions.
12.2 The water pressure test shall be applied to the system in its entirety or in sections. All openings
in the piping shall be tightly closed with special cast iron pipe plugs or other suitable means and
the system filled with water to the point of overflow from the highest opening. The plugs shall be
temporarily opened to make sure that all air has been vented and that water has reached all parts
of the system.
12.3 No section shall be tested to less than a 3-metre head of water. In testing successive sections at
least the upper 3 metres of the next preceding section shall be tested so that no joint or pipe,
except the uppermost 3 metres of the whole system, shall have been subjected to a test of less
than a 3-metre head of water.
12.4 The water shall be kept in the system or in the portion under test for at least 4 hours before
inspection starts. While the system is under pressure, a careful inspection shall be made of all
pipes and joints and if any leaks in joints or evidence of defective pipe or fitting is disclosed the
defective work shall be corrected immediately by replacing defective parts with new joints and
materials. No makeshift repairs or application of any repair compound will be permitted.
12.5 After the correction is made the pressure test shall be repeated until the system is proved tight.
12.6 Underground drainage pipes shall be tested by plugging the end of the pipe and filling with water
to a minimum head of 3 metres. The test pressure shall be maintained for 24 hours. Pipes and
joints shall be inspected and approved before backfilling the trench.
12.7 All drainage systems shall be tested for proper flow to ensure their freedom from any obstruction.
The Contractor shall disassemble, clear, repair and re-assemble obstructed piping at his own
expense. After re-assembly the piping shall again be subjected to the pressure test.
End of Section

PART A - SECTION 10
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
Revision History

PART A - SECTION 10
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
INDEX
1.0 PIPING FOR FIRE SERVICES ........................................................................................................... 3

2.0 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES .............................................................................................. 3
3.0 SPECIALTY VALVES ......................................................................................................................... 5
4.0 HOSE CONNECTIONS....................................................................................................................... 7
5.0 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................ 12
6.0 ALARM DEVICES............................................................................................................................. 13
7.0 SPRINKLERS ................................................................................................................................... 15
8.0 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS...................................................................................... 16
9.0 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS..................................................................................................... 17
10.0 CONTROL PANELS ......................................................................................................................... 17
11.0 PRESSURE GAGES......................................................................................................................... 18
12.0 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS .................................................................................................................... 18
13.0 FIRE CABINETS ............................................................................................................................... 19
14.0 PIPING INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 19
15.0 FIRE PUMPSET ................................................................................................................................ 20
16.0 FOAM WATER SYSTEM .................................................................................................................. 29
17.0 WET CHEMICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM .......................................................................... 32
18.0 FIRE STOP SYSTEM........................................................................................................................ 34
19.0 WATER MIST FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM .................................................................................. 35
20.0 CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING INSTALLATION .............................................................. 38
21.0 TESTING ........................................................................................................................................... 43
22.0 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ......................................................................................................... 43

Fire Fighting System
The contract works shall include fire protection pipework and equipment as specified herein and
as shown on the drawings. The complete system shall be installed by a Specialist Contractor.
1.0 PIPING FOR FIRE SERVICES
1.1 The piping system should be as straight as possible. Necessary changes of direction should be
made with standard bends, springs or long turn fittings; elbows should not be used.
1.2 The above grade piping system shall be ERW galvanized steel piping to ASTM A53 SCH 40,
screwed and socketed. The fittings shall be of malleable iron or wrought iron galvanized and of
steam quality. Grooved type fittings (UL/FM approved) are also acceptable.
1.3 Below grade pipework shall be HDPE with fusion welded joints, FM approved suitable for the
system working pressure. Pipework shall confirm to ISO 4427 and shall be acceptable to the
Local Civil Defence Authority.
1.4 These mains should be electrically earthed to an earth rod independent of the main electricity
earthing system.
2.0 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
2.1 General Requirements:
a. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.
b. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: (175 psig) 1200 kPa.
c. Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: (350 psig) 2415 kPa.
2.2 Ball Valves:
a. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.
b. Valves (NPS 1-1/2) DN 40 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
c. Valves (NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2) DN 50 and DN 65: Bronze body with threaded ends or
ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
d. Valves (NPS 3) DN 80 and larger: Ductile-iron body with grooved or flanged ends.
2.3 Bronze Butterfly Valves:
a. Standard: UL 1091.
b. Pressure Rating: (175 psig) 1200 kPa minimum, upgrade to suit system pressure.
c. Body Material: Bronze.
d. End Connections: Threaded.
2.4 Iron Butterfly Valves:
b. Pressure Rating: (175 psig) 1200 kPa minimum, upgrade to suit system pressure
c. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
d. Style: Lug or wafer.

e. End Connections: Grooved or flanged.
2.5 Check Valves:
c. Type: Swing check.
d. Body Material : Cast iron for sizes DN 65 and larger.
: Bronze for sizes DN 50 and smaller.
e. End Connections : Flanged or grooved for sizes DN 65 and larger
: Threaded for sizes DN 50 and smaller.
2.6 Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:
c. Body Material: Bronze.
d. End Connections: Threaded.
2.7 Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:
d. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
2.8 NRS Gate Valves:
c. Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange.
d. Stem: Nonrising.
e. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
2.9 Indicator Posts:
b. Type: Horizontal for wall mounting.
c. Body Material: Cast iron with extension rod and locking device.

d. Operation: Wrench / Hand wheel to Engineer’s approval.
3.0 SPECIALTY VALVES
a. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"

published by FM Global, listing.
b. Pressure Rating:
1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: (175 psig) 1200 kPa minimum.
2. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: (350 psig) 2415 kPa minimum.
d. Size: Same as connected piping.
e. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
3.2 Alarm Valves:
b. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.
c. Include trim sets for bypass, water alarm gong, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch,
pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.
d. Material: Cast or ductile iron body, bronze seat ring, ductile iron clapper, EDPM clapper
facing.
e. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping.
3.3 Dry-Pipe Valves:
b. Design: Differential-pressure type.
c. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level,
alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and
fill-line attachment.
d. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device:
1. Standard: UL 260.
2. Type: Automatic device to maintain minimum air pressure in piping.
3. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping,
bypass valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure,
strainer.

e. Air Compressor:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing.
2. Motor Horsepower: Fractional.
3. Power: 230-V ac, 50 Hz, single phase.
3.4 Deluge Valves:
b. Design: Hydraulically operated, differential-pressure type.
c. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, drip
cup assembly piped without valves and separate from main drain line, fill-line attachment
with strainer, and push-rod chamber supply connection.
d. Wet, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include gage to read push-rod chamber pressure, globe valve
for manual operation of deluge valve, and connection for actuation device.
e. Dry, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include dry, pilot-line actuator; air- and water-pressure gages;
low-air-pressure warning switch; air relief valve; and actuation device. Dry, pilot-line
actuator includes cast-iron, operated, diaphragm-type valve with resilient facing plate,
resilient diaphragm, and replaceable bronze seat. Valve includes threaded water and air
inlets and water outlet. Loss of air pressure on dry, pilot-line side allows pilot-line
actuator to open and causes deluge valve to open immediately.
f. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device:
1. Standard: UL 260.
2. Type: Automatic device to maintain minimum air pressure in piping.
3. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping,
bypass valve for quick filling, pressure regulator, or switch to maintain pressure,
strainer.
g. Air Compressor:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing.
2. Motor Horsepower: Fractional.
3. Power: 230-V ac, 50 Hz, single phase.
3.5 Pressure-Reducing Valves:
a. UL 1468.
c. Material : Brass or bronze for sizes DN 50 and smaller.
: Ductile iron for sizes DN 65 and larger.
d. End Connections : Threaded for sizes DN 50 and smaller
: Flanged for sizes DN 65 and larger.

e. Diaphragm : Nylon fabric reinforced, natural rubber
f. Pilot valve : Brass and stainless steel with nylon fabric reinforced, natural
rubber.
g. Strainer : Brass and stainless steel.
h. Pattern : Globe and angle body
3.6 Automatic Ball Drip Drain Valves:
c. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
d. Size: (NPS ¾) DN 20.
e. End Connections: Threaded.
4.0 HOSE CONNECTIONS
4.1 Adjustable-Valve Hose Connections:
a. Standard: UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing or restricting pressure-
control device, for connecting fire hose.
c. Material: Brass or bronze.
d. Size: (NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2) DN 40 or DN 65, as indicated.
e. Inlet: Female pipe threads/flanged
f. Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include hose valve
threads according to NFPA 1963 or matching local fire-department requirements.
g. Pattern: Angle.
h. Pressure-Control Device Type: Pressure reducing.
i. Finish: Rough brass or bronze.
4.2 (NPS 1-1/2) DN 40 Rack-Type Hose Stations
4.2.1 Hose Rack:
a. Standard: UL 47.
b. Material: Steel with red-enamel finish.
c. Type: Hose-rack assembly. Include hose valve, hose rack, water-retention device, hose
pins, and hose.
d. Operation: Semiautomatic.
e. Sized to hold fire hose.

4.2.2 Hose Valve:
a. Standard: UL 668 (NPS 1-1/2) DN 40, for connecting fire hose.
b. Type: Adjustable.
c. Pressure-Control Device: Pressure reducing
d. Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Rough brass or bronze.
e. Pressure Rating: (175 psig) 1200 kPa minimum, upgrade to suit system pressure.
f. Pattern: Angle.
g. Material: Brass or bronze.
h. Pressure-Control Device: UL 1468 integral or for field installation if indicated.
i. Size: (NPS 1-1/2) DN 40.
j. Inlet: Female pipe threads.
k. Outlet: Male hose threads according to NFPA 1963 or matching local fire-department
requirements.
4.2.3 Hose:
a. Standards: NFPA 1961 and UL 219 lined fire hose with swivel inlet, coupling, gaskets,
and nozzle.
b. Size: (NPS 1-1/2) DN 40.
c. Length: (100 feet) 30 m.
d. Jacket: Combination of natural and synthetic threads.
e. Lining: Rubber, plastic, or combination of rubber and plastic compounds.
f. Cover: Rubber, plastic, or combination of rubber and plastic compounds.
g. Nozzle: UL 401.
1. Material: Polished chrome-plated brass.
2. Type: Spray, adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight stream.
4.3 (NPS 1-1/2 BY NPS 2-1/2) DN 40 BY DN 65 RACK-TYPE HOSE STATIONS
4.3.1 Hose Rack:
a. Standard: UL 47.
b. Material: Steel with red-enamel finish.
c. Type: Hose-rack assembly. Include hose valve, reducer adapter, hose rack, water-
retention device, hose pins, and hose.
d. Operation: Semiautomatic.

e. Sized to hold fire hose.
4.3.2 Hose Valve:
a. Standard: UL 668, (NPS 2-1/2) DN 65, for connecting fire hose.
c. Pressure-Control Device: Pressure reducing.
f. Pattern: Angle.
h. Pressure-Control Device: UL 1468, integral or for field installation if indicated.
i. Size: (NPS 2-1/2) DN 65.
j. Inlet: Female pipe threads/flanged
k. Outlet: Male hose threads according to NFPA 1963 or matching local fire-department
requirements.
l. Reducer Adapter: (NPS 2-1/2 by NPS 1-1/2) DN 65 by DN 40.
4.3.3 Hose:
a. Standards: NFPA 1961 and UL 219, lined fire hose with swivel inlet, coupling, gaskets,
and nozzle.
b. Size: (NPS 1-1/2) DN 40.
g. Nozzle: UL 401 spray nozzle unless plain nozzle is indicated.
4.4 (NPS 1½) DN 40 REEL-TYPE HOSE STATIONS
4.4.1 Hose Reel:
a. Standard: UL 47.
b. Hose Reel: 18 ga Steel, welded construction.

c. Bracket material: 14 ga steel.
d. Type: Hose-reel assembly. Include hose valve, wall bracket, hose reel, water-retention
device, hose pins, and hose.
e. Operation: Semi-automatic.
f. Sized to hold fire hose.
g. Finish: Red enamel.
4.4.2 Hose Valve:
a. Standard: UL 668, (NPS 1½) DN 40, for connecting fire hose.
c. Pressure-Control Device: Pressure reducing.
f. Pattern: Angle.
h. Pressure-Control Device: UL 1468, integral or for field installation if indicated.
4.4.3 Hose:
a. Standards: NFPA 1961 and UL 219 lined non collapsible fire hose with swivel inlet,
coupling, gaskets, and nozzle.
b. Size: (NPS 1½) DN 40.
g. Nozzle: UL 401.
4.5 (NPS 1) DN 25 Automatic Fire Hose Reels
4.5.1 Hose Reel
a. Standard : BS EN 671
b. Type : Automatic, swing, recess

c. Hose reel : Side plates of 1.2mm steel, polyester powder coated red.
d. Swinging arm : Stainless steel
e. Reel diameter : 560 mm
f. Automatic valve : Lever type
4.5.2 Nozzle
a. Standard : BS EN 671
b. Material : Plastic
c. Operation : Twist On/Off/JET/Spray
d. Jet length : 12 m
e. Spray Length : 4.5 m
4.5.2.2 Hose
a. Standard : EN 694
b. Size : 25mm diameter, 30m length
c. Working pressure : 12 bar
d. Burst pressure : 50 bar
4.6 Monitors
a. Type: Stationary.
b. Nozzle: UL 401, (NPS 2-1/2) DN 65, brass, adjustable from fog spray to straight stream
to shutoff.
c. Horizontal Rotation: 360 degrees with locking device.
d. Vertical Rotation: 80-degree elevation and 60-degree depression with locking device.
e. Waterway: Double or Single brass or stainless-steel tube.
f. Waterway Size: (NPS 2-1/2) DN 65 minimum.
g. Water Stream Flow: (500 gpm) 31.5 L/s.
h. Operation: Lever.
i. Base Inlet Size: (NPS 2-1/2) DN 65.
j. Finish: Red-painted body with brass trim.
4.7 UL-Listed, Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants:
4.7.1 Description: Freestanding, with one (NPS 4-1/2) DN 115 and two (NPS 2-1/2) DN 65 outlets and
with (NPS 6) DN 150 threaded or flanged inlet and base section with (NPS 6) DN 150
mechanical-joint inlet.

4.7.2 Standards: UL 246 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
4.7.3 Design: Wet barrel.
4.7.4 Pressure Rating: (250 psig) 1725 kPa minimum, upgrade as required to suit system pressure.
4.7.5 Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. Include
cast-iron caps with steel chains.
4.7.6 Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, (1-1/2 inches) 38 mm point to flat.
4.7.7 Direction of Opening: Hydrant valves open by turning operating nut to left or counterclockwise.
4.7.8 Exterior Finish: Red alkyd-gloss enamel paint unless otherwise indicated
5.0 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
5.1 Exposed-Type, Fire-Department Connection:
5.1.1 Standard: UL 405.
5.1.2 Type: Exposed, projecting, for wall mounting.
5.1.3 Pressure Rating: (175 psig) 1200 kPa minimum, upgrade to suit system pressure.
5.1.4 Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.
5.1.5 Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes and
threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or
clappers.
5.1.6 Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.
5.1.7 Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, wall type.
5.1.8 Outlet: Back, with pipe threads.
5.1.9 Number of Inlets: Two / four.
5.1.10 Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "Automatic Sprinkler” or "standpipe”.
5.1.11 Finish: Polished chrome plated / Rough brass or bronze / Rough chrome plated as per
Architect’s choice.
5.1.12 Outlet Size: As indicated on drawings.
5.2 Recessed, Fire-Department Connection:
5.2.2 Type: Recessed wall mounting within cabinet.
5.2.5 Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes and
threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or
clappers.

5.2.7 Number of Inlets: Two/Four.
5.2.8 Outlet Location: Back / Bottom / Top.
5.2.9 Cabinet: 16 ga galvanized steel construction, wire glass door with stainless steel trim.
5.2.10 Door Plate Marking: Similar to "automatic sprinkler” or “standpipe"
5.2.11 Finish: Polished chrome plated.
5.3 Yard-Type, Fire-Department Connection:
5.3.2 Type: Exposed, freestanding.
5.3.5 Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 or matching local fire-department
requirements. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check
devices or clappers.
5.3.7 Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, floor type.
5.3.8 Outlet: Bottom, with pipe threads.
5.3.9 Number of Inlets: Two / Four.
5.3.10 Sleeve: Brass.
5.3.11 Sleeve Height: (18 inches) 460 mm minimum.
5.3.12 Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "Automatic Sprinkler" or “Standpipe”
5.3.13 Finish, Including Sleeve: Polished chrome plated.
6.0 ALARM DEVICES
6.1 Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
6.2 Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:
b. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.
c. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.
d. Size: (10-inch) 250-mm diameter.
e. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction.

f. Inlet: (NPS ¾) DN 20.
g. Outlet: (NPS 1) DN 25 drain connection.
6.3 Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:
b. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.
c. Size: (10-inch) 250-mm diameter.
d. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.
6.4 Water-Flow Indicators:
b. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
c. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and
auxiliary contacts, complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent
false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
d. Type: Paddle operated.
f. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
6.5 Pressure Switches:
b. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
c. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
d. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
6.6 Valve Supervisory Switches:
b. Type: Electrically supervised.
d. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
6.7 Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches:
b. Type: Electrically supervised.

d. Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.
7.0 SPRINKLERS

b. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: (175 psig) 1200 kPa maximum.
c. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: (175 psig) 1200 kPa minimum.
d. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: (300 psig) 2070 kPa.
7.2 Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
a. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767.
b. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
c. Residential Applications: UL 1626.
d. Characteristics: Nominal (1/2-inch) 12.7-mm orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6,

and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required
by application.
7.3 Open Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element Removed: UL 199.
a. Characteristics:
1. Nominal (1/2-inch) 12.7-mm Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 5.3 and
5.8.
2. Nominal (17/32-inch) 13.5-mm Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 7.4

and 8.2.
7.4 Sprinkler Finishes (To be agreed with Architect):
a. Chrome plated.
b. Bronze.
c. Painted.
7.5 Special Coatings (To be agreed with Architect):
a. Wax.
b. Lead.
c. Corrosion-resistant paint.
7.6 Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
a. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat, unless otherwise indicated or
required by application.

b. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat, unless otherwise indicated or
required by application.
7.7 Sprinkler Guards:
b. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler
8.0 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
8.1 Branch Outlet Fittings:
c. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
d. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
e. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.
f. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to
match connected branch piping.
g. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
8.2 Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:

c. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test
valve.
e. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
8.3 Branch Line Testers:
c. Body Material: Brass.
e. Inlet: Threaded.
f. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
g. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

8.4 Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:

c. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
e. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
8.5 Adjustable Drop Nipples:
b. Pressure Rating: (175psig) 1200 kPa minimum, upgrade to suit system pressure.
c. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.
e. Length: Adjustable.
f. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
8.6 Flexible, Sprinkler Hose Fittings:
b. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to ceiling
grid.
c. Pressure Rating: (175 psig) 1200 kPa minimum, upgrade to suit system pressure.
d. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.
9.0 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS
Description: UL listed or FM approved, hydraulic operation, with union, (NPS ½) DN 15 pipe

nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION"
with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental
opening.
10.0 CONTROL PANELS
10.1 Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned control panel including

NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for operation of
deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries; field-wiring
terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm bell; lamp test
facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.
10.1.1 Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector
circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 230-V ac, 50 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.
10.1.2 Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL CONTROL
STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent
accidental opening.

10.1.3 Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, (NPS ½) DN 15 pipe nipple, and
bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with
operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
11.0 PRESSURE GAGES
11.1.2 Dial Size: (3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch) 90- to 115-mm diameter.
11.1.3 Pressure Gage Range: (0 to 35 psig) 0 to 2415 kPa.
11.1.4 Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
11.1.5 Air System Piping Gage: Include retard feature and "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
12.0 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
12.1 Water Type
a. Approval : UL 626 / NFPA 10 / BS EN 3 / Authority having Jurisdiction.
b. Description : High quality steel cylinder with corrosion and impact resistant, powder
coated polyester paint finish with hose and nozzle.
12.2 Dry Chemical Type
a. Approval : UL 299 / NFPA 10 / BS EN 3 / Authority having Jurisdiction.
b. Description : Cold rolled steel cylinder with corrosion and impact resistant, powder
coated polyester paint finish, brass valve with safety release to avoid dry
chemical release due to high ambient temperatures, pressure gauge.
12.3 Carbon Dioxide Type
a. Approval : UL 154 / NFPA 10 / BS EN 3 / Authority having Jurisdiction
b. Description : Seamless carbon steel cylinder with powder coated polyester paint finish,
brass valve with safety release, hose and horn, pressure gauge.
12.4 Foam Extinguishers
a. Approval : NFPA 10 / BS EN 3 / Authority having Jurisdiction
b. Description : Cold rolled sheet steel cylinders with powder coated polyester paint
finish, internal protective coat for protection against corrosion, brass
nickel plated valve with handle and safety pin, pressure gauge.
12.5 Capacity of fire extinguishers shall match the figures on design drawings.
12.6 All fire extinguishers shall be in fully charged condition prior to preliminary handover of project.

13.0 FIRE CABINETS
13.1 Landing Valve Cabinet
Where indicated on drawings, the landing valve shall be housed in a landing box or cabinet
fabricated from 1.6mm thick galvanized sheet steel, degreased, primed, undercoated and
provided with white plastisol textured finish on the inside. Door shall be of brushed stainless
steel and shall have a recessed hand pull. Architrave shall be stainless steel with brushed satin
finish. On the hand pull shall be marked conspicuously “wet riser”. Door shall be provided with
full length piano hinges with magnetic catches at top and bottom.
Inside each landing valve cabinet, fire extinguishers along with a flexible fire hose shall be
provided complete with nozzle. Hose shall be 65mm diameter and 30.0m long. Hose and nozzle
shall comply with specification as indicated herein elsewhere.
The size of the cabinet shall be minimum 750 x 500 x 325mm and shall be sufficient to provide
ready access to equipment for immediate use when required.
13.2 Combined Hose Reel / Landing Valve Cabinet
Where indicated on drawings and in all areas wherever hose reels and landing valves are located
together, these shall be housed in a combined vertical cabinet of construction similar to the
landing valve cabinet. The minimum size of the cabinet shall be 1550 x 775 x 325mm. The
recessed swing type hose reel shall be mounted within the upper cabinet while the landing valve
along with the hose, nozzle and fire extinguishers shall be located within the lower cabinet with
independent access door.
13.3 Hose Rack Cabinets
Hose rack cabinets shall be same size and construction as specified for combined hose reel /
landing valve cabinets. The hose valve, rack and hose shall be located in the upper cabinet
while the lower cabinet shall house the fire extinguishers.
14.0 PIPING INSTALLATION
14.1 Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
14.1.1 Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from Authorities
having Jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working
plans.
14.2 Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 and 14 for installation of fire-
suppression standpipe piping.
14.3 Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for seismic-restraint
device materials and installation.
14.4 Install listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
14.5 Install drain valves on standpipes. Extend drain piping to outside of building.
14.6 Install automatic ball drip drain valves to drain piping between fire-department connections and
check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
14.7 Install alarm devices in piping systems.

14.8 Install hangers and supports for piping according to NFPA 13 and 14. Comply with requirements
in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
14.9 Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and
sized and located according to NFPA 13.
14.10 Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
14.11 Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when
sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
14.12 Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Include pressure gages with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe
between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal
14.13 Pressurize and check preaction sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices /
air compressors.
14.14 Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
14.15 Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
14.16 Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that
have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
14.17 Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes (NPS 2) DN 50 and smaller.
14.18 Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having (NPS 2-1/2) DN 65 and larger end connections.
14.19 Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
14.20 Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
14.21 Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water
service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
14.22 Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
14.23 Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators.
14.24 Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and
grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
14.25 Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and
grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
15.0 FIRE PUMPSET
The Fire Pumpset shall be serving sprinkler system and wet riser system (Landing valve and
Hose Reels). The Fire pump design shall comply with NFPA 20 Standard. The Fire pumpset shall
be UL/FM Approved.

15.1 Horizontally Mounted Single-Stage, Split-Case Fire Pumps
15.1.1 Pump:
a. Standard: UL 448, for split-case pumps for fire service.
b. Casing: Axially split case, cast iron with ASME B16.1 pipe-flange connections.
c. Impeller: Cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft.
d. Wear Rings: Replaceable bronze.
e. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
1. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.
2. Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided

yarn and bronze packing gland.
f. Mounting: Pump and driver shafts are horizontal, with pump and driver on same base.
15.1.2 Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment. Include
metal coupling guard.
15.1.3 Electric Driver:
a. Standard: UL 1004A.
b. Type: Electric motor; NEMA MG 1, polyphase Design B
15.1.4 Diesel Driver:
b. Type: Diesel engine.
c. Emergency Manual Operator: Factory wired for starting and operating standby engine in
case of malfunction in main controller or wiring.
d. Engine Cooling System: Factory-installed water piping, valves, strainer, pressure

regulator, heat exchanger, coolant pump, bypass piping, and fittings.
1. Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L ASTM B 88M, Type B, copper water tube;
ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure fittings; AWS A5.8/A5.8M,
BCuP Series brazing filler metal; and brazed joints.
e. Dual Batteries: Nickel-cadmium type with 100 percent standby reserve capacity.
f. Fuel System: Comply with NFPA 20.
1. Fuel Storage Tank: Not less than required by NFPA 20. Include floor legs, direct-
reading level gage, and secondary containment tank with capacity at least equal to
fuel storage tank.
g. Exhaust System: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Schedule 40, black steel pipe;
ASME B16.9, weld-type pipe fittings; ASME B16.5, steel flanges; and ASME B16.21,
nonmetallic gaskets. Fabricate double-wall, ventilated thimble from steel pipe.
1. Exhaust Connector: Flexible type.

2. Exhaust Silencer: Industrial type
15.2 Multistage, Pressure-Maintenance Pumps
15.2.1 Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, multistage, barrel-type vertical pump designed for
surface installation with pump and motor direct coupled and mounted vertically.
15.2.2 Pump Construction:
a. Barrel: Stainless steel.
b. Suction and Discharge Chamber: Cast iron with flanged inlet and outlet.
c. Pump Head/Motor Mount: Cast iron.
d. Impellers: Stainless steel, balanced, and keyed to shaft.
e. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.
f. Seal: Mechanical type with carbon rotating face and silicon-carbide stationary seat.
g. Intermediate Chamber Bearings: Aluminum-oxide ceramic or bronze.
h. Chamber-Base Bearing: Tungsten carbide.
i. O-Rings: EPDM or NBR.
15.2.3 Motor: Single speed with permanently lubricated ball bearings and rigidly mounted to pump
head.
a. Power Cord: Factory-connected to motor for field connection to controller.
15.2.4 Nameplate: Permanently attached to pump and indicating capacity and characteristics
15.3 Controllers for Electric Drive Pumps
15.3.1 General Requirements for Controllers:
a. Comply with NFPA 20 and UL 218.
b. Listed by an NRTL for electric-motor driver for fire-pump service.
c. Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation.
d. Factory assembled, wired, and tested; continuous-duty rated.
e. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment.
15.3.2 Method of Starting:
a. Pressure -switch actuated.
1. Water-pressure-actuated switch and pressure transducer with independent high-

and low-calibrated adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-suppression
piping.
2. System pressure recorder, electric ac driven, with spring backup.
3. Programmable minimum-run-time relay to prevent short cycling.

4. Programmable timer for weekly tests.
b. Magnetic Controller: Wye-delta (closed transition) type.
c. Emergency Start: Mechanically operated start handle that closes and retains the motor
RUN contactor independent of all electric or pressure actuators.
15.3.3 Method of Stopping: Nonautomatic.
15.3.4 Capacity: Rated for fire-pump-driver horsepower and short-circuit-current withstand rating equal
to or greater than short-circuit current available at controller location.
15.3.5 Method of Isolation and Overcurrent Protection: Interlocked isolating switch and nonthermal
MCCB; with a common, externally mounted operating handle, and providing locked-rotor
protection.
15.3.6 Door-Mounted Operator Interface and Controls:
a. Monitor, display, and control the devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in
NFPA 20 as required for drivers and controller types used.
b. Method of Control and Indication:
1. Microprocessor-based logic controller, with multiline digital readout.
2. Membrane keypad.
3. LED alarm and status indicating lights.
c. Local and Remote Alarm and Status Indications:
1. Controller power on.
2. Motor running condition.
3. Loss-of-line power.
4. Line-power phase reversal.
5. Line-power single-phase condition.
d. Audible alarm, with silence push button.
e. Nonautomatic START and STOP push buttons or switches.
15.3.7 Additional Features:
a. Extra Output Contacts:
1. Two N.O. contacts for motor running condition.
2. One sets of contacts for loss-of-line power.
3. One each, Form C contacts for high and low reservoir level.
b. Operator Interface Communications Ports: USB, Ethernet, and RS485.

15.3.8 ATS:
a. Complies with NFPA 20, UL 218, and UL 1008.
b. Integral with controller as a listed combination fire-pump controller and power transfer
switch.
c. Automatically transfers fire-pump controller from normal power supply to alternate power
supply in event of power failure.
d. Allows manual transfer from one source to the other.
e. Alternate-Source Isolating and Disconnecting Means: Mechanically interlocked isolation

switch and circuit breaker rated at a minimum of 115 percent of rated motor full-load
current, with an externally mounted operating handle; circuit breaker shall be provided
with nonthermal sensing, instantaneous-only short-circuit overcurrent protection to
comply with available fault currents.
f. Local and Remote Alarm and Status Indications:
1. Normal source available.
2. Alternate source available.
3. In normal position.
4. In alternate position.
5. Isolating means open.
g. Audible alarm, with silence push button.
h. Nonautomatic (manual, nonelectric) means of transfer.
i. Engine test push button.
j. Start generator output contacts.
k. Timer for weekly generator tests.
15.4 Controllers for Diesel-Drive Fire Pumps
15.4.1 General Requirements for Controllers:
a. Comply with NFPA 20 and UL 218.
b. Listed by an NRTL for diesel-engine driver for fire-pump service.
c. Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation.
d. Factory assembled, wired, and tested.
15.4.2 Method of Starting:
a. Pressure switch actuated.
1. Water-pressure-actuated switch and pressure transducer with independent high-

and low-calibrated adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-suppression
piping.

2. System pressure recorder, electric ac driven, with spring backup.
3. Programmable minimum-run-time relay to prevent short cycling.
4. Programmable timer for weekly tests.
b. Dual, redundant dc-voltage battery units, with automatic changeover.
c. Emergency Control: Bypasses all automatic control circuits during manual starting and
running.
d. Automatic engine start on loss of ac power to the controller.
15.4.3 Method of Stopping: Nonautomatic.
15.4.4 Door-Mounted Operator Interface and Controls:
a. Monitor, display, and control devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20
as required for drivers and controller types used.
b. Method of Control and Indication:
1. Microprocessor-based logic controller, with multiline LCD readout.
2. Membrane keypad.
3. LED alarm and status indicating lights.
c. Local and Remote Alarm and Status Indications:
1. Controller power on.
2. Engine-lubrication-system critically low oil pressure.
3. Engine-jacket coolant high temperature.
4. Engine fail-to-start.
5. Engine overspeed shutdown.
6. Low fuel level.
7. Missing or failed battery.
8. Battery charger failure.
9. System overpressure.
10. ECM selector switch in alternate ECM position.
11. Fuel injector malfunction.
d. Audible alarm.
e. Nonautomatic START and STOP push buttons or switches.

15.4.5 Optional Features:
a. Extra Output Contacts:
1. One each, Form C contacts for high and low fuel levels.
2. One each, Form C contacts for high and low reservoir levels.
b. Operator Interface Communications Ports: USB, Ethernet, and RS485.
15.4.6 Battery Charger System:
a. Built-in, independent, dual battery chargers with automatic changeover; 24-V dc for
nickel-cadmium batteries.
b. Standard: UL 1236.
15.5 Controllers for Pressure-Maintenance Pumps
15.5.1 General Requirements for Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Controllers:
a. Type: UL 508 factory assembled, -wired, and tested, across-the-line; for combined
automatic and manual operation.
b. Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 2 for wall-mounting.
c. Factory assembled, wired, and tested.
d. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint.
15.5.2 Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the following:
a. Fusible disconnect switch.
b. Pressure switch.
c. Hand-off-auto selector switch.
d. Pilot light.
e. Running period timer.
15.6 Remote Alarm Panels
15.6.1 General Requirements for Remote Alarm Panels: Comply with NFPA 20 and UL 218 listed by an
NRTL for fire-pump service.
15.6.2 General Requirements for Remote Alarm Panels: Factory assembled, wired, and tested.
15.6.3 Supervisory and Normal Control Voltage: 240-V ac dual source.
15.6.4 Audible and Visual Alarm and Status Indications:
a. Driver running.
b. Loss of phase.
c. Phase reversal.

d. Supervised power on.
e. Common trouble on the controller.
f. Controller connected to alternate power source.
15.6.5 Audible and Visual Alarm and Status Indications: Manufacturer's standard indicating lights; push-
to-test.
a. Engine running.
b. Controller main switch turned to the off or manual position.
c. Supervised power on.
d. Common trouble on the controller or engine.
e. Common pump room trouble.
f. Controller connected to alternate power source.
15.6.6 Audible alarm, with silence push button.
15.6.7 Pump REMOTE START push button.
15.6.8 Enclosure : NEMA 250 Type 1 for wall mounting.
15.7 Low-Suction-Shutdown Panels
15.7.1 General Requirements for Low-Suction-Shutdown Panels:
a. Listed by an NRTL for fire-pump service.
b. Factory assembled, wired, and tested.
c. Prevents automatic start of fire pump, and shuts down automatically started fire pump, on
low-suction pressure.
d. Manual reset.
15.7.2 Operation: External contact input.
15.7.3 Supervisory and Normal Control Voltage: 240-V ac, dual source.
15.7.4 Include audible and visual alarms and status indications, with silence push button, for the
following conditions:
a. Control power available.
b. Low-suction pressure.
c. Normal-suction pressure.
15.8 Enclosures
15.8.1 Fire-Pump Controllers, ATS: NEMA 250, Type 4.
15.8.2 Enclosure Color: Manufacturer's standard "fire-pump-controller red" or Local Authority approval.

15.8.3 Nameplates: Comply with NFPA 20; complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals, listings,
and other pertinent data.
15.8.4 Additional Features:
a. Floor stands, (12 inches) 305 mm high, for floor-mounted controllers.
b. Space heater, 240-V ac, with humidistat.
c. Tropicalization.
15.9 Fire-Pump Accessories and Specialties
15.9.1 Automatic Air-Release Valves: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation in fire-pump casing.
15.9.2 Circulation Relief Valves: UL 1478, brass, spring loaded; for installation in pump discharge
piping.
15.9.3 Relief Valves:
a. Description: UL 1478, bronze or cast iron, spring loaded; for installation in fire-
suppression water-supply piping.
15.9.4 Inlet Fitting: Eccentric tapered reducer at pump suction inlet.
15.9.5 Outlet Fitting: Concentric tapered reducer at pump discharge outlet.
15.9.6 Discharge Cone: Closed or open type.
15.9.7 Hose Valve Manifold Assembly:
a. Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 20.
b. Header Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized steel with ends threaded
according to ASME B1.20.1.
c. Header Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.4, galvanized cast-iron threaded fittings.
d. Automatic Drain Valve: UL 1726.
e. Manifold
1. Test Connections: Comply with UL 405 except provide outlets without clappers
instead of inlets.
2. Body: Exposed type, brass, with number of outlets required by NFPA 20.
3. Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze; round.
4. Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and
matching local fire-department threads. Include caps and chains.
5. Exposed Parts Finish: Chrome plated.
6. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to "FIRE PUMP TEST."

15.10 Flow Meter Systems
15.10.1 Description: UL-listed or FM-Approved, fire-pump flowmeter system with capability to indicate
flow to not less than 175 percent of fire-pump rated capacity.
15.10.2 Pressure Rating: (175 psig) 1200 kPa minimum, upgrade required by pressure rating of pump.
15.10.3 Sensor: Annubar probe, orifice plate, or venturi unless otherwise indicated. Sensor size shall
match pipe, tubing, flowmeter, and fittings.
15.10.4 Permanently Mounted Flowmeter: Compatible with flow sensor; with dial not less than
(4-1/2 inches) 115 mm in diameter. Include bracket or device for wall mounting.
a. Tubing Package: (NPS 1/8 or NPS ¼) DN 6 or DN 10 soft copper with copper or brass
fittings and valves.
15.11 Grout
15.11.1 Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement
grout.
15.11.2 Characteristics: Nonshrink and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
15.11.3 Design Mix: (5000-psi) 34-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
15.11.4 Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
15.12 Source Quality Control
15.12.1 Testing: Test and inspect fire pumps according to UL 448 requirements for "Operation Test" and
"Manufacturing and Production Tests."
15.12.2 Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to UL 448.
15.12.3 Fire pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
15.12.4 Prepare test and inspection reports.
16.0 FOAM WATER SYSTEM
16.1.1 Description: Engineered, fixed, deluge, automatically actuated, low-expansion, AFFF fire-
extinguishing system for flammable-liquid fires. System includes diaphragm proportioning tanks
and devices as described in NFPA 16.
16.2 Performance Requirements
16.2.1 Standard Working Pressure of Piping-System Component: Listed for at least (175 psig) 1200
kPa.
16.2.2 Unless authorities having jurisdiction have stricter requirements, minimum design parameters are
as follows:
a. Solution: 3 percent foam-water solution.
b. Sprinkler Spacing: Maximum of (100 sq. ft.) 9.5 sq.m per sprinkler, and maximum (12-
foot) 3.7-m spacing.

c. Design Density: Minimum (0.16 gpm/sq. ft.) 0.108 L/s per sq. m.
d. Foam Supply: Minimum 10 -minute discharge time.
e. Water Supply: Minimum 60 minutes.
f. Remote Area: Open-sprinkler systems shall discharge over the entire system area.
16.2.3 Delegated Design: Design system including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

professional Engineer using performance requirements and design criteria as per NFPA 16.
16.2.4 System design shall be approved by Authorities having jurisdiction.
16.2.5 Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to NFPA 13 or as determined by local statutory authority.
16.3 Specialties
16.3.1 Specialties shall comply with NFPA 16, be compatible with the foam concentrate, and be
designed to be drained and cleaned.
16.3.2 Foam-Concentrate Storage Tanks: Buna-N, bladder-type proportioning tank complying with
UL 162 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII; designed for use with foam-
concentrate pumps and for specific type of foam concentrate used. Include bladder, internal
piping, fill and drain, glass sight gage, piping, and valves. Contain concentrate in the bladder.
16.3.3 Proportioning Controllers: Venturi type complying with UL 162 and of capacity to match design at
minimum and maximum flow.
16.3.4 Concentrate Control Valves: Water-operated ball or deluge valve designed to open with flow
through the proportioning controller.
16.3.5 Concentrate Strainers: Bronze body and stainless-steel mesh strainer with minimum (0.125-inch)
3.2-mm perforations to remove solids that would block system components.
16.3.6 Pressure Gages: Comply with UL 393; with (3-1/2-inch) 90-mm minimum-diameter dial, (0- to
300-psig) 0- to 2070-kPa dial range, and caption "WATER" or "CONCENTRATE" on dial face.
16.4 Foam Concentrate
16.4.1 Description: AFFF liquid concentrate, complying with NFPA 11 and UL 162, for making foam-
water fire-extinguishing foam solution.
16.5 Discharge Devices
16.5.1 Discharge devices shall be UL listed or FM Approved.
16.5.2 Sprinklers: Open, UL listed or FM Approved and listed for use with type of foam concentrate
used.
16.6 Monitoring Devices
16.6.1 Valve Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw, with normally closed contacts complying
with UL 753. Switch shall signal fire-alarm panel or releasing panel when valve is in other than
fully open position.
16.6.2 Pressure Switches: Single pole, double throw, UL listed or FM Approved and complying with
UL 753. Switch shall signal an alarm condition at the fire-alarm panel or releasing panel when
switch is in other than fully open position.

16.6.3 Flow Switches: Single pole, double throw, UL listed or FM Approved and complying with UL 753.
Switch shall signal an alarm condition at the fire-alarm panel or releasing panel when switch is in
other than fully open position.
16.7 Alarm Devices
16.7.1 Description: UL listed or FM Approved, low voltage, and surface mounting.
16.8 Charging System
16.8.1 Fill proportioning tanks with foam concentrate after field quality-control testing is complete and
satisfactory results have been achieved.
16.9 Field Quality Control
16.9.1 Inspection: Engage the services of a qualified professional engineer to inspect installed fire-
extinguishing systems, prepare installation report, and certify that installation complies with the
Contract Documents, calculations, and requirements of Authorities having Jurisdiction.
16.9.2 Comply with operating instructions and procedures in NFPA 16, "Acceptance Tests" Chapter.
Include the following tests and inspections to demonstrate compliance with requirements:
a. Check mechanical items.
b. Inspect equipment and check mountings for adequate anchoring to substrate.
c. Check electrical systems.
d. Flush supply piping.
e. Perform hydrostatic pressure test.
f. Perform acceptance test.
g. Perform proportioning system test.
h. Perform discharge test.
i. Flush system piping.
j. Correct malfunctioning equipment; retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace

equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected or does not perform as specified and
indicated; retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results
are obtained
16.9.3 Tests and Inspections:
a. After installing foam fire-extinguishing piping system and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
b. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
c. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start systems to confirm
proper unit operation.
d. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

16.9.4 Foam fire-extinguishing piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
16.9.5 Prepare test and inspection reports
17.0 WET CHEMICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
17.1 Description
Engineered distribution piping designed for automatic detection and release or manual release of
fire-suppression agent by hood operator. Fire-suppression system shall be designed, listed and
labeled for complying with NFPA 17A, “Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems,” by a qualified
testing agency acceptable to Authorities having jurisdiction.
17.2 Wet Chemical Agent
The extinguishing agent shall be a specially formulated, aqueous solution of organic salts with a
pH range between 7.7 – 8.7, designed for flame knockdown and foam securement of grease
related fires.
17.3 Agent Tank
The agent tank shall be installed in a stainless steel enclosure or wall bracket. The tank shall be
constructed of stainless steel. The tank shall have a working pressure of (110 psi) 7.6 bar a test
pressure of (330 psi) 22.8 bar and a minimum burst pressure of (660 psi) 45.5 bar. The tank
shall include an adaptor/tube assembly containing a burst disc union.
17.4 Regulated Release Mechanism
The regulated release mechanism shall be spring-loaded, mechanical/pneumatic type capable of

providing the expellant gas supply to one or more agent tanks depending on the capacity of the
gas cartridge used. It shall contain a factory installed regulator dead set at (110 psi) 7.6 bar with
an external relief of approximately (180 psi) 12.4 bar.
It shall have the following actuation capacities
a. Automatic actuation by a fusible link detection system and remote manual actuation by a
mechanical pull station.
b. The regulated release mechanism shall contain a release assembly, regulator, expellant
gas hose, and agent storage tank housed in a stainless steel enclosure with cover. The
enclosure shall contain knockouts for electrical conduit. The cover shall contain an
opening for a visual status indicator.
c. It shall be compatible with mechanical gas shut-off devices; or, when equipped with a
field or factory installed switch(es), it shall be compatible with electric gas line or
appliance shut-off devices, or connections to a building fire alarm control panel.
17.5 Regulated Actuator Assembly
When more than two agent tanks or three agent tanks in certain applications are required, the
regulated actuator shall be available to provide expellant gas for additional tanks. It shall be
connected to the cartridge receiver outlet of the regulated release mechanism providing
simultaneous agent discharge. The regulator shall be dead set at (110 psi) 7.6 bar with an
external relief of approximately (180 psi) 12.4 bar. The regulated actuator assembly shall contain
an actuator, regulator, expellant gas hose, and agent tank housed in a stainless steel enclosure
with cover. The enclosure shall contain knockouts to permit installation of the expellant gas line.

17.6 Discharge Nozzles
Each discharge nozzle shall be tested and listed for a specific application. Nozzles tips shall be
stamped with the flow number designation (1/2, 1, 2 or 3). Each nozzle shall have a metal or
rubber blow-off cap to keep the nozzle tip orifice free of cooking grease build-up.
17.7 Distribution Piping
Distribution piping shall be schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, conforming to ASTM A120 or
A53.
17.8 Detectors
The detectors shall be the fusible link style designed to separate at a specific temperature.
17.9 Cartridges
The cartridge shall be a sealed steel pressure vessel containing either carbon dioxide or nitrogen
gas. The cartridge seal shall be designed to be punctured by the releasing device supplying the
required pressure to expel wet chemical agent from the storage tank.
17.10 Agent Distribution Hose
An optional agent distribution hose shall be available for kitchen appliances manufactured with or
resting on casters (wheels / rollers). This shall allow the appliance to be moved for cleaning
purposes without disconnecting the appliance fire suppression protection. Hose assembly shall
include a restraining cable kit to limit the appliance movement within the range (length) of the
flexible hose.
17.11 Flexible Conduit
The manufacturer supplying the restaurant fire suppression system shall offer flexible conduit as
an option to rigid EMT conduit for the installation of pull stations and/or mechanical gas valves.
The flexible conduit shall be UL listed and include all approved components for proper
installation.
17.12 Pull Station Assembly
The fire suppression system shall include a remote pull station for manual system actuation. The
pull station shall be designed to include a built-in guard to protect the pull handle. The pull
station shall also be designed with a pull handle to allow for three finger operation and shall be
red in colour for quick visibility.
17.13 Examination
Verify that hood and duct system meets the requirements of NFPA 96.
17.14 Installation
Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s design. Installation, recharge and maintenance
manual.
17.15 Field Testing
Field testing shall be performed by personnel authorized and trained by manufacturer.
17.16 Demonstration
Instruct Client’s personnel in the operation of the kitchen fire suppression systems.

18.0 FIRE STOP SYSTEM
18.1 General
18.1.1 Applications of fire stop systems include:
a. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways
and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers
(floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions.
b. Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partition or walls containing fire doors.
c. Multiple electrical boxes located within the same stud cavity.
d. All materials shall conform to relevant North American or European Standards.
18.1.2 Fire stopping material or combination of materials used shall retain integrity of fire-rated
construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water and
hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies.
18.1.3 Fire stopping shall be carried out in accordance to manufacturer recommendations and under the
supervision of a factory trained manufacturer’s representative.
18.1.4 Upon completion, the complete installation shall be inspected and certified by the factory trained
manufacturer’s representative.
18.2 Firestop Systems
Penetrations of pipes, tubes, conduits, wires, cables, ducts and vents through fire resistant walls
and shaft enclosures, and floor, ceiling, and roof elements of fire resistant assemblies shall be
protected in accordance with the following:
18.2.1 Non-combustible penetrations
Non insulated metal ducts and non-combustible pipes shall be protected by an approved through-
penetration protection system. The annular gap around the penetrates shall be packed with
mineral wool/ rockwool and the ends shall be filled and sealed with Firestop silicone sealant to an
appropriate depth.
18.2.2 Combustible penetrations
Metal ducts with combustible jackets or insulation shall be protected by an approved through-
penetration protection system. The annular gap around the duct shall be packed with mineral
wool/ rockwool and the ends shall be filled and sealed with Firestop intumescent sealant to an
appropriate depth.
18.2.3 Single cable or bunched cables
The annular gap around cable or bunches of cables shall be packed with rockwool/mineral wool
and the ends shall be filled and sealed with intumescent sealant to an appropriate depth.
18.2.4 Cable trays crossings:
Permenant system Firestop intumescent sealant shall be applied around and between the
cables. The opening shall be sealed with trowlable fireresistant cement-based mortar.
Temporary system where future changes are expected ready-to-use, intumescent flexible block
firmly seated shall be built up inside the opening sealing it completely. Firestop intumescent
sealant shall be applied around and between the cables.

18.3 Nonmetal Pipe Crossings
Nonmetal pipe crossings less than 50 mm diameter: The annular gap around the penetrates shall
be packed with mineral wool/ rockwool and the ends shall be filled and sealed with Firestop
intumescent sealant.
Non metal pipe crossings of 50 mm diameter and more: The annular gap around the penetrates
shall be packed with mineral wool/ rockwool and the ends shall be filled and sealed with Firestop
intumescent sealant to an appropriate depth.
The pipes shall be provided with a pre-assembled graphite based intumescent jacket contained
in a metal housing, fixed around the pipe with metal fixings.
19.0 WATER MIST FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
19.1 Scope
This specification outlines the requirements for a “Water Atomizing Fire Suppression System with
Automatic Detection and Control”. The work described in this specification includes all
engineering, labour, materials, equipment and services necessary, and required, to complete and
test the suppression system.
19.2 Applicable Standards and Publications
19.2.1 The design, equipment, installation, testing and maintenance of the fire protection system shall
be in accordance with the applicable requirements set forth in the latest edition of the following
codes and standards:
a. NFPA 750 - Water Mist Fire Protection System
b. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
c. NFPA 72 - Standard for Protective Signaling
d. Factory Mutual Approval Guide.
e. UL Listings
f. Requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
19.2.2 The standards listed, as well as all other applicable codes, standards, and good engineering
practices shall be used as “minimum” design standards
19.3 Description
19.3.1 The water mist system suppresses a Class B fire by causing one or more of the following
reactions:
a. Heat extraction from the fire as water is converted into vapour and the fuel is cooled.
b. Dilution of flammable vapours by the entrainment of water vapour.
c. Cooling of liquid hydrocarbon fuels below vaporization temperature.

19.3.2 When a fire condition is detected in the protected hazard, the detection and control system will
actuate the water mist system which contains Nitrogen cylinders and a stainless steel water tank.
The Nitrogen storage cylinders provide pressure to drive the water to the system atomizers.
When the system is operated, valves on the Nitrogen cylinders open and the gas pressure flows
through pressure regulators which maintain the pressure (125 psi) 8.6 bar. This pressure drives
the water through the opened water valve and to the system atomizers. The Nitrogen discharge
also provides the necessary pressure to create the water discharge plume.
19.4 Control System
The control system is designed to monitor fixed fire hazards. The Control system can
automatically actuate the system after receiving an input signal from one or more initiating
devices, i.e., manual pull station or detector. The control system incorporates in internal power
supply, on-line emergency batteries, and solid state electronics.
19.5 Releasing Device
The releasing device consists of a metal enclosure which contains a spring-loaded puncture pin
release mechanism, an actuation cartridge, electrical circuitry, and an input/output terminal strip
for making electrical connections. The releasing device provides automatic pneumatic actuation
of the system. When wired to the control system, it will provide supervised electric detection and
release. The releasing device also provides manual actuation using the strike button on the
release enclosure or with optional remote manual cable pull station. When the control system is
used, manual actuation is accomplished using an electric manual pull station. Releasing device
requires a Nitrogen cartridge for system actuation.
19.6 Remote Actuator
The remote actuator is a device that allows for system actuation from a location either on or away
from the skid assembly. When actuated, the cartridge will supply pressure to the valves on the
cylinder, allowing Nitrogen to flow through the system.
19.7 Selector Valve Assembly
19.7.1 The selector valve assembly consists of:
a. A pneumatically operated valve for water and pneumatically operated valve for gas.
b. Brass inlet and outlet piping with union couplings.
c. Pressure inlet regulator.
d. A poppet-style purge valve to allow means of relieving the actuation pressure.
e. An over pressure relief valve for the actuation line.
f. A solenoid valve for electric actuation of the selector valve.
19.7.2 Selector valves are used when two or more hazard enclosures will be protected with a single
supply or a single main and reserve system. The work by allowing the agent to be distributed to
the hazard that required suppression. Up to eight hazard enclosures may be protected by a
single supply. Selector valves can be operated either pneumatically or electrically. The solenoid
valve directs actuation line pressure from the releasing device to the appropriate selector valve.
Selector valve assemblies may be used in conjunction with optional pneumatic remote actuators
where required.

19.8 Stainless Steel Water Tank Assembly
The system agent tank stainless steel water tank featuring a (0.1875 in) 4.8mm thick
ASME/TPED pressure vessel that is certified to (150 psi) 10.3 bar. The tank feature a (2 in) 5.1
cm fill opening; the tank also shall have an outlet this is positioned for optimal flow, containing a Y
strainer which will reduce the number of foreign particles in the water stream from reaching the
atomizer(s). The tank shall be constructed from 304L stainless material to ensure rust-free
performance.
19.9 Valve and Cylinder Assembly
The system shall contain multiple 3AA 3000 DOT or EN 1964-2 TPED Nitrogen cylinder
assemblies. When the actuation pressure reaches the Nitrogen actuation line to the cylinder
assembly, the piston in the valve forces the valve to the open position, allowing Nitrogen to flow
through the system.
19.10 Regulator
The system shall utilize a factory-set regulator to allow the proper Nitrogen pressure to discharge
the water from the tank to the atomizer. It also utilizes an adjustable regulator, allowing the
necessary Nitrogen pressure to flow directly to the atomizer to activate its advanced atomization
technology.
19.11 Atomizer
The atomizer shall utilize advanced technology, combining separate feeds of compressed
Nitorgen gas and water to generate and uniformly distribute water droplets throughout a
protected volume. Each atomizer shall be delivered per-trimmed with the appropriate water flow
control orifice, strainer, mounting plate, and dust cap in place. The atomizer shall utilize an in-
line restricting orifice to generate the appropriate water flow.
19.12 Examination
Verify that system meets the requirements of NFPA 750.
19.13 Installation
Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s design, installation, recharge and maintenance
manual.
19.14 Field Testing
Field testing shall be performed by personnel authorized and trained by manufacturer.
19.15 Demonstration
19.15.1 Instruct Client’s personnel in the operation of the water mist fire protection.
19.15.2 Preliminary Tests
Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall subject the system to a series of
preliminary, operational tests to verify the system performance and compliance with this
specification. Hydrostatically test the piping system at (200 psi) 13.8 bar for a 2 hour period with
no leaks or reduction in gage pressure. Flush piping with potable water in accordance with NFPA
13. Piping above ceilings shall be inspected, tested and approved before installation of the
ceilings. Test every initiating, signaling and trip device. Test water motor alarm by flowing water
through the inspector test connection. Deficiencies found at this time shall be immediately
corrected

19.15.3 Formal Inspection and Tests
The system shall be considered ready for such testing only after all necessary preliminary tests
have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected to the satisfaction of the project
inspector and/or Client. During inspection, repeat any or all of the required tests as directed.
19.15.3.1 Foam Discharge and Concentration Testing
Test each system riser at full design flow of foam solution from the individual riser or through
temporary hose lines and nozzle to a test header for at least 60 seconds to collect a foam
solution sample.
The manufacturer's representative shall test samples of foam solution taken from each system to
ensure proper AFFF concentration by means of refractive index. Provide protection for all
electrical fixtures and equipment exposed to possible damage during the tests and protect doors
and other openings leading from the protected area, to prevent migration of the foam solution into
other areas or spaces.
19.15.3.2 Flushing and Rinsing
After completion of tests flush all piping carrying foam solution with fresh water. Piping to be pre-
charged with foam solution need not be flushed.
19.15.3.3 Environmental Protection
Provide temporary measures to prevent foam solution from entering storm drains, sanitary
sewers, drainage ditches, streams and water courses. Contain all foam solution on paved
surfaces or specific containment area. Collect all discharge foam solution and dispose of it at an
EPA-approved wastewater treatment facility that provides a secondary (biological) treatment.
19.15.3.4 Foam Concentrate Storage Tank
After acceptance of the system testing, bladder tank is to be charged to the required system
capacity
20.0 CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING INSTALLATION
Clean-agent fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for total flooding of the
hazard area including the room cavity below the ceiling and below the raised floor. Provide
separate zones above and below the raised floor. If smoke is detected below the raised floor,
agent shall be discharged in the underfloor zone only. If smoke is detected above the raised
floor, agent shall be discharged in zones above and below the floor.
20.2 Performance Requirements
20.2.1 Design clean-agent extinguishing system including reserve-supply bank of containers and obtain
approval from authorities having jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, B, or C fires as
appropriate for areas being protected and include safety factor. Use clean agent indicated and in
concentration suitable for normally occupied areas.
20.2.2 Performance Requirements: Discharge HFC 227ea within 10 seconds and maintain 7.1 percent
concentration by volume at (70 deg F) 21 deg C for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas.
20.2.2.1 HFC 227ea concentration in hazard areas greater than 9.0 percent immediately after discharge
or less than 5.8 percent throughout holding time will not be accepted without written authorization
from Client and Authorities having Jurisdiction.

20.2.2.2 System Capabilities: Minimum (620-psig) 4278-kPa calculated working pressure and (360-psig)
2484-kPa initial charging pressure.
20.2.3 Performance Requirements: Discharge IG-541 within 60 seconds and maintain 38 percent
concentration by volume at (70 deg F) 21 deg C for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas.
20.2.3.1 IG-541 concentration in hazard areas greater than 40 percent immediately after discharge or less
than 32 percent throughout holding time will not be accepted without written authorization from
Client and Authorities having Jurisdiction.
20.2.3.2 System Capabilities: Minimum (2175-psig) 15-MPa calculated working pressure upstream from
orifice union, minimum (1000-psig) 6895-kPa calculated working pressure downstream from
orifice union, and (2175-psig) 15-MPa initial charging pressure.
20.2.4 Cross-Zoned Detection: Devices located in two separate zones. Sound alarm on activating
single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating single-detection device
in other zone.
20.2.5 Verified Detection: Devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on activating single-detection
device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating second-detection device.
20.2.6 System Operating Sequence:
20.2.6.1 Actuating First Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize audible alarm and
visual alarms (slow pulse), shut down air-conditioning and ventilating systems serving protected
area, close doors in protected area, and send signal to fire alarm system.
20.2.6.2 Actuating Second Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize audible and visual
alarms (fast pulse), shut down power to protected equipment, start time delay for extinguishing-
agent discharge for 30 seconds, and discharge extinguishing agent.
20.2.6.3 Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe lights inside and outside
the protected area
20.2.7 Manual stations shall immediately discharge extinguishing agent when activated.
20.2.8 Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being activated, and
switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of hand pressure on the switch will
cause agent discharge if the time delay has expired.
20.2.9 EPO: Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on actuation.
20.2.10 Low-Agent Pressure Switch: Initiate trouble alarm if sensing less than set pressure.
20.2.11 Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.
20.2.12 Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping and containers shall be capable of withstanding
the effects of earthquake motions determined by authorities having jurisdiction
20.3 Extra Materials
20.3.1 Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra
materials to Client.
20.3.1.1 Detection Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
20.3.1.2 Container Valves: Not less than 10 percent of amount of each size and type installed.

20.3.1.3 Nozzles: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
20.3.1.4 Extinguishing Agent: Not less than 100 percent of amount installed in largest hazard area.
Include pressure-rated containers with valves.
20.4 Extinguishing-Agent Containers
20.4.1 Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,
for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-pressure rating that matches system
charging pressure, valve, pressure switch, and pressure gage.
20.4.1.1 Finish: Manufacturer's standard color, enamel or epoxy paint or to suit local codes.
20.4.1.2 Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, selector switch, and connections for main-
and reserve-supply banks of multiple storage containers.
20.4.1.3 Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets consisting of steel straps
and channels; suitable for container support, maintenance, and tank refilling or replacement.
20.5 Fire-Extinguishing Clean Agent
20.5.1 Clean Agent: HFC 227ea, heptafluoropropane.
20.5.2 Clean Agent: IG-541, mixture of nitrogen, argon, and carbon dioxide inert gases.
20.6 Discharge Nozzles
20.6.1 Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy of type, discharge
pattern, and capacity required for application.
20.7 Manifold And Orifice Unions
20.7.1 Description: NRTL-listed device with minimum (2175-psig) 15-MPa pressure rating, to control
flow and reduce pressure of IG-541 gas in piping.
20.7.1.1 (NPS 2) DN 50 and Smaller: Piping assembly with orifice, sized for system design requirements.
20.7.1.2 (NPS 2-1/2) DN 65 and Larger: Piping assembly with nipple, sized for system design
requirements.
20.8 Control Panels
20.8.1 Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, including equipment and features required for
testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing system.
20.8.2 Power Requirements: 240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to system components
and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as needed to produce power at voltage
required for accessories and alarm devices.
20.8.3 Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, enameled-steel cabinet.
a. Mounting: Recessed flush with surface or Surface installed as indicated.
20.8.4 Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area.
a. Detection circuits equal to the required number of zones, or addressable devices

assigned to the required number of zones.
b. Manual pull-station circuit.

c. Alarm circuit.
d. Release circuit.
e. Abort circuit.
f. EPO circuit.
20.8.5 Provide the following control-panel features:
20.8.5.1 Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and operating system electrical
devices.
20.8.5.2 Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
20.8.5.3 Storage container, low-pressure indicator.
20.8.5.4 Service disconnect to interrupt system operation for maintenance with visual status indication on
the annunciator panel.
20.8.6 Annunciator Panel: Graphic type showing protected, hazard-area plans and locations of
detectors, abort, EPO, and manual stations. Include lamps to indicate device-initiating alarm,
electrical contacts for connection to control panel, and stainless-steel or aluminum enclosure.
20.8.7 Standby Power: Nickel-cadmium batteries with capacity to operate system for 72 hours and
alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include automatic battery charger, with varying charging rate
between trickle and high depending on battery voltage, that is capable of maintaining batteries
fully charged. Include manual voltage control, dc voltmeter, dc ammeter, electrical contacts for
connection to control panel, and suitable enclosure.
20.9 Detection Devices
20.9.1 Description: Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72, and include the following types:
20.9.1.1 Ionization Detectors: Comply with UL 268, dual-chamber type, having sampling and referencing
chambers, with smoke-sensing element.
20.9.1.2 Photoelectric Detectors: Comply with UL 268, consisting of LED light source and silicon
photodiode receiving element.
20.10 Manual Stations
20.10.1 General Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, with clear plastic hinged cover, 230-V ac or
low voltage compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.
20.10.2 Manual Release: "MANUAL RELEASE" caption, and red finish. Unit can manually discharge
extinguishing agent with operating device that remains engaged until unlocked.
20.10.3 Abort Switch: "ABORT" caption, momentary contact, with green finish.
20.10.4 EPO Switch: "EPO" caption, with yellow finish
20.11 Switches
20.11.1 Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, where available, 230-V ac or low voltage compatible
with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.
20.11.1.1 Low-Agent Pressure Switches: Pneumatic operation.

20.11.1.2 Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release circuit signal from main
supply to reserve supply.
20.11.1.3 Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device or electrical interlock to cause the door
operator to drive the door closed.
20.12 Alarm Devices
20.12.1 Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, low voltage, and surface mounting, unless otherwise
indicated.
20.12.2 Bells: Minimum (6-inch) 150-mm diameter.
20.12.3 Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
20.12.4 Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.
20.13 Testing
20.13.1 Perform field-acceptance tests of each clean-agent extinguishing system when installation is
complete. Perform system testing only after hazard-area enclosure construction has been
completed and openings sealed. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of
NFPA 2001, Section "Approval of Installations." Include the following to demonstrate compliance
with requirements:
a. Perform functional predischarge test.
b. Perform system functional operational test.
c. Check remote monitoring operations.
d. Check control-panel primary power source.
e. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.
20.13.2 Correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment
that cannot be corrected or does not perform as specified and indicated, then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
a. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
20.13.3 Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
20.13.3.1 After installing clean-agent extinguishing piping system and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
20.13.3.2 Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Sections
"Inspection and Test Procedures" and "System Function Tests." Certify compliance with test
parameters.
20.13.3.3 Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
20.13.3.4 Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
20.13.3.5 Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

20.13.4 Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
21.0 TESTING
General : All testing shall be performed under the work of this Section. All services required for
testing shall be a responsibility of the work of this Section. The contractor shall notify the
Engineer of all tests, 48 hours prior to testing.
The Fire Protection Piping Systems shall be tested hydrostatically for not less than 2 hours at 1.5
times the maximum system pressure.
If the systems are tested in sections, the connection to the previously tested section shall be
included.
All tests that may be required by the local Fire Authorities shall be performed under the work of
this Section in the presence of their representative if so required.
All leaks shall be corrected and the system re-tested until no leaks are found, at no extra cost.
When the various systems are completed, operation tests shall be run on all equipment to
demonstrate proper operating conditions. These tests shall be run under the observation of the
Engineer.
Cost to repair any damages to the building construction occasioned by pipe leaks or defective
materials shall be borne under the works of this Section, at no cost to the Client. All corrective
work shall commence immediately after damage occurs.
22.0 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Upon completion and approval of the systems, this Contractor shall provide an experienced
engineer to instruct the Client's operators in all details of operating and maintaining the system.
The Contractor shall provide three (3) sets of type written operation instructions, parts lists and
service manuals of all equipment, wiring diagrams, control diagrams and test reports, suitably
bound.
End of Section

PART A - SECTION 11
SNG SYSTEM
Revision History

PART A - SECTION 11
SNG SYSTEM
INDEX
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS. .......................................................................................................................... 3

2.0 PUMPS ................................................................................................................................................ 3
3.0 VAPORIZERS ..................................................................................................................................... 5
4.0 AIR MIXERS........................................................................................................................................ 6
5.0 PIPES, TUBES AND FITTINGS.......................................................................................................... 7
6.0 PIPING SPECIALTIES ........................................................................................................................ 8
7.0 JOINING MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 9
8.0 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES.................................................................................................... 9
9.0 MOTORIZED GAS VALVES ............................................................................................................. 10
10.0 EARTHQUAKE VALVES .................................................................................................................. 11
11.0 PRESSURE REGULATORS ............................................................................................................. 11
12.0 GAS METERS ................................................................................................................................... 13
13.0 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS.................................................................................................................... 13
14.0 PRESSURE GAUGES ...................................................................................................................... 14
15.0 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING .................................................................................. 14
16.0 GAS LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM ................................................................................................... 14
17.0 PERSONNEL .................................................................................................................................... 16
18.0 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION ...................................................................................................16
19.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................... 16

SNG System
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS.
1.1 The work shall include design check, supply, installation, testing, commissioning adjustment and
setting to work of the SNG installation.
1.2 By virtue of carrying out a check on the complete design, the contractor is to assume full
responsibility for the correct functioning of the system and to carry any liability or other insurance
or guarantee as may be necessary to protect all parties in this regard
1.3 The subcontractor shall be responsible for coordination with other trades and services and shall
provide all materials, labour and supervision, equipment, tools, appliances, services, etc. for
carrying out the following items of work:
a. SNG Storage tanks with all supports, valves and accessories as per NFPA 58.
b. SNG distribution pipework with all valves, supports, controls, etc.
c. SNG regulation and metering devices.
d. SNG detection and alarm system.
e. Fire protection installation for SNG tanks like deluge system for above ground tanks and
cathodic protection for under ground tanks.
f. Protective painting of all materials installed within this section of the contract.
g. Identification of all services.
h. Electrical power and control panels for power supply to equipment including cabling from
panels to respective equipment.
i. All builder's work including breaking and making good of walls, floors, etc., equipment
foundation pads, sleeves, etc.
j. Hoisting of heavy equipment.
1.4 All installation shall be carried out by contractor approved by the Authority having Jurisdiction.
1.5 All equipment and materials supplied shall comply with the requirements of the Authority having
Jurisdiction.
1.6 Installation shall comply with the requirements of :
a. The local Authority having Jurisdiction
b. NFPA 58
c. British Standards Code of practice SNG 1TA.
2.0 PUMPS
2.1 Pump Construction:
a. Casing: Ductile-iron casing with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet.
b. Internal Pressure Relief Valve: For pump protection in addition to the external pressure
relief valves.
c. Impeller: Carbon or composite vane in cast-iron rotor.

SNG System
d. Pump Shaft: Carbon steel.
e. Seal: Mechanical with Buna-N o-ring.
f. Pump Bearings: Ball bearings with grease fittings.
g. Baseplate: Bent carbon-steel channel or structural channel.
2.2 Motor:
a. Motor Sizes: Large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service
factor range above 1.0.
b. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements of Authority

Having Jurisdiction.
c. Motor Speeds: Single.
d. Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.
2.3 Factory-Installed Piping and Specialties:
2.3.1 Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B; Schedule 40 seamless black steel with welded
fittings and joints or seamless Schedule 80 for threaded malleable-iron fittings and joints.
2.3.2 Piping Specialties for Each Pump:
a. Bypass valve.
b. Isolation valves.
c. Unions for each connection.
d. Check valve.
e. Basket strainer.
f. Pressure gages for suction and discharge connections.
g. Hydrostatic relief valve.
h. Pilot-operated, pressure-regulating valve.
2.4 Braided-jacket flexible connectors for suction and discharge connections.
2.5 Pump and Piping Finish: For outdoor installation, exposed metal surfaces mechanically cleaned,
primed, and painted for resistance to corrosion.
2.6 Controls:
a. Explosion-proof controls enclosure.
b. Magnetic starter package with automatic alternator.
c. Pressure-activated start and stop.
d. Lag pump starts if lead pump fails.

SNG System
e. Audible and visual indication of pump failure.
3.0 VAPORIZERS
3.1 Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested vaporizer with heat exchanger sealed
pressure-tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket, flue-gas vent, liquid fuel supply
and vapor connections, and controls. Assembly shall be FMG labeled and comply with NFPA 58
and NFPA 70.
3.2 Fabricate base and attachment to vaporizers with reinforcement strong enough to resist vaporizer
movement during a seismic event when steel base is anchored to a concrete base.
3.3 Casing:
a. Mineral-fiber insulation, a minimum of (2 inches) 50 mm thick, surrounding the heat

exchanger.
b. Integral one-piece skid with forklift access holes.
c. Lifting lugs on top of vaporizer.
d. Flue rain cap and bird screen.
e. Sheet metal jacket with screw-fastened closures and powder-coat protective finish.
f. Mounting base to secure boiler to concrete base.
g. Control Compartment Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4, enclosure, explosion-proof.
3.4 SNG Liquid and Vapor Circuit Specialties:
a. Y-type strainer with drain valve at inlet.
b. Vaporizer coil safety pressure relief valve.
c. Vaporizer coil blowdown valve.
d. Vapor outlet isolation valve.
e. Pressure gages, a minimum of (2-1/2 inches) 63 mm in diameter, at liquid inlet and vapor
discharge. Gages shall have operating-temperature ranges so normal operating range is
at approximately 50 percent of full range.
f. Inlet safety solenoid valve to close with off-normal operation alarm.
g. Backflow check valve in bypass around inlet safety solenoid valve.
h. Liquid carryover or float-type safety shutoff switch.
i. SNG Vapor Filter: Steel shell designed and manufactured per ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1; factory mounted on vaporizer discharge. Shells
larger than (5 inches) 125 mm shall be ASME "U" stamped. Fill with stainless-steel,
woven-mesh coalescing element to remove 99 percent of particles larger than 10
microns. (250-psig) 1723-kPa minimum working pressure. Finish with corrosion-resistant
coating for an exterior application. Include factory-mounted and -piped, differential
pressure gage with gage cocks in and out, and minimum (NPS ¾) DN 20 full-port, ball-
type drain valve.

SNG System
3.5 Indirect-Type, Direct-Fired Heat Exchanger:
3.5.1 Description: ASME-rated and -stamped, SNG, vaporizer vessel with a replaceable, immersion-
type, electric heating element.
3.5.2 Heating Element Operating Controls:
a. Operating controls shall maintain safe operating conditions. Safety controls limit
operation of the element. Microprocessor-based control system integrates safety and
operating controls.
b. Operating Vapor-Pressure Control: Factory wired and mounted to control heating

element.
c. High-Pressure Cutoff: Manual reset cuts of heating element if operating conditions rise
above maximum design pressure.
d. Alarm Bell and Rotary Beacon: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch;
shall sound alarm for out-of-normal conditions.
3.6 Building Management System Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable
building management system to monitor and control set points and display vaporizer status and
alarms.
4.0 AIR MIXERS
4.1 Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -calibrated, and -tested, blower-assisted air mixer
with surge tank, built on a steel base; including vapor supply and discharge connections, and
controls. Assembly shall be FMG labeled and comply with NFPA 58 and NFPA 70.
4.2 Fabricate base and attachment to mixers with reinforcement strong enough to resist air mixer
movement during a seismic event when steel base is anchored to a concrete base.
4.3 Mounting Skid, Panels, and Surge Tank:
a. Integral one-piece skid with forklift access holes.
b. Lifting lugs on top of air mixer.
c. Powder-coat protective finish.
d. Mounting base to secure boiler to concrete base.
e. Control Compartment Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4, enclosure housing control panels.
f. ASME-stamped surge tank with venturi, isolation valves, excess-flow safeties, and safety
relief valves.
4.4 Blower: Positive-displacement, rotary-lobe type.
a. Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated ball bearings.
4.5 SNG Circuit Specialties:
a. Venturi solenoid valves.
b. Venturi nozzles, minimum of 3, for minimum of 10:1 turndown capacity.
c. Venturi silencers.

SNG System
d. Mist filter and strainer with pressure differential gage, and blowdown ball valve.
e. Inlet and outlet isolation valves.
f. Pressure gages, a minimum of (2-½ inches) 63 mm in diameter, at inlet and discharge.

Gages shall have operating-temperature ranges so normal operating range is at
approximately 50 percent of full range.
4.6 Air-Mixer Controls:
4.6.1 Controls shall maintain safe operating conditions. The following safety controls limit the
operation of the air mixer. All safety controls are manual reset.
a. Low-inlet-vapor pressure.
b. High- or low-discharge pressure.
4.6.2 Alarm Bell and Rotary Beacon: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall
sound alarm for out-of-normal conditions.
4.6.3 Control Transformer: 115-V maximum control voltage.
4.7 Mount on common skid with vaporizer.
5.0 PIPES, TUBES AND FITTINGS
5.1 Pipes and Tubes
a. SNG fill line shall be seamless steel to ASTM A 53, A 106 Grade B, API 5L Grade B,
SCH 80.
b. Below grade distribution pipework shall be seamless steel to ASTM A 53, A 106, SCH 40
with Denso / Bitumen tap wrapping or HDPE / MDPE SDR 11.
c. Above grade distribution pipework shall be seamless carbon steel pipe to ASTM A53,
Grade B, SCH 40. Above ground copper pipe shall confirm to ASTM B 280/BS 2871.
d. Final connections to equipment shall be flexible hose.
e. SNG distribution pipe work installed in enclosed, unventilated areas or basement floors
shall be pipe in pipe with linear gas leak detectors.
5.2 Plastic Mechanical Couplings, (NPS 1-1/2) DN 40 and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE
pipe.
a. PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring.
b. Buna-nitrile seals.
c. Acetal collets.
d. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener.
5.3 Plastic Mechanical Couplings, (NPS 2) DN 50 and Larger: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE
pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.
a. Fiber-reinforced plastic body.
b. PE body tube.

SNG System
c. Buna-nitrile seals.
d. Acetal collets.
e. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
5.4 Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE
pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.
a. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.
b. Buna-nitrile seals.
c. Cadmium plated steel bolts, washers, and nuts.
d. Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed underground.
6.0 PIPING SPECIALTIES
6.1 Flexible Piping Joints:
a. Approved for SNG service.
b. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.
c. Minimum working pressure of (250 psig) 1723 kPa and (250 deg F) 121 deg C operating
temperature, upgrade as required to suit system pressure.
d. Flanged- or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be

capable of minimum (3/4-inch) 20-mm misalignment.
e. Maximum (36-inch) 914-mm length for liquid SNG lines.
6.2 Appliance Flexible Connectors:
a. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.
b. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.
c. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.
d. Operating-Pressure Rating: (0.5 psig) 3.45 kPa minimum or as required to suit system
pressure.
e. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.
f. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
g. Maximum Length: (72 inches) 1830 mm.
6.3 Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.
a. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.
b. Nitrile seals.
c. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.

SNG System
d. For indoor or outdoor applications.
e. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.
6.4 Y-Pattern Strainers:
a. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
b. End Connections: Threaded ends for (NPS 2) DN 50 and smaller; flanged ends for
(NPS 2-1/2) DN 65 and larger.
c. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
d. CWP Rating: (125 psig) 862 kPa minimum upgrade as required to suit system pressure.
7.0 JOINING MATERIALS
7.1 Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for SNG.
7.2 Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
7.3 Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than (1000 deg F) 540 deg C complying
with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
8.0 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
8.1 Metallic Valves, (NPS 2) DN 50 and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply with ASME B16.33 and
UL 842.
8.1.1 CWP Rating: (250 psig) 1723 kPa minimum, upgrade as required to suit system pressure.
8.1.2 Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
8.1.3 Socket ends for brazed joints.
8.1.4 Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves.
8.1.5 Listing by CSA or agency acceptable to Authorities having Jurisdiction for valves (1 inch) 25 mm
and smaller.
8.1.6 Valves (1-1/4 inch) 32 mm and larger shall be suitable for SNG service, with "WOG" indicated on
valve body.
8.2 General Requirements for Metallic Valves, (NPS 2) DN 50 and Smaller for Vapor Service:
Comply with ASME B16.33.
8.2.2 Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
8.2.3 Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
8.2.5 Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to Authorities having Jurisdiction for valves (1
inch) 25 mm and smaller.

SNG System
8.2.6 Service Mark: Valves (1-1/4 inch) 32 mm to (NPS 2) DN 50 shall have initials "WOG"
permanently marked on valve body.
8.3 General Requirements for Metallic Valves, (NPS 2-1/2) DN 65 and Larger: Comply with
ASME B16.38.
8.3.2 Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
8.3.4 Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.
9.0 MOTORIZED GAS VALVES
a. Hydrostatic Relief Valves: Comply with NFPA 58.
b. Operating Pressure: (350 psig) 2413 kPa, upgrade as required to suit system pressure.
c. Body: Brass.
d. Spring: Stainless steel.
e. Disc and Seat: Nitrile.
f. Brass body and stainless-steel, spring-operated valve with resilient rubber disc seat and
protective cap.
g. Factory set and tested.
h. Listing: Valves listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
i. Valve shall reseat after relieving pressure.
9.2 Automatic Gas Valves: Comply with ANSI Z21.21.
a. Body: Brass or aluminum.
b. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber.
c. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel.
d. Normally closed.
e. Visual position indicator.
9.3 Electrically Operated Valves: Comply with UL 429.
a. Pilot operated.
b. Body: Brass or aluminum.
c. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber.
d. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel.

SNG System
e. 24-V ac, 50 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil, replaceable.
f. NEMA ICS 6, Type 4, coil enclosure.
g. Normally closed.
h. Visual position indicator.
10.0 EARTHQUAKE VALVES
10.1 Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25.
a. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to Authorities having Jurisdiction.
b. Operating Pressure: (5 psig) 34.5 kPa minimum, upgrade as required to suit system
pressure.
c. Cast-aluminum body with nickel-plated chrome steel internal parts.
d. Nitrile-rubber valve washer.
e. Sight windows for visual indication of valve position.
f. Threaded-end connections complying with ASME B1.20.1.
10.2 Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25.
a. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to Authorities having Jurisdiction.
b. Operating Pressure: (0.5 psig) 3.45 kPa minimum, upgrade as required to suit system
pressure.
c. Cast-aluminum body with stainless-steel internal parts.
d. Nitrile-rubber, reset-stem o-ring seal.
e. Valve position, open or closed, indicator.
f. Composition valve seat with clapper held by spring or magnet locking mechanism.
g. Level indicator.
h. End Connections: Threaded for valves (NPS 2) DN 50 and smaller; flanged for valves
(NPS 2-1/2) DN 65 and larger.
11.0 PRESSURE REGULATORS
a. Single stage and suitable for SNG.
b. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
c. Elevation compensator.
d. End Connections: Threaded for regulators (NPS 2) DN 50 and smaller; flanged for
regulators (NPS 2-1/2) DN 65 and larger.

SNG System
11.2 Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
a. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
b. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
c. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
d. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
e. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
f. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
g. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
h. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream and not exceed
150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
i. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
j. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping.
k. Maximum Inlet Pressure: To suit system pressure.
11.3 Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
a. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
d. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
e. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
f. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
g. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
h. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream and not exceed
150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
i. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
j. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping.
k. Maximum Inlet Pressure: To suit system pressure.
11.4 Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
a. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.

SNG System
d. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
e. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
f. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.
g. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by
Authorities having Jurisdiction.
h. Maximum Inlet Pressure: To suit system pressure.
12.0 GAS METERS
12.1 Diaphragm-Type Meters: Comply with ANSI B109.1 ANSI B109.2.
a. Case: Die-cast aluminum.
b. Connections: Steel threads.
c. Diaphragm: Synthetic fabric.
d. Diaphragm Support Bearings: Self-lubricating.
e. Compensation: Continuous temperature and pressure.
f. Meter Index: Cubic feet and liters.
g. Meter Case and Index: Tamper resistant.
h. Remote meter reader compatible.
i. Maximum Inlet Pressure: (100 psig) 690 kPa pressure.
j. Pressure Loss: Maximum (0.5-inch wg) 124 Pa.
k. Accuracy: Maximum plus or minus 1.0 percent.
13.0 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
13.1 Dielectric Unions:
a. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: (150 psig) 1034 kPa, upgrade as required to suit
system pressure.
b. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.
c. Insulating materials suitable for SNG.
d. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,
plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials.

SNG System
13.2 Dielectric Flanges:
system pressure.
b. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.
c. Insulating materials suitable for SNG.
d. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,
13.3 Dielectric-Flange Kits:
system pressure.
b. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly.
c. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt

sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
d. Insulating materials suitable for SNG.
e. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,
14.0 PRESSURE GAUGES
14.1 Each bank of SNG cylinder manifold shall have a pressure gauge.
14.2 For high-pressure section, the gauge shall have a range of 0 to 300 psi (0 to 20.1 bar).
14.3 For low-pressure section, the gauge shall have a range of 0 to 50 psi (0 to 3.45 bar).
15.0 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING
15.1 Electrical circuits shall not utilize gas piping or components as conductors.
15.2 All electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated control devices in a piping
system shall confirm to the requirements of NFPA 70.
15.3 Any essential safety control (in the vaporizer) depending on electrical current as the operating
medium shall be of a type that will shut off (fail safe) the flow of gas in the event of current failure.
16.0 GAS LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM
A gas leak detection system shall be installed to monitor for gas leaks at different locations of the
gas network.
16.1 Control Panel
16.1.1 The central control panel shall be located in the entrance of the building and shall easily be
accessible in the event of an emergency.
16.1.2 The central panel shall have a modular design incorporating input alarm/display module for each
gas detector. Each channel shall have indication for low alarm at 15% LEL, high alarm at 30%
LEL and fault at 0-100% LEL indicator.

SNG System
Main SNG supply shall be shut off at 30% LEL indication.
16.1.3 The concentration of the gas shall be displayed on a common indicator with selector switches to
display the concentration of the desired channel or zone indicator.
16.1.4 Below the gas control panel is the system control panel which shall have the following
indications:
a. AC healthy
b. DC healthy
c. Sprinkler on
d. Gas pressure low
e. Gas pressure high
f. Gas solenoid valve operated
g. Common fire signals
h. Gas leak high
16.1.5 The panel shall have the following switches:
a. Sprinkler manual operate
b. Gas manual shut off
c. Test lamp
d. System reset
16.2 Gas Detectors
The gas detectors shall use a pellistor sensor to detect flammable gases and vapours. The
sensor shall be housed in a stainless steel, flame proof housing, fitted onto an explosion proof
junction box (Tank Area).
16.3 Sounder Flasher
A sounder cum flasher unit shall be installed in the vicinity of the panel located in a visible area.
16.4 Cables
MICC cables or FP 200 cables of at least 1.5 sq. mm area shall be used to interconnect between
each detector and the control panel.
16.5 Logic of operation
16.5.1 When low level gas leak is detected in any zone, local internal alarm and indication shall show on
the control panel. When high level gas leak is detected in any zone, the following sequence shall
occur:
a. The solenoid valve in the gas distribution channel shall be closed.
b. External alarm shall be operated.

SNG System
16.5.2 Connection to the fire alarm system:
a. In the event of a fire alarm signal, the following sequence shall occur:
1. The solenoid valve in the gas distribution channel shall be closed.
2. The sprinkler system shall operate.
b. In the event of an emergency, it shall be possible to by pass the automatic system and
operate the system manually, this shall include:
1. Manual shut off / on of the gas.
2. Manual operation of the sprinkler system On / Off
3. Manual reset
17.0 PERSONNEL
The LP gas system shall be installed by specialised personnel supervised by a specialized

engineer.
18.0 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION
All pipe work, pipe supports and brackets shall be painted with 2 undercoats and 2 finishing coats
of approved paint.
SNG piping shall be painted with a specific colour different than other pipes. Orange or yellow
colours are recommended. Valves shall also be painted. Direction arrows to indicate the flow of
gas in the system shall be painted.
19.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
19.1 The system in parts and as a whole shall be tested to ensure that it will operate safely, without
leaks and to the applicable specifications.
19.2 Commissioning of the system shall be carried out to demonstrate that all the equipment and the
whole system are in good working order.
19.3 The SNG contractor shall accommodate any additional testing required by authorities such as
Civil Defence in order to obtain their acceptance of the system.
19.4 The gas network shall be leak tested using gases such as nitrogen or argon. Oxygen or
flammable gases will not be used. The leak test shall include all the different pressure stages of
the system including:
a. The filling line operating pressure up to 20 bar.
b. The tank and high pressure stage operating pressure 16.5 bar
c. The first stage regulator operating pressure 1.5 bar.
d. The second stage pressure, operating pressure 37 mbar.
19.5 Test pressure shall be at least 1.5 times the operating pressure. The leak test duration shall be 1
hour. The specified test pressure shall be monitored for a minimum of one hour during which the
soap water method shall be used to leak test every joint. If no leak is detected and the pressure
gauge indicates no drop in the test pressure then the system will be proven to be leak free.

SNG System
19.6 If a leak is found, the leaking joint shall be repaired or the leaking equipment shall be replaced.
The testing procedure shall be repeated to prove the complete system as leak free.
19.7 A test report shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
End of Section

SNG System

Mechanical Specs - SPECIFICATIONS

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Mechanical Specs - SPECIFICATIONS

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CONSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE

ON PLOT NO. (R-22, R-23 & R-24) AT AL-

MAIN WORKS PACKAGE

PROPOSED 3 TYPICAL RESIDENTIAL

ON PLOTS R-22, R-23, AND R-24

MAIN WORKS PACKAGE

VOLUME I : TENDER & CONTRACT CONDITIONS

VOLUME III : BILLS OF QUANTITIES

VOLUME IV : TENDER DRAWINGS

VOLUME V : SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT

00 July 2015 Final MEP Specification SM/DB YS/YA JH

Rev. Date Description of Revision Prepared By Checked By Approved By

SECTION 1 : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 3 : AIR CONDITIONING PIPE WORK

SECTION 4 : DUCT WORK AND AIRSIDE EQUIPMENT

SECTION 5 : AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION EQUIPMENT

SECTION 6 : INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC

SECTION 7 : TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

SECTION 8 : PLUMBING WORKS

SECTION 9 : SOIL, WASTE VENT AND STORM WATER SYSTEMS

SECTION 10 : FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

SECTION 11 : SNG SYSTEM

Part A - Mechanical 2 of 2 July 2015

00 July 2015 Final MEP Specification SM/DB YS/YA JH

Rev. Date Description of Revision Prepared By Checked By Approved By

1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 4

Part A - Section 1 2 of 31 July 2015

36.0 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF WATER PIPING SYSTEMS ............................................................ 18

Part A - Section 1 3 of 31 July 2015

3.0 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS.

4.0 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS.

Part A - Section 1 4 of 31 July 2015

5.0 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

6.0 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS.

Part A - Section 1 5 of 31 July 2015

7.0 SHOP DRAWINGS & MATERIAL SUBMITTAL

Part A - Section 1 6 of 31 July 2015

8.0 FORMAT OF INFORMATION SUBMITTED

Submission Electronic Format

9.0 RECORD DRAWINGS

Part A - Section 1 7 of 31 July 2015

9.4 Provide complete sets of record drawings in the following format:

b. Paper of original size.

c. Plastic encapsulated in A3 size.

9.5 Include the following in A3 size:

a. A legend for symbols used.

b. A legend for colour – coded services.

10.0 PLANTROOM SCHEDULES

10.2 Frame schedules under glass or encapsulate in plastic as agreed.

10.3 As a minimum, show the following on plantroom schedules:

a. First aid instructions for treatment of persons after eclectic shock.

d. Circuit diagrams, consisting of schematic drawings of circuit layouts showing identification

11.0 TEMPORARY SERVICE.

13.0 PROTECTION AND STORAGE

Part A - Section 1 8 of 31 July 2015

14.0 EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT

Part A - Section 1 9 of 31 July 2015

17.0 WORK TO CONTINUE.

18.0 STANDARDS AND AUTHORITIES.

a. Uniform plumbing code of USA.

b. National Plumbing Code

c. Institute of Plumbing (UK)

h. British Standards and Codes

i. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)